844 Series

Carbon/Sulfur Analyzer
with Cornerstone® Brand Software
Instruction Manual
CS844/CS844ES/C844/S844/S844ES
Version 2.9x
Part Number 200-784
February 2020

Patent Pending in U.S. and other countries.

© 2020 LECO Corporation
Minor revisions may not be reflected in this manual.

LECO Corporation LECO Europe B.V.

3000 Lakeview Avenue · St. Joseph, MI 49085 Vouersweg 118
Phone: 269-983-5531 · Fax: 269-983-3850 6161 AG Geleen
[email protected] · www.leco.com · (P.O. Box 1174 - 6160 BD Geleen)
ISO-9001:2015 Q-994 The Netherlands
Phone: 31-46-4747473 · Fax: 31-46-4747333
[email protected] www.nl.leco-europe.com
LECO is a registered trademark of LECO Corporation.

Original Instructions
Quality at LECO Corporation means understanding our customer’s
requirements and establishing specifications that clearly define those
requirements. The essence of our quality philosophy is the commitment to
quality objectives, aimed at never-ending improvement and complete
customer satisfaction.

Safety Symbols
These symbols may be found on LECO equipment or their components.
Some of the symbols shown may not appear in this manual. These
symbols indicate the use of specific safety guidelines. Important safety
information is highlighted in this manual by one of the following symbols,
as well as by WARNING and CAUTION statements. Operator and service
personnel must follow these instructions for personal safety and to
prevent damage to the instrument.

CAUTION

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING

HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING

EXPLOSION HAZARD

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES

PINCH HAZARD

PINCH HAZARD

PINCH HAZARD

PINCH HAZARD

FIRE HAZARD
ROTATING FAN BLADES

EXPLOSIVE

FLAMMABLE

OXIDIZING

COMPRESSED GAS

CORROSIVE

TOXIC

HARMFUL

HEALTH HAZARD

ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD

PROTECTIVE GLOVES

PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR

EAR PROTECTION

NOT ALLOWED
Cautions, Warnings, and Residual Risks

CAUTIONS
· This instrument should be operated only by technically qualified and trained
individuals who have fully read and understood these instructions.
· It is highly recommended that users attend training courses provided by LECO
Corp. prior to operating this equipment.
· This instrument should be operated only in accordance with these instructions.
· The operator should follow all of the warnings and cautions set forth in this
manual and employ all applicable standard laboratory safety procedures.
· If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection measures provided by the equipment may be impaired.
· Maintenance is to be completed by a Responsible Body: a person who has the
proper training and knowledge to perform the task safely.
· Consumables and replacement parts other than those specified and provided by
the manufacturer may cause damage to the instrument as well as impair the
protection measures provided by the equipment.
· Instruments can be very heavy. Proper equipment must be used to safely
transport, position, and lift equipment (if necessary).
· Front panels and other cosmetic parts of this instrument are not designed to be
weight bearing. DO NOT use such parts as lifting points, or damage may result.
ALWAYS lift near the feet at the sides or the rear of the instrument base.

RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK

· Disconnect the equipment from facility power before servicing or removing any
guard or tool-accessible panel.
· The plug on the power cord that connects the instrument to facility power must
remain accessible at all times. A “lock-out” device can be installed over the plug
when servicing the equipment if so required by local electric code.
· Qualified personnel must ensure that the receptacle providing the facility power
has a reliable connection to Protective Earth (Safety Ground). A failure in the
Protective Earth terminal may impair the protection provided by the equipment.
· Detachable/interchangeable power cords are available in several wire gauges,
voltages, and current ratings and can easily be used with the wrong equipment.
Make sure properly rated power cords are used for each piece of equipment.
The use of inadequately rated power cords can cause a Fire and/or Electrical
Shock Hazard.
· During the installation and operation of this instrument, do not position
equipment or materials so that it is difficult to operate or access the On/Off
switch (AC Mains Disconnect Device). This switch must remain easily accessible
to the user at all times.
· If the instrument power cord is wired directly into an electrical box, the box
must supply a lockable disconnect, be located close to the instrument, and
remain accessible at all times.
· Facility power connections must meet all local, state, and national electric
codes. In some locations, this may require changing the power cord,
plug/receptacle, or the cordage used. If unsure, always consult with a local
electrical authority.
 SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS
Most LECO instruments produce sound pressure levels far below 70 dB(A) and
generally do not require ear protection to be worn by the operator in most laboratory
environments.

The sound pressure levels on some LECO instruments, such as saws,

polisher/grinders, or instruments using vacuum cleaners, may exceed 70 dB(A) for
short periods of time, depending on how the instrument is used and the types of
materials that are being processed.

Because sound pressure levels can be accumulative and dependent on many factors,
including other equipment operating in the vicinity of a workstation, it is
recommended by some authorities that a Time Weighted Sound Pressure Level be
measured or calculated at the operator's position after installation to assess the
possibility of the need for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as ear
protection.
INSTRUMENTS WITH ACCESSIBLE HIGH TEMPERATURES

RISK OF SEVERE BURNS

· Do not touch hot surfaces near ovens, heaters, furnaces, crucibles, reagent
tubes, catalyst tubes, combustion tubes, etc.
· Wait for surfaces to cool to a safe temperature before performing any
maintenance or service operations in these areas.

INSTRUMENTS WITH HOT CRUCIBLES AND MATERIALS

RISK OF SEVERE BURNS

· Spent crucibles are very HOT after leaving the furnace and can remain hot for a
long period of time. Do not touch spent crucibles with bare hands.
· Use proper Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and provided tools when
handling hot materials.
· Wait for surfaces to cool to a safe temperature before performing any
maintenance or service operations in these areas.

RISK OF FIRE
· Empty spent crucible bucket into a nonflammable, heat-resistant container
only.
· Dispose of hot materials into a fireproof container only.
· Do not attempt to permanently dispose of spent crucibles or any hot materials
until they have cooled to a safe temperature.
INSTRUMENTS WITH GLASS TUBES

RISK OF INJURY
· Wear protective gloves and eye protection whenever handling glass tubes to
prevent injury. Other Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) may also be
required.

RISK OF SEVERE BURNS

· Glass tubes used with reduction and catalyst heaters may be hot. The materials
inside these tubes may also be hot. Do not attempt to remove tubes until they
have cooled to a safe temperature.

RISK OF INJURY
· Visually inspect all glass tubing before installation or repacking. Do not use, and
properly dispose of, any glass tubing that has cracks, chips, or scarring.
Damaged tubes could possibly rupture under pressure.
· Depressurization of the Incoming Carrier Gas may be necessary before removal
of glass tubes to prevent injury or damage to the tubes during the removal
process. Turn Off the gas in the software and wait approximately 1 minute
before attempting to remove any tubes.

INSTRUMENTS WITH PNEUMATICS, COMPRESSED GASES, AND

FLUIDS

CAUTION – RISK OF INJURY OR DAMAGE TO

INSTRUMENT
· An external shutoff device must be provided to isolate and depressurize the
supply from the instrument. This device must be easily accessible to the user. A
means must be provided to indicate that the system has been depressurized,
such as a clearly visible pressure gauge. The local codes in some areas may
require the shutoff devices (supply isolators) to be lockable.
· Use of external pressure-limiting devices are required to ensure that maximum-
rated pressures cannot be exceeded.
· Depressurize the entire system and all supply lines prior to performing any
service or maintenance tasks on this instrument.
· External flexible supply lines/piping/hoses/tubes must be securely supported
and restrained every 1 meter or shielded by suitable means to reduce sudden
hazardous movement (whiplash) resulting from leakage or a failure in the
connections.
· Pipes and hoses must be properly marked to clearly identify their purpose and
connection point.
 · All external elements (pipes, hoses, pop-offs, regulators, gas bottles [tanks],
receivers, valves, etc.) must be properly rated for the pressures available in
both a normal and a fault condition.
· All external elements must be properly rated for the type of gas, fluid, and/or
materials the system is supplying or venting.
· All external elements must be protected from damage from external effects.
· All external elements (especially gas bottles) must be adequately secured to
avoid injury or damage.
· It is the responsibility of the facility owner or utility supplier to perform a risk
assessment to ensure that a fault in external components of the fluid power
system does not cause injury or damage to equipment and to install risk-
lowering protection measures if necessary.
· Hazardous gases must be safely vented into a non-hazardous area with a
connection to atmosphere.
· Regularly scheduled maintenance must be performed by the facility’s
management to check for leaks and make sure drains are clear, vents are
working properly, filters are replaced, etc.
· Where the quantity of available gas and the volume of the room can cause an
asphyxiation hazard, the facility’s management is responsible for installing
proper safety measures.
· Where flammable gases are used, the facility’s management is responsible for
ensuring that an unsafe condition cannot occur external to the instrument and
for installing proper safety measures.

INSTRUMENTS THAT USE HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS

RISK OF CHEMICAL BURNS, INHALATION,

CHEMICAL REACTIONS, AND FIRE

The gaseous and solid productions of this analytical instrument may be toxic relative
to the sample material analyzed. Normal laboratory procedures and regulations for
handling such materials should be followed. Please refer to the Safety Data Sheet
(SDS) of the sample material for further information regarding these potential
hazards, and follow the environmental protection measures and regulations
applicable to your region.
· Be aware of all hazardous chemicals, solvents, accelerants, oxidizers, cleaners,
reagent materials, etc., used by this instrument and its methods. Not all
instruments use hazardous chemicals or materials.
· Obtain Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for all hazardous chemicals and materials
used, and store them near where they are used. Users must familiarize
themselves with all warnings, precautions, and required Safety Procedures for
the handling, use, and disposal of such materials.
· Safety information and warnings may also appear on the chemical bottles or
containers.
· Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) if required.
· Avoid vapors and direct contact with chemicals.
1 Introduction
The Introduction chapter contains general information about the
CS844, C844, and S844 Carbon/Sulfur Analyzers, including safety
guidelines and warranty terms. Reference this chapter for replacement
parts, operating supplies, and optional accessories. To place an order
by phone, call our customer service department toll-free in the United
States at 1-800-292-6141 or 269-985-5496. Orders may also be sent
by fax to 269-982-8977.
The screenshot illustrations used throughout the manual are examples
only and may or may not be applicable to specific procedures.

1 Introduction.................................................................................... 1–9
Illustrations ................................................................................ 1–13
Software License ......................................................................... 1–19
Warranty.................................................................................... 1–23
WEEE......................................................................................... 1–24
LECO-Supplied Hewlett-Packard® Computers .................................. 1–29
LECO-Supplied Balances............................................................... 1–30
Declaration of Conformity Statement ............................................. 1–31
Product Safety ............................................................................ 1–32
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices............................................ 1–33
Radio-Frequency Disturbance ....................................................... 1–35
Flicker and Harmonic Emissions .................................................... 1–36
About this Manual ....................................................................... 1–37
Equipment Packages.................................................................... 1–38
Options ...................................................................................... 1–43
Components and Accessories ........................................................ 1–48
Specifications ............................................................................. 1–54
2 Installations.................................................................................... 2–1
Illustrations .................................................................................. 2–3
Lifting and Moving the Instrument................................................... 2–5
Instrument Front Panel Overview CS844/C844 ................................. 2–6
Instrument Front Panel Overview S844 ............................................ 2–8

Introduction 844 Series 1–9

 Instrument Rear Panel Overview ................................................... 2–10
Installing the Analyzer ................................................................. 2–12
Installing the Oscillator Tube ........................................................ 2–16
Installing the Pedestal ................................................................. 2–17
Installing the Electrical................................................................. 2–18
Installing the Vacuum Cleaner ...................................................... 2–20
Installing the Computer ............................................................... 2–22
Setting Up PC for Use .................................................................. 2–31
LECO Cornerstone Brand Software ................................................ 2–32
Setting up Microsoft Windows for Touch Screen Operation................ 2–38
3 Analysis ......................................................................................... 3–1
Illustrations .................................................................................. 3–4
Software Overview ........................................................................ 3–5
Performing Common Software Tasks ............................................. 3–16
Daily Startup Procedure ............................................................... 3–28
Crucibles .................................................................................... 3–29
Logging in Replicates for Analysis.................................................. 3–31
Performing Blanks ....................................................................... 3–37
Performing Calibrations................................................................ 3–38
Performing Drifts......................................................................... 3–49
Recalculating .............................................................................. 3–52
Running an Analysis .................................................................... 3–53
Working with Sample Filters ......................................................... 3–56
4 Settings ......................................................................................... 4–1
Configuring the Display.................................................................. 4–5
Creating and Editing Methods ....................................................... 4–13
Creating and Editing Fields ........................................................... 4–25
Creating and Editing Reports ........................................................ 4–33
Printing Reports .......................................................................... 4–38
Creating and Editing Standards..................................................... 4–39
Creating and Editing Templates..................................................... 4–41
Creating and Editing Transports .................................................... 4–44
Working with User Permissions ..................................................... 4–51
LECO Cornerstone for Mobile Devices............................................. 4–60
5 Instrument ..................................................................................... 5–1
Illustrations .................................................................................. 5–4

1–10 844 Series Introduction

 Automation .................................................................................. 5–5
Installing the Balance .................................................................. 5–13
Data Management ....................................................................... 5–22
Detectors ................................................................................... 5–27
Maintenance ............................................................................... 5–30
Remote Access ........................................................................... 5–33
System ...................................................................................... 5–36
6 Maintenance ................................................................................... 6–1
Illustrations .................................................................................. 6–4
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 6–5
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings ................................................. 6–8
Replacing the Incoming Scrubber Tube ............................................ 6–9
Replacing the Incoming Purifier Tube............................................. 6–12
Replacing the Catalyst Tube ......................................................... 6–16
Replacing the Cellulose Trap Tube ................................................. 6–19
Replacing the Flow Scrubber Tube ................................................. 6–21
Cleaning the Screen Filters ........................................................... 6–24
Replacing the Pneumatic Gas Filter................................................ 6–25
Replacing the Particle Filter .......................................................... 6–27
Maintaining the Auto Cleaner ........................................................ 6–28
Maintaining the Manual Cleaner .................................................... 6–32
Maintaining the Combustion Tube.................................................. 6–33
Maintaining the Dust Filter............................................................ 6–35
Cleaning the Dust Filter Assembly ................................................. 6–37
Maintaining the Furnace Out Tube ................................................. 6–41
Replacing the Dust Eject (Pinch Valve) Tubing ................................ 6–44
Maintaining the Coolant System .................................................... 6–46
Maintaining the Vacuum Cleaner ................................................... 6–48
Performing Gas Dose Maintenance ................................................ 6–49
Cleaning the Touch Screen ........................................................... 6–53
Calibrating the Touch Screen ........................................................ 6–54
Performing Air Filter Maintenance.................................................. 6–55
Automation Maintenance .............................................................. 6–56
7 Theory of Operation ......................................................................... 7–1
Illustrations .................................................................................. 7–3
844 Series Carbon/Sulfur Analyzers................................................. 7–5

Introduction 844 Series 1–11

 Calculation of Analysis Results ........................................................ 7–6
Calculation of the Calibration Equation........................................... 7–10
Cornerstone Brand Software Rounding........................................... 7–14
Flow Diagrams ............................................................................ 7–16
8 Diagnostics..................................................................................... 8–1
Flow ............................................................................................ 8–3
Ambient ....................................................................................... 8–4
Digital I/O .................................................................................. 8–10
Leak Check................................................................................. 8–15
System Check............................................................................. 8–17
9 Service........................................................................................... 9–1
Illustrations .................................................................................. 9–2
Gas Flow States ............................................................................ 9–3
Frequently Asked Questions............................................................ 9–4
Calibrating the Hardware................................................................ 9–5
Adjusting the Safety Pressure Regulator........................................... 9–6
Flexible Replacement Tubing .......................................................... 9–9
Fitting Assembly and Reassembly.................................................. 9–10
Manifold Flow Diagrams ............................................................... 9–14
Viewing Valve States ................................................................... 9–19
10 Illustrations ................................................................................ 10–1
Optional Equipment Illustrations ................................................10–101
11 Schematics ................................................................................. 11–1
12 Glossary ..................................................................................... 12–1
13 Index ......................................................................................... 13–1

1–12 844 Series Introduction

Illustrations
Figure 2-1 Front Panel CS844/C844...................................................... 2–6
Figure 2-2 Front Panel S844 ................................................................ 2–8
Figure 2-3 Rear Panel ....................................................................... 2–10
Figure 2-4 Pedestal Assembly ............................................................ 2–17
Figure 2-5 End View of Plug: NEMA L14-30P (30 A) .............................. 2–18
Figure 2-6 Monitor Post and Base ....................................................... 2–24
Figure 2-7 Post Collar/Tilt Mechanism Assembly................................... 2–25
Figure 2-8 Attach Mounting Plate ....................................................... 2–25
Figure 2-9 Vertical Monitor Installation................................................ 2–26
Figure 2-10 Horizontal Monitor Installation .......................................... 2–26
Figure 2-11 Monitor Assembly............................................................ 2–28
Figure 2-12 Touch Monitor Installation................................................ 2–29
Figure 2-13 Touch Monitor Rear Panel Installation ................................ 2–30
Figure 3-1 Software Overview Portrait Mode .......................................... 3–5
Figure 3-2 Software Overview Landscape Mode...................................... 3–7
Table 3-1 Column Definitions Table .................................................... 3–35
Figure 3-3 .csv File Created in Excel ................................................... 3–35
Figure 3-4 .csv File Created in Notepad............................................... 3–35
Figure 5-1 Horizontal Gripper and Carousel Assembly Offset.................. 5–11
Figure 5-2 Remote Access Screen ...................................................... 5–34
Figure 6-1 Cleaning O-Ring ................................................................. 6–8
Figure 6-2 O-Ring Shine...................................................................... 6–8
Figure 6-3 Incoming Scrubber Tube Packing ........................................ 6–11
Figure 6-4 Incoming Purifier Tube Packing........................................... 6–14
Figure 6-5 Catalyst Heater Tube Packing ............................................. 6–18
Figure 6-6 Cellulose Trap Tube Packing ............................................... 6–20
Figure 6-7 Flow Scrubber Tube Packing............................................... 6–23
Figure 6-8 Screen Filters ................................................................... 6–24
Figure 6-9 Pneumatic Gas Filter ......................................................... 6–26
Figure 6-10 Particle Filter Replacement ............................................... 6–27
Figure 6-11 Furnace Out Tube Maintenance ......................................... 6–43
Figure 6-12 Right Casting Removal..................................................... 6–44
Figure 6-13 Pinch Valve Tubing .......................................................... 6–45
Figure 6-14 Coolant Reservoir Cap ..................................................... 6–47

Introduction 844 Series 1–13

 Figure 6-15 Drain Fitting Access Door ................................................. 6–47
Figure 6-16 Gas Dose Assembly ......................................................... 6–50
Figure 6-17 Endcap for Gas Dose Assembly ......................................... 6–50
Figure 6-18 Endcap O-Ring................................................................ 6–51
Figure 6-19 Valve Stem in Gas Dose Manifold ...................................... 6–51
Figure 6-20 Valve Stem .................................................................... 6–51
Figure 6-21 Air Filter Location............................................................ 6–55
Figure 6-22 Rotary Motor and Gripper Assembly .................................. 6–57
Figure 6-23 Flat of Motor Shaft – Exploded View .................................. 6–58
Figure 6-24 Crucible Gripper Assembly ............................................... 6–59
Figure 6-25 Shuttle Loader Horizontal Housing..................................... 6–60
Figure 7-1 Flow Diagram (CS844) ...................................................... 7–16
Figure 7-2 Flow Diagram (CS844ES)................................................... 7–17
Figure 7-3 Flow Diagram (C844) ........................................................ 7–18
Figure 7-4 Flow Diagram (S844) ........................................................ 7–19
Figure 7-5 Flow Diagram (S844ES)..................................................... 7–20
Figure 9-1 Casting Removal................................................................. 9–6
Figure 9-2 Safety Pressure Valve and Adjustment .................................. 9–7
Figure 9-3 Ferrule Installation............................................................ 9–10
Figure 9-4 Manifold Flow Diagram (CS844).......................................... 9–14
Figure 9-5 Manifold Flow Diagram (CS844ES) ...................................... 9–15
Figure 9-6 Manifold Flow Diagram (C844)............................................ 9–16
Figure 9-7 Manifold Flow Diagram (S844)............................................ 9–17
Figure 9-8 Manifold Flow Diagram (S844ES) ........................................ 9–18
Figure 10-1 Reference Card 1 of 2 ...................................................... 10–5
Figure 10-2 Reference Card 2 of 2 ...................................................... 10–6
Figure 10-3 Incoming Purifier & Incoming Scrubber Assembly................ 10–7
Figure 10-4 Catalyst and Cellulose Trap Assembly ................................ 10–8
Figure 10-5 Incoming/Exhaust Manifold Assembly ................................ 10–9
Figure 10-6 External Auto Cleaner Brush Assembly .............................10–10
Figure 10-7 Flow Scrubber and Particle Filter Panel Assembly ...............10–11
Figure 10-8 Incoming Purifier Assembly .............................................10–12
Figure 10-9 Catalyst Heater Assembly ...............................................10–13
Figure 10-10 Induction Coil Cover Assembly .......................................10–14
Figure 10-11 Pneumatic Manifold, Card, and Bracket Assembly.............10–15
Figure 10-12 RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 1 of 2 .....................................10–16

1–14 844 Series Introduction

 Figure 10-13 RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 2 of 2 .....................................10–17
Figure 10-14 Carrier Flow Sensor Assembly........................................10–18
Figure 10-15 RF Enclosure Assembly 1 of 5 ........................................10–19
Figure 10-16 RF Enclosure Assembly 2 of 5 ........................................10–20
Figure 10-17 RF Enclosure Assembly 3 of 5 ........................................10–21
Figure 10-18 RF Enclosure Assembly 4 of 5 ........................................10–22
Figure 10-19 RF Enclosure Assembly 5 of 5 ........................................10–23
Figure 10-20 Pneumatic Manifold Assembly ........................................10–24
Figure 10-21 Heated Flow Controller Assembly ...................................10–25
Figure 10-22 MeFC Temperature Controller Card/Bracket Assembly.......10–26
Figure 10-23 Combustion Tube Kit ....................................................10–27
Figure 10-24 Combustion Tube Base Assembly ...................................10–28
Figure 10-25 Front Alcove Casting and Light Assembly.........................10–29
Figure 10-26 Combustion Tube Housing Assembly 1 of 2......................10–30
Figure 10-27 Combustion Tube Housing Assembly 2 of 2......................10–31
Figure 10-28 Catalyst Heater Cooling Loop Manifold ............................10–32
Figure 10-29 Pedestal Assembly........................................................10–33
Figure 10-30 DC Distribution Card and Bracket Assembly.....................10–34
Figure 10-31 IR Cell Clamping Block ..................................................10–35
Figure 10-32 IR Cell Mounting Plate Assembly ....................................10–36
Figure 10-33 IR Manifold with Catalyst Bypass Block ...........................10–37
Figure 10-34 IR Manifold Low Flow Hi Pressure Assembly .....................10–38
Figure 10-35 Bypass Block Assembly .................................................10–40
Figure 10-36 Plate Power Supply Assembly ........................................10–41
Figure 10-37 0.39cc Gas Dose Assembly ............................................10–42
Figure 10-38 0.31cc Gas Dose Assembly ............................................10–43
Figure 10-39 Gas Dose Valve Assembly 1 of 3 ....................................10–44
Figure 10-40 Gas Dose Valve Assembly 2 of 3 ....................................10–45
Figure 10-41 Gas Dose Valve Assembly 3 of 3 ....................................10–46
Figure 10-42 Vacuum Cleaner Manifold ..............................................10–47
Figure 10-43 Crucible Bucket Assembly..............................................10–48
Figure 10-44 Micron Filter Assembly ..................................................10–49
Figure 10-45 Furnace Upper Door Assembly .......................................10–50
Figure 10-46 CO2 IR Cell (6.0 in).......................................................10–51
Figure 10-47 SO2 IR Cell (13.0 in) .....................................................10–52
Figure 10-48 SO2 IR Cell (0.35 in) .....................................................10–53

Introduction 844 Series 1–15

 Figure 10-49 CO2 IR Cell (0.35 in).....................................................10–54
Figure 10-50 Dust Filter Assembly.....................................................10–55
Figure 10-51 Dust Filter Assembly (Heated) .......................................10–56
Figure 10-52 D-26 Component Pack ..................................................10–57
Figure 10-53 D-26 Component Pack ..................................................10–58
Figure 10-54 D-26 Component Pack ..................................................10–59
Figure 10-55 Flow Control Bracket/Card .............................................10–60
Figure 10-56 Flow Control and Heated Dust Filter Bracket/Cards ...........10–61
Figure 10-57 Power Protect Panel ......................................................10–62
Figure 10-58 Power Protect Panel ......................................................10–63
Figure 10-59 Variable Speed Cabinet Cooling Fan Assembly .................10–64
Figure 10-60 Furnace Control Bracket/Card Assembly..........................10–65
Figure 10-61 AC Distribution Panel Assembly......................................10–67
Figure 10-62 Analytical Manifold Assembly .........................................10–68
Figure 10-63 Linear Heated Pneumatic Auto Cleaner Assembly .............10–69
Figure 10-64 Common Sub View 1 of 2 ..............................................10–70
Figure 10-65 Common Sub View 2 of 2 ..............................................10–71
Figure 10-66 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–72
Figure 10-67 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–73
Figure 10-68 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–74
Figure 10-69 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–75
Figure 10-70 Analytical Manifold without Flow Scrubber .......................10–76
Figure 10-71 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–77
Figure 10-72 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–78
Figure 10-73 CS844 Component Pack Assembly..................................10–79
Figure 10-74 CS844 Component Pack Assembly with Monitor ...............10–80
Figure 10-75 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–81
Figure 10-76 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–82
Figure 10-77 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–83
Figure 10-78 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–84
Figure 10-79 Valve Pinch Vacuum Dust Assembly................................10–85
Figure 10-80 Manual Heated Dust Filter Cap/Lance Assembly ...............10–86
Figure 10-81 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 1 of 9........................10–87
Figure 10-82 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 2 of 9........................10–88
Figure 10-83 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 3 of 9........................10–89
Figure 10-84 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 4 of 9........................10–90

1–16 844 Series Introduction

 Figure 10-85 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 5 of 9........................10–91
Figure 10-86 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 6 of 9........................10–92
Figure 10-87 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 7 of 9........................10–93
Figure 10-88 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 8 of 9........................10–94
Figure 10-89 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 9 of 9........................10–95
Figure 10-90 Oxygen/EXH/Pneumatic Manifold Assembly with Plate.......10–96
Figure 10-91 Upper Block Moveable Scrubber Assembly .......................10–97
Figure 10-92 Cooling Reservoir/Heat Exchanger Assembly 1 of 2 ..........10–98
Figure 10-93 Cooling Reservoir/Heat Exchanger Assembly 2 of 2 ..........10–99
Figure 10-94 Auto Cleaner Assembly ...............................................10–100
Figure 10-95 22 Mntd Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 1 of 2 ....................10–101
Figure 10-96 22 Mntd Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 2 of 2 ....................10–102
Figure 10-97 22 Desktop Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 1 of 2 ................10–103
Figure 10-98 22 Desktop Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 2 of 2 ................10–104
Figure 10-99 Incoming Purifier and Incoming Scrubber Assembly........10–105
Figure 10-100 Crucible Gripper Assembly 1 of 2................................10–106
Figure 10-101 Crucible Gripper Assembly 2 of 2................................10–107
Figure 10-102 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 1 of 7 ...........10–108
Figure 10-103 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 2 of 7 ...........10–109
Figure 10-104 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 3 of 7 ...........10–110
Figure 10-105 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 4 of 7 ...........10–111
Figure 10-106 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 5 of 7 ...........10–112
Figure 10-107 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 6 of 7 ...........10–113
Figure 10-108 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 7 of 7 ...........10–114
Figure 10-109 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 1 of 7 ......................10–115
Figure 10-110 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 2 of 7 ......................10–116
Figure 10-111 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 3 of 7 ......................10–117
Figure 10-112 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 4 of 7 ......................10–118
Figure 10-113 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 5 of 7 ......................10–119
Figure 10-114 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 6 of 7 ......................10–120
Figure 10-115 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 7 of 7 ......................10–121
Figure 10-116 SL60 Shuttle Loader Back Plate Assembly....................10–122
Figure 10-117 SL60 Shuttle Loader Base Plate Assembly....................10–123
Figure 10-118 SL60 Shuttle Loader Card Assembly............................10–124
Figure 10-119 SL60 Shuttle Loader Carousel Tray Driver Assembly .....10–125
Figure 10-120 SL60 Shuttle Loader Carousel Centering Pin Assembly ..10–126

Introduction 844 Series 1–17

 Figure 10-121 SL60 Shuttle Loader Mechanical Cover Assembly..........10–127
Figure 10-122 SL60 Shuttle Loader Wire Harness Routing Assy 1 of 2..10–128
Figure 10-123 SL60 Shuttle Loader Wire Harness Routing Assy 2 of 2..10–129
Figure 10-124 SL60 Shuttle Loader Cover Assembly ..........................10–130
Figure 10-125 SL60 Shuttle Loader Motor Cover Assembly .................10–131
Figure 10-126 SL60 Shuttle Loader Wiring Connection Assembly.........10–132
Figure 10-127 SL60 Shuttle Loader Card Cover Assembly ..................10–133
Figure 10-128 SL10 Shuttle Loader Carousel Tray Driver Assembly .....10–134
Figure 10-129 SL10 Shuttle Loader Card Assembly............................10–135
Figure 10-130 SL10 Shuttle Loader Chute Cast Assembly...................10–136
Figure 10-131 SL10 Shuttle Loader Alignment Bracket Assembly ........10–137
Figure 10-132 SL10 Shuttle Loader Wiring Assembly .........................10–138
Figure 10-133 SL10 Shuttle Loader Card Cover Assembly ..................10–139
Figure 11-1 AC Power Entry Module.................................................... 11–3
Figure 11-2 Power Distribution........................................................... 11–4
Figure 11-3 AC and DC Heaters.......................................................... 11–5
Figure 11-4 IR Cells.......................................................................... 11–6
Figure 11-5 Analytical Flow Control .................................................... 11–7
Figure 11-6 Pneumatic Flow Control ................................................... 11–8
Figure 11-7 RF Furnace Control.......................................................... 11–9
Figure 11-8 Doser Controller ............................................................11–10
Figure 11-9 60-Position Shuttle Loader (Optional) ...............................11–11
Figure 11-10 10-Position Shuttle Loader (Optional) .............................11–12
Figure 11-11 Enhanced Sensitivity Control .........................................11–13
Figure 11-12 RF Furnace Assembly....................................................11–14
Figure 11-13 Plate Supply Assembly ..................................................11–15
Figure 11-14 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly.................................11–16

1–18 844 Series Introduction

Software License

By installing the Licensed Software, the Licensee acknowledges that

Licensee has read it, understands it and agrees to be bound by its
terms, and further agrees that this is the complete and exclusive
statement of the Software License between the parties, which
supersedes and merges all prior proposals, understandings and other
agreements oral and written, between the parties relating to the
subject matter of this Software License. In the event of any conflict
between the terms of this Software License and the terms of purchase
orders submitted by Licensee, the terms of this Software License shall
control.
This is an agreement between the Licensee and LECO Corporation
(“LECO”) of 3000 Lakeview Avenue, St. Joseph, Michigan 49085-2396,
owner of the Licensed Software. This Software License specifies the
conditions under which Licensee may use the Licensed Software.

I. Definitions
"Licensed Software" shall mean the software supplied with this
Software License, which is software developed and distributed by
LECO.
"Instruction Manual" shall mean a guide describing the use and
operation of the Licensed Software, together with any related
supporting documentation.
"Licensee" shall mean and include any of the Licensee's divisions and
departments within Licensee's organization, but shall not include
wholly or partially owned subsidiaries, affiliates, successors or assigns,
or independent third parties.

II. License Grant

LECO hereby grants to Licensee, and Licensee hereby accepts, subject
to the terms and conditions set forth in this Software License, a non-
exclusive, non-transferable license to use the Licensed Software and
Instruction Manual as set forth in this Software License. The term
license as used in this Software License shall mean and include:
a) the right to use a copy of the Licensed Software in executable
form by one user at a time;
b) the right to use and copy the Instruction Manual for Licensee's
internal operations; and
c) the right to make one backup copy of the Licensed Software.

Introduction 844 Series 1–19

 In accepting the license granted by LECO, Licensee agrees that it shall
not:
1. transfer or allow transfer of copies of the Licensed Software to
any other party including any wholly or partially owned
subsidiaries, affiliates, successors, or assigns without the express
consent of LECO;
2. use the Licensed Software on more than one (1) CPU at any one
time;
3. cause or permit unauthorized copying, reproduction, or disclosure
of any portion of the Licensed Software or Instruction Manual or
the distribution of any part thereof to any third person or entity,
for any purpose whatsoever. This restriction shall continue to
bind Licensee and its agents beyond the termination of this
Software License; or
4. attempt to disassemble modify, or reverse engineer the Licensed
Software;
5. attempt to defeat or defeat the copy-protection mechanism;
6. attempt to or access features not purchased.

III. Enhancements And Support

LECO may make available to Licensee updates and enhancements to
the Licensed Software, which Licensee may accept at the time it is
offered to Licensee by paying any applicable update fee. LECO shall
have the sole discretion to determine the update fee. Use of all such
updates and enhancements by Licensee shall be subject to the terms
and conditions of this Software License unless supplemented or
replaced by a subsequent license.

IV. Termination Of Software License

In the event of a material default by Licensee or its agents, of any
provision of this Software License, LECO may terminate this Software
License upon thirty (30) days written notice. Upon termination of the
Software License, the Licensee shall return all copies of the Licensed
Software to LECO. This obligation shall survive the termination of this
Software License.

V. Copyright And Proprietary Information

Licensee acknowledges that the Licensed Software and the Instruction
Manual constitute valuable and copyrighted property of LECO and that
all title and ownership rights in the Licensed Software and related
materials remain exclusively with LECO. LECO reserves all rights with
respect to the Licensed Software and Instruction Manual under all
applicable laws for the protection of proprietary information, including,
but not limited to, trade secrets, copyrights, trademarks, and patents.

1–20 844 Series Introduction

 VI. Limitation Of Liability And Warranties
With respect to the physical media on which the Licensed Software is
delivered and Instruction Manual, LECO warrants the same to be free
of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ninety (90)
days from the date of delivery. In the event of notification within the
warranty period of defects in material or workmanship, LECO will
replace the defective media or documentation. LECO specifically
disclaims all other warranties, expressed or implied, including but not
limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose with respect to defects in the media and
documentation. In no event shall LECO be liable for any loss of profit,
data, or use, or any other commercial damage, including but not
limited to special, incidental, consequential, interruptions in Licensee’s
operations, or other damages regardless of negligence or fault. LECO's
liability in connection with this Software License shall not exceed the
value of the amounts paid by Licensee under this Software License for
the Licensed Software which gave rise to the loss less a reasonable
amount for use, damage and obsolescence.

VII. Confidentiality
All information and materials regarding the software, provided to
Licensee by LECO which are not generally known in the trade are
confidential, are proprietary, and such information and materials are
furnished solely for the use of Licensee under this Software License.
Licensee agrees not to use or disclose any such information or material
otherwise without prior written consent from LECO and Licensee
further agrees to take all reasonable steps requested by LECO, or
otherwise necessary to protect the confidentiality of all such
information and materials. The foregoing obligations will survive
termination of this Software License, and Licensee agrees to return all
such information and materials to LECO upon request or any non-
renewal or termination of this Software License.

VIII. Miscellaneous
a) This Software License shall be binding upon and inure to the
benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and
assigns, provided that Licensee shall not have any right to assign
its rights or obligations under this Software License (whether by
operation of law or otherwise) without the prior written consent
of LECO.
b) All notices hereunder shall be in writing and shall be sent by
registered or certified mail postage prepaid to LECO at the
addresses first written above. The date of postmark shall be
deemed the date on which such notice is given.

Introduction 844 Series 1–21

 c) No delay on the part of LECO in exercising any right, power or
remedy hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall
any single or partial exercise of any such right, power or remedy
preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of
any other right, power or remedy.
d) No amendment, modification or waiver of, or any consent with
respect to, any provision of this Software License shall be
effective unless the same shall be in writing and signed and
delivered by each of the parties hereto, and then such
amendment, modification, waiver or consent shall be effective
only in the specific instance and for the purpose for which given.
e) This Software License shall be construed in accordance with and
governed by the internal laws of the State of Michigan. Wherever
possible, each provision of this Software License shall be
interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under
applicable law, but if any provision of this Software License shall
be prohibited by or invalid under such law, such provision shall
be ineffective to the extent of such prohibition or invalidity,
without invalidating the remainder of such provision or the
remaining provisions of this Software License.
f) Licensee agrees that it is responsible for obtaining proper
authorization and complying with any export, re-export, or
import laws or regulations and that may apply if Licensee
exports, re-exports, or imports the Licensed Software, technology
or technical data licensed hereunder.

1–22 844 Series Introduction

Warranty

Equipment manufactured by LECO Corporation, St. Joseph, Michigan is

warranted free from defect in material and workmanship for a period of
1) thirteen months from date of shipment or 2) twelve months from date of
installation, whichever occurs first. Equipment not manufactured by LECO is
covered to the extent of warranty provided by the original manufacturer and
this warranty does not cover any equipment, new or used, purchased from
anyone other than LECO Corporation. All replacement parts shall be covered
under warranty for a period of thirty days from date of purchase. LECO
makes no other representation or warranty of any other kind,
expressed or implied, with respect to the goods sold hereunder,
whether as to merchantability, fitness for purpose, or otherwise.
Expendable items such as crucibles, combustion tubes, chemicals, and items
of like nature are not covered by this warranty.
LECO's sole obligation under this warranty shall be to repair or replace any
part or parts which, to our satisfaction, prove to be defective upon return
prepaid to LECO Corporation, St. Joseph, Michigan. This obligation does not
include labor to install replacement parts, nor does it cover any failure due to
accident, abuse, neglect, or use in disregard of instructions furnished by
LECO. In no event shall damages for defective goods exceed the purchase
price of the goods, and LECO shall not be liable for incidental or
consequential damages whatsoever.
All claims in regard to the parts or equipment must be made within ten (10)
days after Purchaser learns of the facts upon which the claim is based.
Authorization must be obtained from LECO prior to returning any other parts.
This warranty is voided by failure to comply with these notice requirements.

Notice
The warranty on LECO equipment remains valid only when genuine
LECO replacement parts are employed. Since LECO has no control over
the quality or purity of consumable products not manufactured by LECO, the
specifications for accuracy of results using LECO instruments are not
guaranteed unless genuine LECO consumables are employed in conjunction
with LECO instruments. If purchaser defaults in making payment for any parts
or equipment, this warranty shall be void and shall not apply to such parts
and equipment. No late payment or cure of default in payment shall extend
the warranty period provided herein.
LECO Corporation is not responsible for damage to any associated
instruments, equipment, or apparatus nor will LECO be held liable for loss of
profit or other special damages resulting from abuse, neglect, or use in
disregard of instructions. The Buyer, their employees, agents, and successors
in interest assume all risks and liabilities for the operation, use, and/or
misuse of the product(s) described herein and agree to indemnify, hold
harmless, and defend the seller from any and all claims and actions arising
from any cause whatsoever, including seller's negligence for personal injury
incurred in connection with the use of said product(s) and any and all
damages proximately resulting therefrom.

Introduction 844 Series 1–23

 WEEE

Disposal of WEEE and the Wheeled Bin Symbol

In 2002, the European Union introduced the Directive on Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). The main aim of the
Directive is to ensure that WEEE is collected and treated separately.
WEEE may contain hazardous substances that should not end up in the
(human) environment because it can have adverse effects on it.

Furthermore, WEEE is a vast source of raw materials. With the ever

rising worldwide demand for new equipment and the ever decreasing
volume of raw materials in nature, letting this potential source of such
materials go to waste is unacceptable.

If equipment is collected separately, the equipment can be recycled

and up to 85% to 90% of the equipment can be reused as new
material, saving the use of virgin raw materials and energy of
producing these. Separate collection and treatment of WEEE will thus
decrease CO2 emissions as well.

For the above reasons, LECO expects end users to dispose of the
material in an environmentally friendly way, being separate collection
and treatment.

Electrical and Electronic Equipment is labeled with the following

“crossed-out wheeled bin” symbol, indicating that the equipment
should be disposed of by the end user separate from other types of
waste.

End users should contact their dealer/distributor or our company about

disposal, collection, recycling options, and Safety Data Sheets (SDS
information) in their country.

1–24 844 Series Introduction

 WEEE Statements 1

Introduction 844 Series 1–25

 WEEE Statements 2

1–26 844 Series Introduction

 WEEE Statements 3

Introduction 844 Series 1–27

 WEEE Statements 4

1–28 844 Series Introduction

LECO-Supplied Hewlett-Packard® Computers

Hewlett-Packard Support
All LECO-supplied Hewlett-Packard computers include HP® customer
technical support and warranty claim information.
The inclusion of HP customer technical support and product warranty
with LECO-supplied HP Computers ensures that any computer-related
service issues are handled directly by the experts at HP. This
eliminates the unnecessary step of working through the LECO service
professionals for a resolution from HP.
For more information, call 1-866-625-1175, or access the HP website
by following the link below and selecting the appropriate country and
support language:
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/contact-hp/ww-contact-us.html
To expedite service, please have your HP computer serial number and
model number available when contacting HP. These can be found on
the back or side of the computer tower.

Introduction 844 Series 1–29

LECO-Supplied Balances

Sartorius® Support
All LECO-supplied Sartorius balances are supported and covered by
warranty through Sartorius.
The direct support and warranty coverage by Sartorius with LECO-
supplied Sartorius balances ensures that any balance-related service
issues are handled directly by the experts at Sartorius. This eliminates
the unnecessary step of working through the LECO service
professionals for a resolution from Sartorius.
For more information, access the Sartorius website by following the
link below and selecting the appropriate country:
http://www.sartorius.com/en/contact/local-contact/
To expedite service, please have your Sartorius balance serial number
and model number available when contacting Sartorius.

1–30 844 Series Introduction

Declaration of Conformity Statement

European Union Directives - CE Marking

This equipment, which bears the CE Marking, complies with all the
applicable requirements set out in the EU Directives.

The EU Declaration of Conformity (EU-DoC) for this instrument is

available upon request.

The following information sets out the content of the EU-DoC, including
a list of EU Directives, harmonized standards, supporting standards
and other applicable documents.

Machinery Directive (Product Safety)

EN ISO 12100 Risk Assessment - Safety of Machinery

EN/IEC 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for

measurement, control, and laboratory use.

EMC Directive (Electromagnetic Compatibility)

EN55011 RF Emissions Class A

EN 61000-3-2 & EN 61000-3-12 Harmonic Emissions

EN 61000-3-3 & EN 61000-3-11 Flicker Emissions

EN 61326-1 EMC requirements for electrical equipment for

measurement, control, and laboratory use.

CISPR11 RF Emissions Class A

IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4 Fast Transient Burst
IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-8 Magnetic Immunity
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips, Interrupts

RoHS Directive (Restriction of Hazardous Substances)

EN 50581 RoHS in Electrical and Electronic Equipment

Introduction 844 Series 1–31

Product Safety

The equipment is also designed and manufactured to meet the

following product safety requirements.

International
IEC 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use.

USA
UL 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use.

Canada
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010 Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use.

Australia & New Zealand

AS/NZS 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use.

Instruments with Hydraulic and/or Pneumatic Fluid Systems

The hydraulic and pneumatic systems and their components are in
accordance with the applicable sections of the following:
ISO 4413, Hydraulic fluid power-General rules and safety requirements
for systems and their components.
ISO 4414, Pneumatic fluid power-General rules and safety
requirements for systems and their components.

1–32 844 Series Introduction

Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices

USA

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 (Part 18 where
applicable) of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference,
in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in
order to meet FCC emission limits. LECO Corporation is not responsible
for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or
modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 (Part 18 where applicable) of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that
might cause undesired operation.

Canada

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.

European Union

European Union EMC Directive conformance statement

LECO Corporation cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy
the protection requirements resulting from a non-authorized
modification of the product.
Attention: This is an EN 55011 Class A Group 1 product. In a
domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Introduction 844 Series 1–33

 Australia & New Zealand
Attention: This is a CISPR 11 Class A product. In a domestic
environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.

1–34 844 Series Introduction

Radio-Frequency Disturbance

This product complies with IEC/EN 55011/CISPR11 Radio-

frequency disturbance characteristics of Industrial, Scientific
and Medical equipment (ISM), which requires the following
information to be provided within the User Documentation:

The use of Interconnecting Cables other than those provided

and/or specified may cause undesired electromagnetic compatibility
performance.

Definitions
This is a Class A Group 1 Product.

Class A equipment is equipment suitable for use in all establishments

other than domestic and those directly connected to a low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
Class B equipment is equipment suitable for use in domestic
establishments and in establishments directly connected to a low-
voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
domestic purposes.
Group 1 equipment contains all equipment in the scope of this
standard that is not classified as group 2 equipment.
Group 2 equipment contains all ISM RF equipment (Industrial,
Scientific, Medical) in which radio-frequency energy in the frequency
range 9 kHz to 400 GHz is intentionally generated and used, or only
used, in the form of electromagnetic radiation, inductive and/or
capacitive coupling, for the treatment of material or
inspection/analysis purposes.

Introduction 844 Series 1–35

Flicker and Harmonic Emissions

To reduce the chance of voltage fluctuations, flicker emissions, or

harmonic emissions, it is recommended that this equipment be
connected to a private low-voltage distribution system. If connected to
a public low-voltage distribution system, a minimum facility service
current capacity of 100 amps is required. Consultation with the
distribution system authority may be required.

1–36 844 Series Introduction

About this Manual

The organization of this instruction manual is explained below. For

each chapter, there is a hyperlinked table of contents and list of
illustrations, if applicable.

The screenshots used throughout the manual are examples only and
may or may not be applicable to specific procedures.

Chapter 1, Introduction, page 1–9, describes general information

including safety guidelines and warranty terms. This chapter also
provides information about parts and accessories.
Chapter 2, Installation, page 2–1, describes hardware setup and
connection.
Chapter 3, Analysis, page 3–1, describes how to analyze samples.
Chapter 4, Settings, page 4–1, describes how to configure parameters
in the software.
Chapter 5, Instrument, page 5–1, describes how to configure the
instrument.
Chapter 6, Maintenance, page 6–1, describes procedures to perform
on a regular basis to improve the instrument’s performance and
lifespan.
Chapter 7, Theory of Operation, page 7–1, describes the theory of
operation.
Chapter 8, Diagnostics, page 8–1, describes how to monitor the
instrument to ensure proper operation.
Chapter 9, Service, page 9–1, describes service procedures. Contact
the LECO Service Department for further information.
Chapter 10, Illustrations, page 10–1, provides illustrations and
photographs that can assist with procedures and location of parts.
Chapter 11, Schematics, page 11–1, provides diagrams of circuit
boards and wiring.
Chapter 12, Glossary, page 12–1, provides definitions of terms.
Chapter 13, Index, page 13–1, provides page numbers for topics
throughout the manual. In the electronic manual available through the
software, the page numbers in the index provide a hyperlink to the
corresponding topic.

Introduction 844 Series 1–37

Equipment Packages

Items listed below are repeated throughout this manual and are
subject to revision. Consult the packing slip received with the
instrument.

CS844-C PKG CS844 PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-200-300 ASSY CS844 C/S DET 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY C/CS844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

CS844-CR PKG CS844 CR

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-200-300 ASSY CS844 C/S DET 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY C/CS844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION

CS844-MC PKG CS844 TSCREEN/PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-200-100 ASSY CS844 C/S DET T/SCRN 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY C/CS844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international
shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation.
Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

1–38 844 Series Introduction

CS844-MCR PKG CS844 TSCREEN/CR
1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-200-100 ASSY CS844 C/S DET T/SCRN 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY C/CS844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION

CS844ES-C PKG CS844ES PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 618-200-900 ASSY CS844ES C/S DET 230V
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 619-593-358 PACK ACCESSORY CS844ES
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

CS844ES-CR PKG CS844ES CR

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 618-200-900 ASSY CS844ES C/S DET 230V
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 619-593-358 PACK ACCESSORY CS844ES

CS844ES-MC PKG CS844ES TSCREEN/PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 618-200-700 ASSY CS844ES C/S DET T/SCRN 230V
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 619-593-358 PACK ACCESSORY CS844ES
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international
shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation.
Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Introduction 844 Series 1–39

CS844ES-MCR PKG CS844ES TSCREEN/CR
1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 618-200-700 ASSY CS844ES C/S DET T/SCRN 230V
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 619-593-358 PACK ACCESSORY CS844ES

C844-C PKG C844 PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-200-600 ASSY C844 CARBON DET 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY C/CS844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

C844-CR PKG C844 CR

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-200-600 ASSY C844 CARBON DET 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY C/CS844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION

C844-MC PKG C844 TSCREEN/PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-200-500 ASSY C844 CARB DET T/SCRN 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY C/CS844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international
shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation.
Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

1–40 844 Series Introduction

C844-MCR PKG C844 TSCREEN/CR
1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-200-500 ASSY C844 CARB DET T/SCRN 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 502-174-HAZ* LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500G
1 619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY C/CS844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION

S844-C PKG S844 PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-300-300 ASSY S844 SUL DET 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 619-591-469 PACK ACCESSORY S844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

S844-CR PKG S844 CR

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-300-300 ASSY S844 SUL DET 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 619-591-469 PACK ACCESSORY S844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION

S844-MC PKG S844 TSCREEN/PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-300-100 ASSY S844 SUL DET T/SCRN 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 619-591-469 PACK ACCESSORY S844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international
shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation.
Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

S844-MCR PKG S844 TSCREEN/CR

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 618-300-100 ASSY S844 SUL DET T/SCRN 230V
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 619-591-469 PACK ACCESSORY S844
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION

Introduction 844 Series 1–41

S844ES-C PKG S844ES PC
1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 618-300-600 ASSY S844ES SUL DET 230V
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 619-593-359 PACK ACCESSORY S844ES
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

S844ES-CR PKG S844ES CR

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 618-300-600 ASSY S844ES SUL DET 230V
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 619-593-359 PACK ACCESSORY S844ES

S844ES-MC PKG S844ES TSCREEN/PC

1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 618-300-500 ASSY S844ES SUL DET T/SCRN 230V
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 619-593-359 PACK ACCESSORY S844ES
1 686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international
shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation.
Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.
S844ES-MCR PKG S844ES TSCREEN/CR
1 259-078 SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S SERIES
1 501-171-HAZ* ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
1 618-300-500 ASSY S844ES SUL DET T/SCRN 230V
1 619-591-921 ASSY KEY REGISTRATION
1 619-593-359 PACK ACCESSORY S844ES

*Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international
shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation.
Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

1–42 844 Series Introduction

Options

618-200-1OP ASSY C/CS/S844 OPTIONS

1 619-591-454 BAG VACUUM CLOTH PERMANENT
1 619-591-456 FILTER HEPA VACUUM
1 619-591-409 FTG T QD .25T- .25T- 10.32
1 619-591-595 ASSY PLATE SUPPLY FIELD REPLACEMENT
1 619-590-263-001 GASKET/SCREWS REPL LVM155 EPDM
1 619-590-509-001 GASKET/SCREWS REPL VQD1151U
1 619-590-806-001 GASKET/SCREWS REPL VQD1131U
1 619-591-622 BAG VACUUM DISPOSABLE 5PK AND FILTERS 2PK
1 051-092 SPEC SHEET C/S/CS744/844
1 619-590-931-110 ASSY CELL IR SO2 13.0 CHRTZ
1 619-590-932-110 ASSY CELL IR SO2 .35 CHRTZ
1 619-590-933-110 ASSY CELL IR CO2 6.00 CHRTZ
1 619-591-726 MONITOR COLOR LCD 23 IN EA SERIES
1 259-078-CPK SOFTWARE KIT C/CS/S W/KEY
1 619-591-790 ELEMENT FILTER REPL FOR 619-590-485 AF10
1 619-591-480-110 ASSY CELL IR CO2 .35 CHRTZ
1 619-591-830 KIT REPL SEAL CYLINDER AIR SEAL LOWER
1 259-078UPGR SOFTWARE KIT UPGRADE C/CS/S SERIES WO/KEY
1 619-591-933 O-RING 903 .301X .429X .064V
1 619-591-934 O-RING 905 .414X .558X .072V
1 619-591-948 KIT REPL PINS RETAINING TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-591-962 KIT UPGRADE THERMOSTAT DRY
1 619-592-142 KIT UPGRD CIRCUIT VACUUM
1 619-592-148 POWER SUPPLY/CABLE 12V MONITOR TOUCHSCRN
1 619-592-150 KIT TRAP FLUORINE/CHLORINE
1 619-592-384 KIT UPGRADE SWITCH CYLINDER/SEAL LOWER
1 619-592-304 REGULATOR PRESS 2/STG HIGH PURITY OXYGEN CGA
540
1 619-591-840 KIT LOADER SHUTTLE C/S 60 POS
1 619-592-490 PACK O-RING C/CS/S844
1 619-591-845 KIT LOADER SHUTTLE C/S 10 POS
1 501-998 SAMPLE ST PIN 1G .03C .001S 100BT
1 782-880 FILTER VACUUM 0.3 MICRON
1 619-592-504 KIT REPL VACUUM DUST 744/844
1 619-592-506 KIT STRAIN RELIEF/WEAR HOSE VACUUM
1 619-592-610 KIT REPL ASSY SEAL LOWER/CYLINDER
1 619-592-612 KIT REPL ASSY SEAL LOWER FURNACE
1 619-592-614 KIT REPL BLOCK COUPLING VACUUM
1 619-592-620 KIT REPL MANIF CTRL FLOW AND IR INTERCON

Introduction 844 Series 1–43

618-200-1OP ASSY C/CS/S844 OPTIONS
1 619-592-622 KIT REPL MANIFOLD IR 619-591-929
1 619-592-172 ASSY TUBE BLOCK CAT/MANIF BACK PRESSURE
1 619-592-670 KIT UPGRD FAN VARIABLE SPEED W/SOFTWARE
1 619-592-672 KIT UPGRD FAN VAR SPEED SN3084DN W/CARD
1 619-592-674 KIT UPGRD FAN VAR SPEED SN3084DN W/O CARD
1 502-635 SAMPLE CAL ORE HIGH SUL C/S.5-46 25G
1 619-592-702 KIT REPL CELL IR SO2 13.0 W/SOFTWARE
1 619-592-704 KIT REPL CELL IR SO2 13.0 RFB W/SOFTWARE
1 619-592-706 KIT REPL CELL IR SO2 .35 W/SOFTWARE
1 619-592-708 KIT REPL CELL IR SO2 .35 RFB W/SOFTWARE
1 619-592-710 KIT REPL CELL IR CO2 6.0 W/SOFTWARE
1 619-592-712 KIT REPL CELL IR CO2 6.0 RFB W/SOFTWARE
1 619-592-714 KIT REPL CELL IR CO2 .35 W/SOFTWARE
1 619-592-716 KIT REPL CELL IR CO2 .35 RFB W/SOFTWARE
1 625-711-693 KIT ASSY CARD FURNACE FAN CONTROL C/S/CS
1 619-592-777 KIT UPGRD PORT VALVE SV207
1 619-592-785 KIT REPL EXTRUSION/BLOCK GUIDE PIN CNTR
1 625-711-855 ELEMENT FILTER REPL FOR 625-711-840 ZFC
1 104-131-HAZ* KIT PMA CS844
1 104-132-HAZ* KIT PMA S844
1 104-133-HAZ* KIT PMA C844
1 625-711-850 KIT REPLACEMENT FILTER AIR PNEUMATIC
1 619-592-895 KIT UPGRADE CONTROL COOLING COIL
1 619-592-910 KIT CONVERSION C844 TO CS844
1 619-592-912 KIT CONVERSION S844 TO CS844
1 751-050-110 KIT BALANCE 3-PLC SECURA213-S-1S
1 751-350-110 KIT BALANCE 4-PLC SECURA124-1S
1 051-103 SPEC SHEET SHUTTLE LOADER 10 POS
1 051-104 SPEC SHEET SHUTTLE LOADER 60 POS
1 619-593-150 KIT UPGRADE GRIPPER SHUTTLE LOADER
1 686-550 MONITOR PC 19 IN NEC
1 619-593-161 ASSY CAP/LANCE FILTER DUST NON-HTD MANUAL
1 619-593-162 ASSY CAP/LANCE FILTER DUST HEATED MANUAL
1 104-153 KIT MAINT PARTS CS844
1 104-154 KIT MAINT PARTS S844
1 104-155 KIT MAINT PARTS C844
1 619-592-488-001 GASKET/SCREWS REPL LVM155 FKM
1 619-593-275 KIT REPL 704-701-715 CAPACITOR OSCILLATOR
1 502-857 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL III W -12/+20 5LB
1 502-858 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL III W -12/+20 30LB

1–44 844 Series Introduction

 618-200-1OP ASSY C/CS/S844 OPTIONS
1 502-859 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL III W -12/+20 500LB
1 502-860 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL W -20/+40 5LB
1 502-861 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL W -20/+40 30LB
1 502-862 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL W -20/+40 500LB
1 619-593-320-HAZ* KIT UPGRD TRANSFORMER/WIRING PLATE SUPPLY
1 619-593-288 KIT REPL SENSOR AND PLATE LOADER HORTZ
1 502-855 PIN ST 1G LRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 619-580-123 KIT REPL 666-670X210 CARD C/CS/S744
1 619-593-440 KIT REPL CARD MDRIVE HORIZONTAL LOADER
1 619-593-478 KIT CONVERSION S844 TO S844ES
1 619-593-480 KIT CONVERSION CS844 TO CS844ES
1 619-593-485 KIT REPL FITTING PNEUMATIC AUTOCLEANER
1 619-593-487 KIT REPL FITTING SWITCH PRESSURE BRUSH
1 619-593-516 KIT CONVERSION AUTOCLEANER LINEAR
1 502-888 PIN TITANIUM .12G LRM C/O/N/H 200 BT
1 502-890 PIN ZIRCONIUM .12G LCRM C/O/N/H 200 BT
1 633-103-269 CLEANER CONCENTRATE CITRANOX 1/QT
1 633-103-270 CLEANER CONCENTRATE CITRANOX 1/GAL
1 619-593-545 KIT CONVERSION S844ES TO CS844ES
1 619-593-540 KIT REPLACEMENT HOSE VACUUM
1 502-891 PIN TITANIUM .12G LCRM C/O/N/H 200 BT
1 619-593-547 KIT INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION 744/844
1 619-593-548 KIT OPERATION QUALIFICATION 744/844
1 502-893 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100BT
1 502-894 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S 100BT
1 751-410-110 KIT BALANCE SECURA124-10RU 120G 0.1MG RUS
1 751-411-110 KIT BALANCE SECURA224-10RU 220G 0.1MG RUS
1 502-899 POWDER IRON LCRM C/S 100G
1 502-913 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 619-593-556 PROTECTOR SCREEN TOUCH 22 IN
1 502-916 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-918 RING ST 1G LCRM C/S 200 BT
1 502-919 POWDER IRON LCRM C/S 150G
1 502-920 POWDER IRON LCRM C/S 150G
1 502-921 PIN TITANIUM .12G LCRM TM C/O/N 200 BT
1 502-924 NICKEL NIBBLED LCRM C/S 100G
1 502-929 RING ST 1G LCRM C/S 200 BT
1 619-593-565 KIT UPGRD POWER SUPPLY CONFORMALLY COATED
1 633-103-360 KIT REQULATOR PRESS 2 STAGE SCI AIR DIN13 QTV
1 633-103-361 KIT REQULATOR PRESS 2 STAGE HP CO2 DIN6 QTV

Introduction 844 Series 1–45

618-200-1OP ASSY C/CS/S844 OPTIONS
1 633-103-362 KIT REQULATOR PRESS 2 STAGE HP OXYGEN DIN9 QTV
1 633-103-354 KIT REGULATOR PRESS 2 STAGE SCI AIR CGA346 QTV
1 633-103-356 KIT REGULATOR PRESS 2 STAGE OXYGEN CGA540 QTV
1 633-103-359 KIT REGULATOR PRESS UHP LINE 0-50 W/BRKT QTV
1 633-103-355 KIT REGULATOR PRESS 2 STAGE CO2 CGA320 QTV
1 502-915 LINER CRUCIBLE BOROS FOR 528-018 10PK
1 619-995 SCANNER BAR CODE LASER USB
1 619-593-570 SCANNER BAR CODE LASER BLUETOOTH
1 502-928 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-946 PELLET SST 1G LCRM C/S 100 BT
1 502-935 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 621-453-110 KIT PRINTER OFFICEJET PRO HP6230
1 621-454 CARTRIDGE BLACK PRNTR OFFICEJET PRO HP6230
1 621-455 CARTRIDGE CYAN PRNTR OFFICEJET PRO HP6230
1 621-456 CARTRIDGE MAGENTA PRNTR OFFICEJET PRO HP6230
1 621-457 CARTRIDGE YELLOW PRNTR OFFICEJET PRO HP6230
1 619-593-608 KIT UPGRD MONITOR T/SCREEN CS/ONH D/P
1 619-593-610 KIT UPGRD MONITOR T/SCRN CS/ONH D/P W/CARD
1 619-593-620 KIT ADDON MONITOR T/SCREEN CS/ONH D/P
1 619-593-622 KIT ADDON MONITOR T/SCRN CS/ONH D/P W/CARD
1 619-593-616 KIT UPGRD MONITOR T/SCREEN DESKTOP D/P
1 619-593-618 KIT UPGRD MONITOR T/SCRN DESKTOP D/P W/CARD
1 619-593-628 KIT MONITOR T/SCREEN DESKTOP D/P 15FT
1 619-593-630 KIT MONITOR T/SCREEN DESKTOP D/P W/CARD 15FT
1 502-914 CARBON/SULFUR SYNTHETIC LCRM C/S 1.0 50G
1 502-964 CARBON/SULFUR SYNTHETIC LCRM C/S 0.1 50G
1 502-963 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-966 PIN TITANIUM .12G LCRM O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-969 PIN TITANIUM .25G LCRM C 100 BT
1 502-948 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 619-593-674 KIT REPL CONTROL FLOW
1 619-593-668 ASSY MODULE CONTROL FLOW HEATED
1 619-593-670 KIT REPL MODULE CONTROL FLOW HEATED
1 619-593-680-B/O SOFTWARE UPGR C/STONE REMOTE CNTRL/COMM
1 502-974 STD STEEL CHIP CRM ECRM 268-1 100G
1 502-694 SOIL LCRM C/N/S 65G
1 502-697 SOIL LCRM C/N/S 65G
1 502-986 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S 100 BT
1 502-970 POWDER IRON LCRM C/S 100G
1 633-103-442-B/O FAT PACKAGE BASIC SINGLE UNIT

1–46 844 Series Introduction

 618-200-1OP ASSY C/CS/S844 OPTIONS
1 633-103-443-B/O FAT REPLACEMENT ADDITIONAL
1 619-591-470 KIT TUBE COMBUSTION
1 751-060-110 KIT BALANCE 4 PLC ENTRIS II 124 120G
1 502-978 PIN ST .5G LCRM C/S/O/N 100 BT
* Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international
shipments due to shipping restrictions. These items are essential for operation.
Contact your local LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.

Introduction 844 Series 1–47

Components and Accessories

619-591-468 PACK ACCESSORY CS/C844

1 501-077 ACCELERATOR IRON CHIP 6-20 2LB
4 501-170 COPPER OXIDE RARE EARTH 50G
1 501-241 LUB GREASE VACUUM 5.3OZ
1 501-587 CATALYST PLATINUM SILICA 15G
1 764-098 CELLULOSE 1/LB
1 789-095 SPACER REAGENT TUBE
1 528-018-500 CRUCIBLE SP LOW CARBON 500/PK
1 619-880-100 COVER CRUCIBLE SIL B/LDR 100P
1 501-082 BRUSH WIRE CLNG 1.31X12.0
1 502-023 FUNNEL QUICK DISC TUBE
1 503-032 SCOOP GLASS ACCELERATOR 1GM
1 760-138 TWEEZER
1 761-929 TONG CRUCIBLE
1 773-579 ASSY SCOOP SST .218IDX .33
1 762-515 TOOL O-RING REMOVAL
1 619-590-570 WRENCH TIGHTENING RING TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-591-441 ASSY DRAIN LINE WATER COOLING FURNACE
1 619-591-475 GAUGE SPACE COIL FURNACE RF
2 765-976 O-RING 208 .625X .875X.125V
2 775-306 FILTER SECONDARY 10MICRON
1 502-177 WOOL QUARTZ FINE 50G
2 619-591-699 FILTER IN-LINE 0.1 MICRON DISPOSABLE
1 502-237 WIPES FOAM 25/PK
1 502-007 CLEANER TUBE 8MM X 4FT
1 625-711-260 TOOL REMOVAL SCREEN/STEM DOSER
1 619-591-757 ASSY BRUSH CLEANING AUTOCLEANER
1 619-592-415 KIT CONNECTION DOSE GAS
1 203-959 LIT INORGANIC ANALYTICAL
1 619-592-597 ASSY TOOL CLAMP REMOVAL FILTER
1 619-593-443 ASSY TOOL CLEANING RETAINER SPIRAL A/CLN
1 501-008 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL2 -20+40 5LB
1 502-863 PELLET FERROUS 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-928 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-948 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 775-591 PAN TARE
1 619-591-683 TUBE COMBUSTION QTZ 1.58 X 6.12 LG
1 619-592-918 ASSY BASE TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-592-926 O-RING 1.202X 1.742X .270 V50

1–48 844 Series Introduction

619-593-358 PACK ACCESSORY CS844ES
1 203-959 LIT INORGANIC ANALYTICAL
1 501-082 BRUSH WIRE CLNG 1.31X12.0
4 501-170 COPPER OXIDE RARE EARTH 50G
1 501-241 LUB GREASE VACUUM 5.3OZ
1 501-587 CATALYST PLATINUM SILICA 15G
1 502-007 CLEANER TUBE 8MM X 4FT
1 502-023 FUNNEL QUICK DISC TUBE
1 502-177 WOOL QUARTZ FINE 50G
1 502-237 WIPES FOAM 25/PK
1 503-032 SCOOP GLASS ACCELERATOR 1GM
1 619-590-570 WRENCH TIGHTENING RING TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-591-441 ASSY DRAIN LINE WATER COOLING FURNACE
1 619-591-475 GAUGE SPACE COIL FURNACE RF
2 619-591-699 FILTER IN-LINE 0.1 MICRON DISPOSABLE
1 619-591-757 ASSY BRUSH CLEANING AUTOCLEANER
1 619-592-415 KIT CONNECTION DOSE GAS
1 619-592-597 ASSY TOOL CLAMP REMOVAL FILTER
1 619-880-100 COVER CRUCIBLE SIL B/LDR 100P
1 625-711-260 TOOL REMOVAL SCREEN/STEM DOSER
1 760-138 TWEEZER
1 761-929 TONG CRUCIBLE
1 762-515 TOOL O-RING REMOVAL
1 764-098 CELLULOSE 1/LB
2 765-976 O-RING 208 .625X .875X.125V
1 773-579 ASSY SCOOP SST .218IDX .33
2 775-306 FILTER SECONDARY 10MICRON
1 789-095 SPACER REAGENT TUBE
1 502-231 ACCELERATOR HIGH PURITY 1LB
1 502-173 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL 2 HP 750G
1 528-018HP CRUCIBLE C/S HP 1000/PK
1 619-593-443 ASSY TOOL CLEANING RETAINER SPIRAL A/CLN
1 502-712 PIN ST HI-PUR LCRM 1G CSOHN <25PPM 100BT
1 502-863 PELLET FERROUS 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-928 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-948 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 775-591 PAN TARE
1 619-591-683 TUBE COMBUSTION QTZ 1.58 X 6.12 LG
1 619-592-918 ASSY BASE TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-592-926 O-RING 1.202X 1.742X .270 V50

Introduction 844 Series 1–49

619-591-469 PACK ACCESSORY S844
1 501-077 ACCELERATOR IRON CHIP 6-20 2LB
1 501-241 LUB GREASE VACUUM 5.3OZ
1 789-095 SPACER REAGENT TUBE
1 528-018-500 CRUCIBLE SP LOW CARBON 500/PK
1 501-082 BRUSH WIRE CLNG 1.31X12.0
1 502-023 FUNNEL QUICK DISC TUBE
1 503-032 SCOOP GLASS ACCELERATOR 1GM
1 760-138 TWEEZER
1 761-929 TONG CRUCIBLE
1 773-579 ASSY SCOOP SST .218IDX .33
1 762-515 TOOL O-RING REMOVAL
1 619-590-570 WRENCH TIGHTENING RING TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-591-441 ASSY DRAIN LINE WATER COOLING FURNACE
1 619-880-100 COVER CRUCIBLE SIL B/LDR 100P
1 619-591-475 GAUGE SPACE COIL FURNACE RF
2 765-976 O-RING 208 .625X .875X.125V
1 775-306 FILTER SECONDARY 10MICRON
1 619-591-699 FILTER IN-LINE 0.1 MICRON DISPOSABLE
1 502-237 WIPES FOAM 25/PK
1 502-007 CLEANER TUBE 8MM X 4FT
1 625-711-260 TOOL REMOVAL SCREEN/STEM DOSER
1 502-177 WOOL QUARTZ FINE 50G
1 619-591-757 ASSY BRUSH CLEANING AUTOCLEANER
1 203-959 LIT INORGANIC ANALYTICAL
1 619-592-597 ASSY TOOL CLAMP REMOVAL FILTER
1 619-593-443 ASSY TOOL CLEANING RETAINER SPIRAL A/CLN
1 501-008 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL2 -20+40 5LB
1 502-863 PELLET FERROUS 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-928 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-948 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 775-591 PAN TARE
1 619-591-683 TUBE COMBUSTION QTZ 1.58 X 6.12 LG
1 619-592-918 ASSY BASE TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-592-926 O-RING 1.202X 1.742X .270 V50

1–50 844 Series Introduction

619-593-359 PACK ACCESSORY S844ES
1 203-959 LIT INORGANIC ANALYTICAL
1 501-082 BRUSH WIRE CLNG 1.31X12.0
1 501-241 LUB GREASE VACUUM 5.3OZ
1 502-007 CLEANER TUBE 8MM X 4FT
1 502-023 FUNNEL QUICK DISC TUBE
1 502-177 WOOL QUARTZ FINE 50G
1 502-237 WIPES FOAM 25/PK
1 503-032 SCOOP GLASS ACCELERATOR 1GM
1 619-590-570 WRENCH TIGHTENING RING TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-591-441 ASSY DRAIN LINE WATER COOLING FURNACE
1 619-591-475 GAUGE SPACE COIL FURNACE RF
1 619-591-699 FILTER IN-LINE 0.1 MICRON DISPOSABLE
1 619-591-757 ASSY BRUSH CLEANING AUTOCLEANER
1 619-592-597 ASSY TOOL CLAMP REMOVAL FILTER
1 619-880-100 COVER CRUCIBLE SIL B/LDR 100P
1 625-711-260 TOOL REMOVAL SCREEN/STEM DOSER
1 760-138 TWEEZER
1 761-929 TONG CRUCIBLE
1 762-515 TOOL O-RING REMOVAL
2 765-976 O-RING 208 .625X .875X.125V
1 773-579 ASSY SCOOP SST .218IDX .33
1 775-306 FILTER SECONDARY 10MICRON
1 789-095 SPACER REAGENT TUBE
1 502-231 ACCELERATOR HIGH PURITY 1LB
1 502-173 ACCELERATOR LECOCEL 2 HP 750G
1 528-018HP CRUCIBLE C/S HP 1000/PK
1 619-593-443 ASSY TOOL CLEANING RETAINER SPIRAL A/CLN
1 502-712 PIN ST HI-PUR LCRM 1G CSOHN <25PPM 100BT
1 502-863 PELLET FERROUS 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-935 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 502-948 PIN ST 1G LCRM C/S/O/N/H 100 BT
1 775-591 PAN TARE
1 619-591-683 TUBE COMBUSTION QTZ 1.58 X 6.12 LG
1 619-592-918 ASSY BASE TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-592-926 O-RING 1.202X 1.742X .270 V50

Introduction 844 Series 1–51

618-210-077 PACK COMPONENT C/CS/S844 W/MONITOR
1 190-279 SCREW MPHP 8-32X .38 ST ZP
2 190-283 SCREW MPHP 8-32X .75 ST ZP
1 190-329 SCREW MPHP 10-24X .38 ST ZP
1 193-008 WASHER LCK EX .172X .381 STZP
1 193-010 WASHER LCK EX .195X .410 STZP
1 193-055 WASHER FLT .170X .437X.04STZP
1 193-056 WASHER FLT .219X .500X.04STZP
2 194-056 NUT HEX SLKG 8-32 ST ZP NY
1 200-784 MANUAL INSTR 844 FAMILY
1 501-110-009 TUBING FLX SILCN .375ID X 9IN
1 501-110-038 TUBING FLX SILCN .375ID X 38IN RED
2 602-646 CLAMP HOSE TOOTH .569/ .651
1 605-816 PEDESTAL CRUCIBLE SILICON NITRIDE
1 608-898 COVER RECEPTACLE SST
2 611-541 O-RING 218 1.234X 1.512X.139V
1 619-591-385 O-RING 222 1.500X 1.750X .125V
1 619-591-683 TUBE COMBUSTION QTZ 1.58 X 6.12 LG
2 619-591-724 COOLANT 900 ML
1 619-592-148 POWER SUPPLY/CABLE 12V MONITOR TOUCHSCRN
1 619-592-273 ASSY BUCKET CRUCIBLE OPEN TOP AUTO
1 619-592-340 BASE PEDESTAL CRUCIBLE
1 619-592-394 ASSY CONNECTION FLX .25 PNEUMATIC 12FT
1 619-592-395 ASSY CONNECTION CU .125 GAS CARRIER 6FT
1 619-592-501 VACUUM ASSY 3.3A 220V .3 MICRON
1 619-592-577 FILTER DUST CUP SST
1 619-592-593 ASSY BLOCK/BRACKET CONNECT VACUUM
1 619-592-918 ASSY BASE TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-592-926 O-RING 1.202X 1.742X .270 V50
1 619-593-541 HOSE VACUUM EXPANDING 10 FT
1 619-593-602 ASSY MONITOR T/SCREEN 22 MNTD DISP PORT
1 620-682 ASSY CABLE CAT 5 15FT CRSSOVER
5 633-101-675 TIE E STRAP .100/1.25 BLACK
1 765-978 RECP 30A 125/250V 3P4W TL

1–52 844 Series Introduction

618-230-075 PACK COMPONENT C/CS/S844
1 190-279 SCREW MPHP 8-32X .38 ST ZP
2 190-283 SCREW MPHP 8-32X .75 ST ZP
1 190-329 SCREW MPHP 10-24X .38 ST ZP
1 193-008 WASHER LCK EX .172X .381 STZP
1 193-010 WASHER LCK EX .195X .410 STZP
1 193-055 WASHER FLT .170X .437X.04STZP
1 193-056 WASHER FLT .219X .500X.04STZP
1 501-110-009 TUBING FLX SILCN .375ID X 9IN
1 501-110-038 TUBING FLX SILCN .375ID X 38IN RED
2 602-646 CLAMP HOSE TOOTH .569/ .651
1 605-816 PEDESTAL CRUCIBLE SILICON NITRIDE
1 608-898 COVER RECEPTACLE SST
2 611-541 O-RING 218 1.234X 1.512X.139V
1 619-591-385 O-RING 222 1.500X 1.750X .125V
1 619-591-683 TUBE COMBUSTION QTZ 1.58 X 6.12 LG
2 619-591-724 COOLANT 900 ML
1 619-592-273 ASSY BUCKET CRUCIBLE OPEN TOP AUTO
1 619-592-340 BASE PEDESTAL CRUCIBLE
1 619-592-394 ASSY CONNECTION FLX .25 PNEUMATIC 12FT
1 619-592-395 ASSY CONNECTION CU .125 GAS CARRIER 6FT
1 619-592-501 VACUUM ASSY 3.3A 220V .3 MICRON
1 619-592-577 FILTER DUST CUP SST
1 619-592-593 ASSY BLOCK/BRACKET CONNECT VACUUM
1 619-592-918 ASSY BASE TUBE COMBUSTION
1 619-592-926 O-RING 1.202X 1.742X .270 V50
1 619-593-541 HOSE VACUUM EXPANDING 10 FT
1 620-682 ASSY CABLE CAT 5 15FT CRSSOVER
1 765-978 RECP 30A 125/250V 3P4W TL
1 200-784 MANUAL INSTR 844 FAMILY

686-689 ASSY PC TOWER C/CS/S844 HP W10

1 686-689-101 NAMEPLATE ID C/CS/S844 PC
1 WARR-365 WARRANTY 12 MONTH STANDARD
1 686-733 COMPUTER HP Z2 3.6GHZ I3-8100 W10
1 609-787 PACK COMPONENT TWR RECEP/MOUSE

Introduction 844 Series 1–53

Specifications
Instrument Range*
Carbon**............................................0.0006 to 60 mg
Sulfur** .............................................Standard Mode: 0.0006 to 60 mg
ES Mode: 0.0001 to 0.05 mg

Precision†
Carbon:..............................................0.0003 mg or 0.5% RSD, whichever is
greater
Sulfur: ...............................................Standard Mode:0.0003 mg or 0.5% RSD,
whichever is greater
ES Mode: 0.00005 mg or 0.5% RSD,
whichever is greater
Calibration ..........................................Standards (single or multipoint); manual;
gas dose

Analysis Time§ ....................................Standard Mode: 40 seconds

ES Mode: 130 seconds

Cycle Time§ (including purge, analysis delay, and analysis time)

Standard Mode: 130 seconds
ES Mode: 270 seconds

Throughput .........................................Standard Mode: 27 samples per hour

(nominal)
ES Mode: 13 samples per hour (nominal)

Sample Size.........................................1 gram (nominal)

Detection Method ................................Non-Dispersive Infrared Absorption

Chemical Reagents
Anhydrous Magnesium Perchlorate (MgClO4)
Sodium Hydroxide on an Inert Base
Platinized Silica Gel
Rare Earth Copper Oxide
Cellulose

Gas Requirements
Carrier ...............................................Oxygen, 99.5% pure, 35 psi (2.41 bar)
±10%
Pneumatic ..........................................Compressed Air (oil, water free), 40 psi
(2.76 bar) ±10%
Dosing: CS/C844 .................................Carbon Dioxide, 99.99% pure, 20 psi
(1.38 bar) ±10%

1–54 844 Series Introduction

Gas Flow Rates
Carrier ...............................................Standard Mode: 3 L/minute
ES Mode: 0.8 L/min
Pneumatic ..........................................1 L/analysis

Furnace ...............................................Induction, 2.2 kW max (rampable 0 to

100% power), liquid cooled

Coolant................................................300 mL LECO Coolant

Operating Conditions
Operating Temp ..................................15 to 35 °C (59 to 95 °F)
Rel. Humidity ......................................20 to 80% (non-condensing)

Sound Pressure Level ..........................62 dbB excluding vacuum (max reading at

operator’s level per IEC/EN 61010-1)

Physical Dimensions††........................33 in H x 26 in W x 30 in D (84 cm x

64 cm x 75 cm) with touch-screen
monitor

Electrical Power Requirements............230 V~ (+10%/-15% at Max Load);

50/60 Hz, single phase, 25 A;
5,500 Btu/hr ‡

Weight (approx.).................................308 lb (140 kg) with monitor

292 lb (132 kg) without monitor

*Use the following formula to calculate element composition:

% element composition = ((absolute element mass in mg) / (sample mass in
mg)) *100
**Lower range is calculated as 2 σ instrument blank deviation. Method range may
differ due to factors such as sample type and method parameters.
†Calculated as 1 σ instrument blank deviation. Method precision may differ due to
sample inhomogeneity or other external factors.
§All times listed are nominal, actual times may vary based on method settings and
application.
††Allow for a 6-inch (15 cm) minimum access area around sides.
‡
Average output based on nominal operating parameters.

Introduction 844 Series 1–55

This page intentionally left blank.

1–56 844 Series Introduction

2 Installations
The Installation chapter lists step-by-step instructions to install the
CS844, C844 and S844 Carbon/Sulfur Analyzers.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING

During installation and operation of this instrument, the
ON/OFF switch must be easily accessible. The ON/OFF switch
is located on the left side of the instrument.

PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE GLOVES

Protective eyewear and gloves should be worn when handling
chemicals.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for the specific chemical
for additional information.

Illustrations .................................................................................. 2–3

Lifting and Moving the Instrument................................................... 2–5
Instrument Front Panel Overview CS844/C844 ................................. 2–6
Table of Front Panel Controls and Assemblies CS844/C844............ 2–7
Instrument Front Panel Overview S844 ............................................ 2–8
Table of Front Panel Controls and Assemblies S844 ...................... 2–9
Instrument Rear Panel Overview ................................................... 2–10
Table of Rear Panel Controls and Assemblies ............................. 2–11
Installing the Analyzer ................................................................. 2–12
Installing the Oscillator Tube ........................................................ 2–16
Installing the Pedestal ................................................................. 2–17
Installing the Electrical................................................................. 2–18
Power Requirements - Electrical Wiring Diagrams....................... 2–18
Installing the Vacuum Cleaner ...................................................... 2–20
Installing the Computer ............................................................... 2–22
Computer System Supplied by LECO......................................... 2–22
Computer System Supplied by the User .................................... 2–23
Installing the Touch Screen Monitor.......................................... 2–23
Analyzer-Mounted Touch Screen Monitors ............................ 2–23

Installation 844 Series 2–1

 Desktop-Mounted Touch Screen Monitors ............................. 2–24
Setting Up PC for Use .................................................................. 2–31
LECO Cornerstone Brand Software ................................................ 2–32
Required Settings for LECO Software ........................................ 2–32
Operating System (OS) User Permission Requirements .......... 2–32
Data File Permissions......................................................... 2–33
Antivirus Software............................................................. 2–33
Windows Settings.............................................................. 2–33
Instrument Ethernet Adapter ................................................... 2–33
Installing the Software............................................................ 2–34
Configuring Firewall Settings ................................................... 2–35
Troubleshooting Registration Key ............................................. 2–35
Registration Key Error Messages ......................................... 2–36
Adding Options to the Registration Key ..................................... 2–36
Uninstalling LECO Software ..................................................... 2–37
Setting up Microsoft Windows for Touch Screen Operation................ 2–38
Auto Hiding Taskbar ............................................................... 2–38

2–2 844 Series Installation

Illustrations

Figure 2-1 Front Panel CS844/C844...................................................... 2–6

Figure 2-2 Front Panel S844 ................................................................ 2–8
Figure 2-3 Rear Panel ....................................................................... 2–10
Figure 2-4 Pedestal Assembly ............................................................ 2–17
Figure 2-5 End View of Plug: NEMA L14-30P (30 A) .............................. 2–18
Figure 2-6 Monitor Post and Base ....................................................... 2–24
Figure 2-7 Post Collar/Tilt Mechanism Assembly................................... 2–25
Figure 2-8 Attach Mounting Plate ....................................................... 2–25
Figure 2-9 Vertical Monitor Installation................................................ 2–26
Figure 2-10 Horizontal Monitor Installation .......................................... 2–26
Figure 2-11 Monitor Assembly............................................................ 2–28
Figure 2-12 Touch Monitor Installation................................................ 2–29
Figure 2-13 Touch Monitor Rear Panel Installation ................................ 2–30

Installation 844 Series 2–3

This page intentionally left blank.

2–4 844 Series Installation

Lifting and Moving the Instrument

CAUTION
Refer to Specifications, page 1–54, for the approximate
shipping and instrument weight. To lift or move the
instrument, use equipment capable of safely lifting this
weight.

1. Properly distribute weight prior to lifting.

CAUTION
Front panels and other cosmetic parts of this instrument are
not designed to be weight bearing. DO NOT use such parts as
lifting points, or damage may result. ALWAYS lift near the feet
at the sides or the rear of the instrument base.

2. Position instrument in a location convenient to power and gas

supplies, providing a minimum access space of 6 inches around
the instrument. The location for the instrument must also be
adequately rated to support the weight of the instrument and all
accessories.

3. Visually inspect the instrument for damage.

Installation 844 Series 2–5

Instrument Front Panel Overview CS844/C844

The following section provides an overview of the controls, filters, and

assemblies. Refer to Table of Front Panel Controls and Assemblies
CS844/C844, page 2–7, for more information.
Depending on your configuration, the instrument front panel may not
appear exactly as shown.

Figure 2-1
Front Panel CS844/C844

2–6 844 Series Installation

 Table of Front Panel Controls and Assemblies CS844/C844
Control/Indicator Action
Catalyst Converts all CO to CO2 and SO2 to SO3.
Removes SO3 from the carrier flow before it reaches
Cellulose Trap
the carbon IR cells.
Removes impurities, mainly hydrocarbons,
Incoming Purifier
from the gas.
Flow Scrubber Removes water from the carrier flow.
Particle Filter Removes particles from the carrier flow.
Removes carbon dioxide and water from the carrier
Incoming Scrubber
gas. This filter is located below the incoming purifier.
This door provides access to the coolant drain
Flow Controller Access Door
fitting and the flow controller.
Removes combustion debris from the area
Vacuum Hose Clean-Up Tool
around the pedestal after analysis.

Installation 844 Series 2–7

Instrument Front Panel Overview S844
The following section shows the location of instrument controls, filters
and assemblies. Refer to Table of Front Panel Controls and Assemblies
S844, page 2–9.
Depending on your configuration, the instrument front panel may not
appear exactly as shown.

Figure 2-2
Front Panel S844

2–8 844 Series Installation

 Table of Front Panel Controls and Assemblies S844
Control/Indicator Action
Flow Scrubber Removes water from the carrier flow.
Particle Filter Removes particles from the carrier flow.
This door provides access to the coolant drain
Flow Controller Access Door
fitting and the flow controller.
Removes combustion debris from the area
Vacuum Hose Clean-Up Tool
around the pedestal after analysis.

Installation 844 Series 2–9

Instrument Rear Panel Overview
The following section provides an overview of the controls, filters, and
assemblies. Refer to Table of Rear Panel Controls and Assemblies,
page 2–11, for more information.

Depending on your configuration, the instrument rear panel may not

appear exactly as shown.

Figure 2-3
Rear Panel

Connectors 24 through 26 may not appear on all configurations.

2–10 844 Series Installation

 Table of Rear Panel Controls and Assemblies
1 Heated Dust Filter Circuit Breaker (CB4)
2 RF Furnace Circuit Breaker (CB5)
3 Instrument Power Cord
4 Vacuum Cleaner Circuit Breaker (CB3)
5 Vacuum Cleaner
6 Coolant Reservoir and Pump
7 Cooling System Air Filter
8 Cabinet Air Filter
9 Automation
10 Automation Circuit Breaker (CB1)

11
Ethernet
12 Dose B Pressure Relief
13 Dose A Pressure Relief
14 Pressure Monitor
15 Dose B In
16 Dose B Exhaust
17 Dose A In
18 Dose A Exhaust
19 Oxygen In
20 Oxygen Pressure Relief
21 Pneumatic Pressure Relief
22 Pneumatic Pressure In
23 Carrier Flow Exhaust
24 Touch Screen Power
25 Touch Screen
26 Touch Screen Video

Installation 844 Series 2–11

Installing the Analyzer

CAUTION
Many substances that do not normally burn in air, as well as
other substances that are combustible in oxygen, may burn
violently when a higher percentage of oxygen is present.

OXIDIZING/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE
GLOVES
Oxygen is an oxidizer and is pressurized. It can become
volatile when subjected to heat or high temperatures.
Protective eyewear and gloves should be worn when handling
oxygen.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

· Follow all local regulations for storage and handling of oxygen.

Keep combustibles away from oxygen and eliminate ignition
sources.
· Do not allow oil, grease, or other readily combustible materials to
come in contact with a cylinder or equipment used for oxidant
services. Use only equipment that is intended for oxygen service.
Use only a regulator that is designated and labeled “cleaned for
oxygen service.”
· Do not use plastic tubing to supply oxygen to the analyzer.
Copper/copper-base or nickel/nickel-base alloys are preferred for
oxygen supply lines because the ignition temperature and burn
resistance is higher than plastic.
· Oxygen, as a liquid or cold gas, may cause severe frostbite to the
skin or eyes. Do not touch frosted pipes or valves.
· For more detailed information, consult the Safety Data Sheet
(SDS) provided by your oxygen supplier and review local
regulations and guidelines for oxygen piping.
The following procedure should be used for first-time installation of the
instrument. This procedure assumes that the instrument has been unpacked
and positioned in its permanent location. Refer to Installing the Electrical,
page 2–18.
The Balance and Printer must be purchased separately; they are not
supplied with the instrument.
For power and gas supply requirements, refer to the Specifications,
page 1–54.

2–12 844 Series Installation

 CAUTION
For proper operation, the analyzer must be installed on a
relatively level surface.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING

During installation and operation of this instrument, the
On/Off switch must be easily accessible. The ON/OFF switch
is located on the left side of the instrument.

1. Provide a work surface with convenient electrical power and gas

supplies. Refer to Specifications, page 1–54.
2. Install the computer near the instrument. Do not turn On the
computer until instructed to do so in step 17, page 2–14. Refer to
Installing the Computer, page 2–22.
3. Install the balance near the computer and instrument. A balance must
be purchased separately and is optional equipment. Refer to Installing
the Balance, page 5–13.
4. Connect the oxygen tubing assembly from the oxygen tank to Oxygen
In on the rear of the instrument. Refer to Figure 2-3, page 2–10.
The oxygen inlet fitting is an adapter that accommodates the 1/8-inch
copper tubing supplied in the component pack. If 1/4-inch tubing is
preferred, remove the adapter and connect the 1/4-inch tubing (not
supplied in the component pack).
5. Turn On the oxygen gas at the tank, and then set the regulator to
35 psi (2.4 bar).
6. If required, connect the carrier flow exhaust, on the rear of the
instrument, to the facility exhaust. Refer to Figure 2-3, page 2–10.
7. Connect the pneumatic tubing assembly from the pneumatic tank to
the pneumatic fitting on the rear of the instrument. Refer to
Figure 2-3, page 2–10.
A. Push the tubing into the pneumatic fitting until it is seated. Pull
back on the tubing to make sure it is locked in place. If it is
necessary to remove the tubing from the instrument, push in on
the outer ring of the fitting while pulling the tubing out.
B. Turn On the pneumatic gas at the tank and set the regulator to
40 psi (2.8 bar).

Installation 844 Series 2–13

 CAUTION/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE
GLOVES
Carbon dioxide is a gas under pressure. It can become volatile
when subjected to heat or high temperatures. It is an
asphyxiant and may displace the oxygen in the room.
Protective gloves and eyewear should be worn at all times
when handling this material.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

8. Connect the gas dose tubing assembly from the gas dose tank to Dose
A In and Dose B In on the rear of the instrument. A “T” assembly is
provided to connect both inlets if desired. Refer to Figure 2-3,
page 2–10.
A. Turn On the dose gas at the tank, and then set the regulator to
20 psi (1.4 bar).
B. If required, connect the Dose A Exhaust, Dose B Exhaust, and
pressure monitor, on the rear of the instrument, to the facility
exhaust.
The PRESSURE MONITOR should be used whenever the DOSE A
EXHAUST and DOSE B EXHAUST outlets are routed to an external vent.
This ensures that the pressure measured at the PRESSURE MONITOR
port is the same as the DOSE A EXHAUST and the DOSE B EXHAUST.
9. Install the oscillator tube and fill the coolant reservoir. Refer to
Installing the Oscillator Tube, page 2–16.
10. Install the bracket for the vacuum cleaner.
11. Install the vacuum cleaner. Refer to Installing the Vacuum Cleaner,
page 2–20.
12. Remove and pack the following reagent tubes according to the
procedures described in the Maintenance section.
· Catalyst Tube (heated), page 6–16: (CS/C844).
· Cellulose Tube (nonheated), page 6–19: (CS/C844)
· Incoming Purifier Tube (heated), page 6–12: (CS/C844).
· Incoming Scrubber Tube (nonheated), page 6–9: (CS/C844).
· Flow Scrubber Tube (nonheated), page 6–21: (CS/C/S844).
13. Reinstall the reagent tube(s) if not already completed.
14. Plug the instrument into facility AC power. Refer to Installing the
Electrical, page 2–18.
15. Turn On the power switch located on the left-side of the instrument.
Allow 1 to 2 minutes for the instrument to start.
16. Turn On the monitor.
17. Turn On the computer. If using a non-LECO PC, refer to Setting Up PC
for Use, page 2–31.

2–14 844 Series Installation

 18. When prompted, log in using the Customer account.
19. Use the control panel to confirm that the display settings are
configured to match the native resolution of the monitor, and that the
display is rotated to the portrait (flipped) orientation.
20. Instrument software is installed during the manufacturing process
except when field installations are required. Install the software if
necessary. Refer to LECO Cornerstone Brand Software, page 2–32.
21. Double-click the instrument software desktop icon to start the
software.
22. Select the pedestal button to lower the pedestal.
23. Install the combustion tube. Refer to Manual Installation, page 6–34.
24. Install the pedestal base and pedestal. Refer to Installing the Pedestal,
page 2–17.
25. To ensure that the coolant reservoir has been properly filled, select
Instruments, Maintenance, General Maintenance, and then select On
for the Coolant Pump. Allow the coolant to circulate for about
30 seconds, and then turn Off the coolant pump. Remove the reservoir
cap and add the specified coolant until the coolant level is
approximately 1/2-inch from the top of the reservoir and below the
threads.
26. In the software, select Instrument, Maintenance, General Maintenance,
and then select Get Incoming Pressure. Adjust the gas regulator on
the oxygen tank until the incoming pressure displayed in the software
reads 35 psi. Do not be concerned with the reading on the tank
regulator.
27. Turn On the carrier gas from the software.
28. Select the Ambient tab in Diagnostics and check all readings for any
Warnings. Refer to Ambient Monitor Ranges, page 8–8.
29. When the heaters have stabilized, perform a System Check by completing
the following steps.
A. In the software, select Diagnostics, and then select System Check.
B. Select Start, and then wait for the System Check sequence to
finish.
C. Address any items that do not pass.
30. Perform a Leak Check to make sure the system is sealed and does not
leak. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
31. Turn Off the carrier gas.
32. Instrument installation is now complete.

Installation 844 Series 2–15

Installing the Oscillator Tube
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING
WARNING LETHAL HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD
When the instrument is plugged in and power turned On, the
oscillator and the furnace power supply may contain high
voltage. Before proceeding with this procedure, always ensure
that the power switch, located on the left side of the
instrument, is OFF and that the power cable is unplugged
from facility power.

Use caution and the proper high voltage safety procedures

when working on and around these assemblies.

Illustrations of the oscillator assembly are available in the Illustrations

chapter, page 10–1.
1. Turn Off the power switch, located on the left side of the
instrument, and unplug the instrument from the power source.
2. Remove the right side panel of the instrument.
3. Remove the lower power supply cover and then the upper
oscillator cover to expose the oscillator chassis.
4. Install the oscillator tube into the oscillator assembly by pushing
it into the socket. The socket is keyed and the tube will only go in
one way.
5. Secure the plate heat sink to the top of the oscillator tube.
6. Fill the coolant reservoir.
A. Remove the left side panel.
B. Remove the reservoir cap to the coolant reservoir, located at
the rear of the instrument.
C. Fill the coolant reservoir with the specified coolant until the
coolant level is approximately 1/2-inch from the top of the
reservoir and below the threads.
D. Reinstall the reservoir cap.
E. Inspect the clear tubing and fittings in the oscillator housing
on the right side of the instrument for leaks.
F. Inspect the blue tubing and fittings within the left side of the
instrument for leaks.
G. Inspect the fittings on the rear of the unit for leaks.
H. Reinstall the left side panel.
7. Reinstall the oscillator and power supply covers and tighten all
screws.
8. Reinstall the right side panel.

2–16 844 Series Installation

Installing the Pedestal

1. Install the dust cup filter on the lower seal assembly.

2. Install the pedestal base.
3. Install the pedestal on the pedestal base.

Figure 2-4
Pedestal Assembly

Installation 844 Series 2–17

Installing the Electrical

Power Requirements - Electrical Wiring Diagrams

The instrument’s configuration as shipped is detailed in this section.
Utilization of other components may be required based on the location.

For all installations, ensure that the electrical receptacles at the

installation site meet all of the requirements listed in this section.
Follow all national and local electrical codes. Utilize professional
electricians as required. Receptacles in North America must be Branch
Circuit Protected. GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter) receptacles
may be required in some areas.

Analyzer
Power Input 230 VAC +10/-15% at max load, 50/60 Hz,
single phase, 25 A maximum
Line Cord (LECO P/N 619-590-705) NEMA L14-30 captive
line cord, 30 A/250 V, 10 AWG, 3 conductor,
8 ft 2 in (2.5 m)
Receptacle (LECO P/N 765-978) NEMA L14-30R, included
Outlet in instrument component pack
Receptacle (LECO P/N 608-898) 1- gang, included in
Cover instrument component pack

Figure 2-5
End View of Plug: NEMA L14-30P (30 A)

Computer (optional)
Power Input 115 VAC/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 240 W
Line Cord detachable with NEMA 5-15 plug and
C13 connector, included with computer
Monitor (optional LCD)
Power Input 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.3 A,
C14 inlet connector
Line Cord detachable with NEMA 5-15 plug and
C13 connector, included with monitor

2–18 844 Series Installation

 Monitor (optional touchscreen)
Power Input 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 A,
C14 inlet connector
Line Cord detachable with NEMA 5-15 plug and
C13 connector, included with monitor
Balance (optional)
Power Input 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A, C8 inlet
connector
Line Cord detachable with NEMA 1-15 (or CEE 7/16) plug
and C7 connector, both included with balance
Shuttle Loader (optional)
Power supplied via the analyzer.

Installation 844 Series 2–19

Installing the Vacuum Cleaner

The necessary equipment and components to install the vacuum

cleaner are located in the Component Pack.
1. Unpack the vacuum cleaner and open the filter compartment to
verify the vacuum filter is installed properly.
2. Set the vacuum power switch to On.
3. Plug the vacuum cleaner into the vacuum cleaner AC outlet on
the rear of the instrument.
4. Locate the vacuum manifold assembly. Insert one o-ring on each
end of the block.
5. Attach one end of the hose supplied with the vacuum cleaner to
the vacuum manifold port that points away from the instrument.
Attach the other end of the hose to the vacuum cleaner.
6. Remove the three outermost screws beneath the stainless steel
work surface.

7. Remove the lower right casting.

2–20 844 Series Installation

 8. Route the flexible silicone tubing between the vacuum manifold and
the left side of the tube union located on the front of the pedestal
cylinder. Secure the flexible silicone tubing using hose clamps.

The color of the flexible silicone tubing may vary.

9. Attach one end of the second vacuum hose to the open port on the
vacuum manifold. Route the hose beneath the instrument and attach
the remaining end to the hose block located on the mechanical flow
controller access panel inside the left door.
10. Reinstall the lower right casting and stainless steel work surface.
11. Slide the vacuum manifold into the bracket on the rear of the
unit.

Installation 844 Series 2–21

Installing the Computer
The computer system that consists of the computer, monitor, and
printer (optional) can be purchased from LECO or supplied by the user.
If the computer system is supplied by LECO, refer to Computer System
Supplied by LECO, following. If the user supplies the computer system,
refer to Computer System Supplied by the User, page 2–23.

Computer System Supplied by LECO

1. Unpack the computer.
2. Set the computer near the instrument.
3. Locate the keyboard, supplied with the computer, and set it in
front of where the monitor will be installed. Connect the keyboard
cable to a USB port on the rear of the computer.
4. Locate the mouse, supplied with the computer, and set it next to
the keyboard. Connect the mouse cable to a USB port on the rear
of the computer.

CAUTION: NETWORK CONNECTION

Connect the Ethernet port on the instrument to the
appropriate port on the computer as instructed in this manual.
Connecting the instrument directly to a corporate network
(LAN) may result in communication problems.

5. Locate the Ethernet cable and connect one end to the network
interface card on the rear of the computer. Connect the other end

to the Ethernet Port on the rear of the instrument. Refer to

Figure 2-3.
6. Locate the Registration key. Connect the key to a USB port on the
rear of the computer.
7. Install the monitor by completing the following steps.
· For systems with touch screen monitors, refer to Analyzer-
Mounted Touch Screen Monitors, page 2–23, or Desktop-
Mounted Touch Screen Monitors, page 2–24.
· For systems with non-touch screen desktop-mounted
monitors, complete the following steps:
a) Connect the monitor to a suitable AC power source.
Refer to the manual supplied with the monitor.
b) Connect the video cable, supplied with the monitor, to
the monitor and the computer. Refer to the manual
supplied with the desktop monitor.

2–22 844 Series Installation

 8. If the instrument and (optional) balance installation is complete,
connect the computer's electrical supply connector to a suitable
AC power source and turn On power to the computer. If the
installation is not complete, do not turn On power to the
computer until instructed to do so in Installing the Analyzer,
page 2–12.
9. OPTIONAL: Install the printer according to the manual provided
by the manufacturer.

Computer System Supplied by the User

If the Computer System is not supplied by LECO, the computer must
meet minimum requirements. Contact LECO for more information.

Installing the Touch Screen Monitor

Analyzer-Mounted Touch Screen Monitors

CAUTION
For instruments with connectors on the back panel only: To
prevent damage to the device, use only the power supply that
was included with the touch screen monitor.
1. Unpack the monitor.
2. Remove the three screws that secure the cable access panel on
the back of the monitor. Refer to Figure 2-13, page 2–30.
Make sure that the spring-loaded stop pin is positioned toward the
top of the analyzer. Refer to Figure 2-12, page 2–29.

3. Install the monitor on the front of the analyzer by completing the

following steps. Refer to Figure 2-12, page 2–29.
A. Using a 9/64-inch Allen® wrench (hex wrench), remove the
bottom stop screw.
B. Pull the stop pin in the mounting arm carriage to unlock.
Continue holding onto the stop pin until the monitor is in
position.
C. Slide the monitor carriage block onto the monitor rail on the
back of the monitor.
D. Release the stop pin into the desired hole alongside the
monitor rail to temporarily lock the monitor into position.
E. Reinstall the bottom stop screw to prevent the monitor from
falling out of the mount.
4. Route the cable assembly in through the cable opening in the
monitor and out through the cable access panel opening as shown
in Figure 2-12, page 2–29. Pull just enough wire through the
opening to make the connections in step 5, following.
5. Connect each of the cables into the monitor.

Installation 844 Series 2–23

 6. Using the three screws removed in step 2, previous, reinstall the
cable access panel on the monitor. Refer to Figure 2-13,
page 2–30.
7. Adjust the monitor to a comfortable viewing height and angle by
pulling out the stop pin in the mounting arm carriage. With the
stop pin pulled out, raise or lower the monitor to the appropriate
height. Release the stop pin into the desired hole alongside the
monitor rail to lock the monitor into position. Refer to Figure
2-12, page 2–29.
8. Connect the USB cable, supplied with the monitor, to a USB port
on the rear of the computer.

Desktop-Mounted Touch Screen Monitors

1. Unpack the monitor.
2. Place the post for the desktop monitor stand into the base with
the groove toward the back of the base (in line with the screw
hole). Refer to Figure 2-6, following.

Figure 2-6
Monitor Post and Base
3. Using the 7/32-inch Allen wrench (hex wrench), tighten the
setscrew in the base to secure the post.

2–24 844 Series Installation

 4. Install the post collar onto the tilt mechanism. Secure the two
pieces together using the black washer (with prongs) and the
black Phillips screw. Refer to Figure 2-7, following.
Make sure the prongs on the washer are not visible when the
washer is installed.
To increase or decrease the force required to tilt the monitor, adjust
the setscrew in the tilt mechanism. Refer to Figure 2-7, following.

Figure 2-7
Post Collar/Tilt Mechanism Assembly

5. Attach the mounting plate to the tilt mechanism with the four
10-32 3/8-inch Phillips head screws supplied with the kit. Refer to
Figure 2-8, following.

Figure 2-8
Attach Mounting Plate

Installation 844 Series 2–25

 6. Install the tilt mechanism mounting plate to the monitor carriage
block by completing the following steps.
· To install the monitor with a vertical orientation:
a) Position the tilt mechanism mounting plate onto the
monitor carriage block as shown in Figure 2-9, following.

Figure 2-9
Vertical Monitor Installation

b) Secure the carriage block to the tilt mechanism

mounting plate with three Phillips screws, leaving the
upper left screw hole empty. Refer to Figure 2-9,
previous, for screw placement.
c) Install the thumbscrew in the fourth screw hole as a
carriage lock. Refer to Figure 2-9, previous.
· To install the monitor with a horizontal orientation:
a) Position the tilt mechanism mounting plate onto the
monitor carriage block as shown in Figure 2-10,
following.

Figure 2-10
Horizontal Monitor Installation

2–26 844 Series Installation

 b) Secure the carriage block to the tilt mechanism
mounting plate with three Phillips screws, leaving the
upper left screw hole empty. Refer to Figure 2-10,
previous, for screw placement.
c) Install the thumbscrew in the fourth screw hole as a
carriage lock. Refer to Figure 2-10, previous.
7. Place the monitor face down on a flat work surface or countertop.
8. Using a 9/64-inch Allen (hex) wrench, remove the bottom stop
screw from the back of the monitor. Refer to Figure 2-12,
page 2–29.
9. Slide the monitor carriage block onto the monitor rail on the back
of the monitor. Refer to Figure 2-12, page 2–29.
10. Reinstall the bottom stop screw.
11. Remove the three screws that secure the cable access panel on
the back of the monitor. Refer to Figure 2-13, page 2–30.
12. Route the cable assembly in through the cable opening in the
monitor and out through the cable access panel opening as shown
in Figure 2-12, page 2–29. Pull just enough wire through the
opening to make the connections in step 13, following.
13. Connect each of the cables into the monitor.
14. Using the three screws removed in step 11, previous, reinstall the
cable access panel on the monitor. Refer to Figure 2-13,
page 2–30.

Installation 844 Series 2–27

 15. Carefully pick up the monitor assembly, and then slide it onto the
base assembly post. Tighten the wingnut to secure the monitor
into position. Refer to Figure 2-11, following.

Figure 2-11
Monitor Assembly

2–28 844 Series Installation

 16. Connect the power supply to the cable assembly.
17. Tighten the thumbscrew installed in step 6 to prevent the monitor
from wobbling.

Figure 2-12
Touch Monitor Installation

Installation 844 Series 2–29

 Figure 2-13
Touch Monitor Rear Panel Installation

2–30 844 Series Installation

Setting Up PC for Use

· The following section applies only when using a non-LECO PC.

· Due to setup and hardware variations between computer

manufacturers, LECO cannot accommodate all possible variables
required for optimal operation of the Cornerstone brand software
and the LECO analyzer. For non-LECO computers, contact the
computer manufacturer’s service department for support.

1. Install any required cards.

2. Connect keyboard, mouse, monitor, and power cords.
3. Turn On the computer tower.
4. Install and/or set up Microsoft® Windows® 7 64-bit operating
system or later.
5. If the computer connects to the instrument via an Ethernet
adapter, make sure that the adapter is named “LECO Hardware.”
Windows Firewall may ask to allow communications to the
Cornerstone brand software. If prompted, these communications are
trustworthy and should be allowed.

Installation 844 Series 2–31

LECO Cornerstone Brand Software

IMPORTANT: LECO recommends performing the following procedures

BEFORE installing any new version of the Cornerstone brand software.
This will help identify any underlying hardware issues to be addressed
before software installation.
System Check, page 8–17.
Leak Check, page 8–15.
Validating the Database, page 5–22.
The following section includes the following procedures:
Required Settings for LECO Software, following.
Instrument Ethernet Adapter, page 2–33.
Installing the Software, page 2–34
Configuring Firewall Settings, page 2–35.
Troubleshooting Registration Key, page 2–35.
Uninstalling LECO Software, page 2–37.

Required Settings for LECO Software

Windows 7 (64-bit) or later is required for LECO Cornerstone brand
software. Windows 10 (64-bit) is recommended. Make sure that all the
latest Windows updates have been installed..

Operating System (OS) User Permission Requirements

The following table shows the minimum permissions that a user must
have in the Microsoft Windows OS in order to perform certain tasks in
the software. Refer to User Accounts.

Task Minimum Permission

Using Software Standard User
Installing Software Administrator
Upgrading Software Administrator
Setting up Users Administrator
LECO Service Administrator

2–32 844 Series Installation

 Data File Permissions
To use LECO software, read-write access is required for all the data
files. The proper permissions are automatically set up during the
software installation; however, if these permissions are ever changed,
file access errors can occur. The following data folders require read-
write permissions: use the appropriate drive letter, typically
C:\ProgramData\LECO (hidden OS folder).

Antivirus Software
LECO recommends that antivirus checking be turned off for the
following files to avoid interference with data collection or storage:
use the appropriate drive letter, typically C:\ProgramData\LECO
(hidden OS folder).

Windows Settings
To use LECO software, certain Windows settings are required to ensure
performance of the instrument. These settings are set up automatically
during software installation; however, problems may be encountered if
they are ever changed. The required Windows settings are listed in the
following table.
Power Options Required Value
Display Turn Off display after Never
Sleep Sleep after Never
Hard Disk Turn Off hard disk after 0 minutes

Instrument Ethernet Adapter

The Ethernet adapter that connects to the instrument requires specific
settings to allow communication. The adapter must be named “LECO
Hardware.” The following settings are automatically applied to the
adapter during software installation. If these settings are changed,
communication errors may occur.
Setting Value
IP Address 10.10.10.2
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Installation 844 Series 2–33

 Installing the Software
1. Turn On the computer tower.

CAUTION: NETWORK CONNECTION

Connect the Ethernet port on the instrument to the
appropriate port on the computer as instructed in this manual.
Connecting the instrument directly to a corporate network
(LAN) may result in communication problems.

2. If the Ethernet cable was not previously connected, locate the

Ethernet cable and connect one end to the network interface card
on the rear of the computer. Connect the other end to the

Ethernet Port on the rear of the instrument. Refer to Figure

2-3.
3. Make sure that the Ethernet adapter connected to the instrument
has been named “LECO Hardware.”
4. Complete one of the following steps to acquire administration-
level permission, which is required for installation.
· Log in to the operating system using an administrator-level
account.
Or
· Log in as normal and have someone provide administrator
credentials for the install.
5. Insert the software installation media into the appropriate drive.
Or
Navigate to https://www.lecosoftware.com/cornerstone, and
select Web Installer or Offline Installer.
6. Run the installer by completing the appropriate set of steps,
depending on what was done in step 5, previous:
Software Installation Media:
A. Press Windows key + E on the keyboard to open the File
Explorer.
B. Select the desired installation media from the left-hand
navigation pane of the File Explorer.
C. Double-click “Setup” to begin the software installation.
LECO Software Website:
Run the installer downloaded in step 5, previous.
7. Follow the onscreen prompts to allow the installer to make
changes to the computer as part of the installation.
The software installation procedure may require the computer to be
restarted at the end of installation. If prompted, allow the restart.

2–34 844 Series Installation

 8. At the Welcome screen, select Begin to start the installation
process.
9. At the Preparing to Install Cornerstone screen, insert the LECO-
supplied Registration key into a USB slot on the PC if not
completed previously.
10. At the Install Cornerstone screen, select Install to install the
Cornerstone brand software.
11. At the Installation Complete screen, select Finish. The icon for the
instrument software will appear on the desktop.
12. Complete the steps in Setting up Microsoft Windows for Touch
Screen Operation, page 2–38.

13. Double-click the instrument software desktop icon to

start the software.

Configuring Firewall Settings

When the LECO software is installed, it automatically configures the
Microsoft Windows firewall settings for the instrument software. (If the
Microsoft Windows firewall settings are ever changed, the easiest fix is
to reinstall the LECO software.)

If a firewall program other than Microsoft Windows is used, exclude

“C:\Program Files\LECO Cornerstone\LECO Cornerstone.exe” from all
firewall restrictions.

Troubleshooting Registration Key

· A Registration Key is required to use the software.

· Do not insert the Registration Key into the USB port until
prompted by the LECO software installer.

· The Registration Key should remain installed in one of the USB

ports while using the software.

Installation 844 Series 2–35

 Registration Key Error Messages

The Cornerstone Registration Key Not Present or Invalid dialog box

appears if the registration key is not installed.
1. Verify the registration key is installed.
2. Verify the registration key driver is installed.
3. Select OK, and then restart the software.

Adding Options to the Registration Key

The steps in this section should be completed only when additional
features are purchased.
The file “Cornerstone.CopyProtectionKey.v2c” can be used only once
and it cannot be used to update an instrument other than the unit
specified in step 1, following.
1. Select the information button in the upper right corner of the
Cornerstone brand software. Record the Registration ID and
Registration Date.

2. Provide your local LECO service representative with the product

name, serial number, Registration ID, Registered On date, and
the type of option to be added to the instrument.
3. A file named “Cornerstone.CopyProtectionKey.v2c” will be
returned to the customer. Place this file in the instrument PC’s My
Documents folder (C:\Users\Customer\Documents).
4. Start the Cornerstone brand software. The software will
automatically read the file, update the options on the registration
key, and delete the file when done.
5. Any software features associated with that option will be enabled
in the Cornerstone brand software.

2–36 844 Series Installation

 Uninstalling LECO Software
The following screenshot illustrations are examples only and may be
different depending on what version of Windows you are using.

The following section explains how to uninstall LECO software.

1. Select the Start button in the lower left corner.
2. Enter the following text in the Search field: add or remove
programs. When Add or Remove Programs appears in the
matches, select it.
3. Scroll until LECO Cornerstone appears, and then select it.

4. Select Uninstall.

5. When prompted, verify that the name of the software being

uninstalled is correct, and then confirm the uninstallation.

Installation 844 Series 2–37

Setting up Microsoft Windows for Touch Screen
Operation

Auto Hiding Taskbar

The following instructions explain how to auto-hide the task bar in
order to view the bottom of the Cornerstone software.
1. Right-click on the taskbar.
2. Select Properties/Settings.
3. Select the Auto-Hide the Taskbar checkbox.
4. Select OK.

2–38 844 Series Installation

3 Analysis
The Analysis chapter explains how to prepare the sample for an
analysis once the instrument is set up.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING

During installation and operation of this instrument, the
ON/OFF switch must be easily accessible. The ON/OFF switch
is located on the left side of the instrument.

PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE GLOVES

Protective eyewear and gloves should be worn when handling
chemicals.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for the specific chemical
for additional information.

Illustrations .................................................................................. 3–4

Software Overview ........................................................................ 3–5
Title Bar Items......................................................................... 3–7
Task Center ........................................................................ 3–8
Action Bar Items ...................................................................... 3–9
Utility Bar Items..................................................................... 3–12
Ambient Gauges..................................................................... 3–13
3-State Gauge View........................................................... 3–13
Plot Stack View ...................................................................... 3–14
Session Menu Items ............................................................... 3–14
General Software Items .......................................................... 3–15
Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................ 3–15
Performing Common Software Tasks ............................................. 3–16
Starting the Software ............................................................. 3–16
Selecting a Language......................................................... 3–18
Logging In........................................................................ 3–19
Exiting the Software .......................................................... 3–19
Homing the Shuttle Loader ................................................. 3–20
Configuring the Plot................................................................ 3–20

Analysis 844 Series 3–1

 Configuring the Calculations Plots........................................ 3–22
Importing and Exporting ......................................................... 3–22
Importing......................................................................... 3–22
Exporting ......................................................................... 3–23
Copy Output .......................................................................... 3–23
Export Output ........................................................................ 3–23
Including and Excluding .......................................................... 3–24
Cloning ................................................................................. 3–24
Customizing Analyze Button with Logo...................................... 3–25
Using the Guide ..................................................................... 3–25
Using Help............................................................................. 3–25
Navigating within the Manual.............................................. 3–26
Searching the Manual ........................................................ 3–26
Printing Pages from the Manual........................................... 3–26
Using Select All ...................................................................... 3–26
Using Multi Field..................................................................... 3–27
Daily Startup Procedure ............................................................... 3–28
Crucibles .................................................................................... 3–29
Logging in Replicates for Analysis.................................................. 3–31
Logging in a Blank.................................................................. 3–31
Logging in a Standard............................................................. 3–31
Logging in a Drift ................................................................... 3–32
Logging in a Sample ............................................................... 3–32
Logging in a Gas Dose ............................................................ 3–32
Logging in a Template ............................................................ 3–33
Splitting ................................................................................ 3–33
Merging ................................................................................ 3–33
Excluding or Deleting a Sample................................................ 3–33
Creating and Importing a Sample File ....................................... 3–34
Creating a Sample File to Import......................................... 3–34
Importing a Sample File ..................................................... 3–36
Performing Blanks ....................................................................... 3–37
Performing Calibrations................................................................ 3–38
Multiple Compositions with Similar Mass.................................... 3–38
Multiple Masses with Same Composition.................................... 3–39
Adding or Replacing Standards in a Method Calibration ............... 3–41

3–2 844 Series Analysis

 Calibration Definitions............................................................. 3–42
Gas Dose Standards ............................................................... 3–44
Calculating the Gas Dose Loop Volumes .................................... 3–45
Using Mixed Gases with the Gas Doser...................................... 3–47
Performing Drifts......................................................................... 3–49
Adding Standards for Drift....................................................... 3–50
Managing Drift Standards........................................................ 3–51
Recalculating .............................................................................. 3–52
Running an Analysis .................................................................... 3–53
Using Next ............................................................................ 3–53
Aborting an Analysis ............................................................... 3–53
Pausing and Restarting an Analysis........................................... 3–54
Deleting a Sample .................................................................. 3–54
Viewing Sample History .......................................................... 3–55
Working with Sample Filters ......................................................... 3–56
Filtering by Sample Type......................................................... 3–56
Filtering by Methods ............................................................... 3–57
Filtering by Date .................................................................... 3–58
Filtering by Excluded .............................................................. 3–58
Filtering by Description ........................................................... 3–58
Filtering by Comments ............................................................ 3–59
Filtering by Operator .............................................................. 3–59
Saving and Deleting a Filter..................................................... 3–60
Applying a Saved Filter ........................................................... 3–60

Analysis 844 Series 3–3

Illustrations

Figure 3-1 Software Overview Portrait Mode .......................................... 3–5

Figure 3-2 Software Overview Landscape Mode...................................... 3–7
Table 3-1 Column Definitions Table .................................................... 3–35
Figure 3-3 .csv File Created in Excel ................................................... 3–35
Figure 3-4 .csv File Created in Notepad............................................... 3–35

3–4 844 Series Analysis

Software Overview
After the Cornerstone® brand software has been started, the main
window will appear. The following section explains the items on the
main window.
Depending on your configuration, the following software overview
screen may not appear exactly as the screen on your instrument.
Some items called out in the following software overview screen are
available only on some configurations.
The software automatically detects whether the monitor is in portrait
or landscape mode and runs the software to fit. Figure 3-1, following,
shows a monitor in portrait mode. For a screenshot example of a
monitor in landscape mode, refer to Figure 3-2, page 3–7.

Figure 3-1
Software Overview Portrait Mode

Title Bar—Identifies the software.

Action Bar—Provides the means to quickly find and perform
specific tasks.
Horizontal Scroll Bar—Provides the means to scroll right and left
through columns when the number of columns defined in the display is
greater than can be shown on the screen.

Analysis 844 Series 3–5

 Expand/Collapse Arrow—Provides the means to expand or collapse
additional information associated with sets and reps.
Sets/Reps—Sets include the sample type, sample name, number of
replicates, description, and method. Reps include the mass,
comments, and sample results. In the software, check standards that
are out of range are indicated by orange text; saturated cell results
are indicated by blue text. Refer to Configuring the Display, page 4–5.
Vertical Scroll Bar—Provides the means to move up and down
through the list of sample sets/reps.
Message Bar—Displays messages to the user. Select to dismiss the
message.
Login Bar—Provides the means to log in blanks, standards, drifts,
samples, gas doses, and templates. Refer to Logging in Replicates for
Analysis, page 3–31.
Configure Plots—Provides the means to select the desired options
and configure the plot.
Minimize/Expand Plot—This tab, and the arrows on either side of
the screen, can be selected and dragged to minimize or expand the
plot.
Plot Layout Button—Changes whether the plots are stacked
vertically or horizontally. Available only when the instrument
configuration has two or more analytes.
Gauges—Display system status. Refer to Ambient, page 8–4.
Expand/Collapse Gauges—These icons can be selected to minimize,
hide, or expand the gauges. Refer to 3-State Gauge View, page 3–13.
Menu Bar and Navigation Buttons—Provides access to the main
areas of the software.
Utility Buttons—Provides the means to perform common tasks such
as leak check, turn On the gas and vacuum, raise or lower the
electrode, clean the electrode, and abort the process.
Status Bar—Displays instrument messages.
Guide/Help Buttons—Select Guide for a software demonstration;
select Help to access the most recent instruction manual.
Analyze Button—Initiates or continues analyses.

3–6 844 Series Analysis

 Figure 3-2
Software Overview Landscape Mode

Title Bar Items

Button Name Description
Information Provides instrument
information including version,
registration, and installed
options.
Session Accesses the Session menu.
Refer to Session Menu Items,
page 3–14.

Analysis 844 Series 3–7

 Task Center
The Task Center can be used to check the status of tasks that take
time to complete. The Task Center icon changes depending on whether
any tasks are currently in progress.

—No tasks in progress

—Tasks in progress

1. Open Task Center by selecting either icon from the right corner of
the title bar. The Task Center progress screen opens.

2. Complete the following actions as desired.

· Select Cancel to cancel the task.
· Select Clear Completed to remove completed tasks from the
Task Center.
· Select Close to close the Task Center progress screen.

3–8 844 Series Analysis

 Action Bar Items
Buttons are visible only on relevant screens.

Button Name Description

Add Select to add a new item.

Alerts the user when a rep is complete. Refer to

Assign Notify
Using Assign Notify, page 4–65.

Back Select to return to the previous screen.

Performs a manual database backup. Refer to

Backup
Backing Up the Database, page 5–22.

Blank Refer to Performing Blanks, page 3–37.

Calibrate Refer to Performing Calibrations, page 3–38.

Set check standards for quality control. Refer to

Check Check Standards, page 4–22. This feature is only
available with the QC option.

Validate the functionality of the detector. Refer to

Check Signals
Detectors, page 5–27.

Clone Refer to Cloning, page 3–24.

Collapse All Collapses all expanded items.

Copy the contents of the screen to a clipboard to

Copy
paste into another program.

Select to delete an item. An item must be excluded

Delete
before it can be deleted.

Analysis 844 Series 3–9

Button Name Description

Drift Refer to Performing Drifts, page 3–49.

Edit Select to edit an item.

Select to exclude an item. Refer to Including and

Exclude
Excluding, page 3–24.

Export Refer to Importing and Exporting, page 3–22.

Filter Refer to Working with Sample Filters, page 3–56.

Select History to view the history of changes to all

History items on the screen. Refer to History, page 5–25.
This feature is available only with the AT option.

Ignore Ignore an expired maintenance counter.

Import Refer to Importing and Exporting, page 3–22.

Select to include an item. Refer to Including and

Include
Excluding, page 3–24.

Resets only the Inspect portion of a maintenance

counter, allowing the user to indicate that the
component was checked but maintenance was
Inspect unnecessary and was not performed at that time.
This is most useful for components where a visual
inspection is adequate for determining its status,
such as reagents, crucible/boat buckets, and o-rings.

Select Lock to plot Digital Outputs or make fields

Lock
read-only.

Merges multiple sets into one. Refer to Merging,

Merge
page 3–33.

3–10 844 Series Analysis

Button Name Description

More Display more Action Bar buttons.

Select Multi-select mode to choose more than one

Multi
item at a time.

Select Multi Field to edit the same field on multiple

Multi Field
sets or replicates at the same time.

Select Next to change the order in which reps are

Next analyzed from the designated sequence. Refer to
Using Next, page 3–53.

Select Output to print, transport, copy, or export

Output from the Analysis screen. Refer to Printing Reports,
page 4–38.

Select Pause to halt the analysis sequence after the

Pause previous sample has completed analysis. Pause
cannot be used to stop an analysis in process.

Select Perform to reset both the inspect and stop

Perform aspects of a maintenance counter by acknowledging
the task has been performed.

Select to evaluate the setup of a report and

Preview
determine if the width of the fields are appropriate.

Print Select to print the contents currently on the screen.

Select to log in the necessary Quality Control steps.

Quality
Refer to Configuring Quality Control, page 4–17. This
Control
feature is available only with the QC option.

Recalculate Refer to Recalculating, page 3–52.

Reset Select to restore default value.

Analysis 844 Series 3–11

Button Name Description

Select to restore a database. Refer to Restoring the

Restore
Database, page 5–23.

Switches from multi-select mode to single item

Select
mode.

Selects all the fields on the current screen. On the

Select All
Analysis screen, all sample sets are selected.

Select to make a replicate into a new set. Refer to

Split
Splitting, page 3–33.

Style Refer to Editing Styles, page 4–11.

Allows the user to actuate digital outputs; makes

Unlock
read-only fields editable.

Utility Bar Items

Button Name Description

Perform a segmented leak check. Refer to Leak

Leak Check
Check, page 8–15.

Provides the means to turn On and Off or conserve

Gas the gas. The system is depressurized during the gas
Off sequence.

Vacuum Provides the means to turn the vacuum On or Off.

Pedestal Provides the means to raise and lower the pedestal.

3–12 844 Series Analysis

Button Name Description

Provides the means to clean the furnace and

Clean
electrode if using an auto cleaner.

Abort Provides the means to stop a process.

Ambient Gauges
The ambient gauges provide a quick status check on some of the most
critical system parameters.

Gauge Description Target

Grid Current

Plate Current

Upstream Refer to Ambient Parameter Refer to Ambient Monitor

Pressure Definitions, page 8–6. Ranges, page 8–8.
Downstream
Pressure
Back Pressure
Carrier Flow

3-State Gauge View

Button Description

Select to change to the small

gauge view.

Select to hide gauges.

Select to change to the full

gauge view.

Analysis 844 Series 3–13

 Plot Stack View
When more than one plot is displayed, select the Plot Layout button

to change whether the plots are stacked vertically or

horizontally .
The Plot Layout button is available only on instrument configurations
that analyze more than one analyte.

Session Menu Items

Button Name Description

Select to return to the previous

Back
screen.

Exit
Exit the software and set the gas
Conserve
to a low flow conserve mode.
Gas

Exit
Exit the software and turn Off
Conserve
the gas.
Gas

Select the language for the

Language
software.

Log out the current user. This

Log Out option is available only if user
permissions are enabled.

Log in with the currently selected

Login user. This option is only available
if user permissions are enabled.

Select to minimize the

Minimize Cornerstone brand software
screen.
Select the name of user for login.
This option is available only if
Username user permissions are enabled.
Refer to Working with User
Permissions, page 4–51.

3–14 844 Series Analysis

 General Software Items
The following items are only visible when using the QC option.
Icon Name Description

Displayed as green on the main Analysis screen when

QC Green Star
QC is enabled and in control.

Displayed on the main Analysis screen when QC is

QC Orange Caution
enabled and not in control.

Keyboard Shortcuts
Function key labels can be enabled or disabled from the Display
Settings screen of the software. Function keys are functional even
when the labels are not displayed in the software. Refer to Setting
Display Settings, page 4–5.

Key Name Description

F1 Leak Check Begins a leak check.
F2 Toggles to the next gas state. If the gas is On, it will
Gas change to Conserve. From Conserve, the gas will
turn Off. If the gas is Off, it will turn On.
F3 Vacuum Turns the vacuum On or Off.
F4 Guide Opens the Guide screen.
F5 Analyze Begins analysis.
F6 Help Opens the instruction manual.
F7 Pedestal Raises or lowers the pedestal.
F8 Clean Provides the means to clean the furnace.
F9 Abort Stops the current process.

Analysis 844 Series 3–15

Performing Common Software Tasks

Starting the Software

1. Double-click the instrument software desktop icon to

start the software.
2. At the onscreen prompt, select the desired startup.
· To start the software using the default database, select
Default Startup, and then continue with step 4, page 3–17.
· To choose a different database, select Startup Options, and
then continue with step 3, following.
If nothing is selected within 10 seconds, the default database
automatically loads.

3–16 844 Series Analysis

 3. Select the desired startup location by completing one of the
following options.
· To use the default startup location:
A. Select No next to Use Custom Location.
B. Select the box next to Startup Database and choose the
desired database.
C. Select OK.
· To choose a different startup location:
A. Select Yes next to Use Custom Location.
B. Select the box next to Location and choose the desired file
location.
C. Select Accept, and then select OK.
The selected database will now be considered the Default Startup
database the next time the software is started..
4. The software opens. If User Security is enabled, the Session
menu appears.
· The Session menu is accessible at any time by selecting the

Session button on the Title bar.

· The following screenshot example shows options that may not be
applicable to all instrument configurations.

Analysis 844 Series 3–17

 Selecting a Language
The Select Language feature allows the operator to localize the
Cornerstone brand software for a specific language. The available
language choices appear on the screen. Although the software is
localized for a specific language, the built-in manual and help files will
remain in English.
1. Select the Session bar.

2. Select the Language field.

3. Select the language desired.

4. Select Enter. The software will convert to the selected language.

3–18 844 Series Analysis

 Logging In
This section applies only if User Permissions are enabled. For more
information on setting up user accounts, refer to Working with User
Permissions, page 4–51.

1. If the desired user is already selected, select Login , and

enter a password if necessary. Once the login is successful, the
following steps do not apply.
2. To log in with a different user, select the Username field
3. Select the desired user, and then select enter.

4. Enter a password if necessary..

Exiting the Software

To exit the Cornerstone brand software, select the Session button on
the Title bar. Select the desired option:
· If no software sequences are running, then select Exit-Gas Off

or Exit Gas Conserve to determine the gas state

when the software is closed.
· If a software sequence is running, Abort appears. Wait for the

running process to end, or select Abort to end the current

process. Then, select the desired Exit as described previously.

CAUTION
Aborting some sequences can leave the instrument in an
unsafe state.

· Select Back to return to the Analysis screen.

Analysis 844 Series 3–19

 Homing the Shuttle Loader
On certain instrument configurations, a screen appears when the
software starts prompting the user to home the shuttle loader. For
more information, refer to Homing the Shuttle Loader, page 5–6

Configuring the Plot

To configure a plot, select the Plot button . An option box to

configure the plot appears. Clear the option box by touching the
screen anywhere outside the box.

Single-Touch Display Multi-Touch Display

The option box to configure the plot will vary depending on the type
of display and the instrument configuration.
· Select Curve to change the plot to a signal curve.
· Select Advanced to plot the signal curve with extra information,
such as y-axis values or furnace behavior. To view x- and y-axis
coordinates, select and hold on a trace. Refer to Configuring the
Display, page 4–5.
· Select Scatter and the results will appear as a scatter plot. Scatter
mode requires a minimum of two replicates to be displayed.
· To Zoom and magnify the plot, use one of the following methods.
o On single-touch displays: Select Zoom. Select and hold a
corner of the area of interest, and then slowly drag diagonally
toward the opposite corner of the area.

3–20 844 Series Analysis

 o On multi-touch displays:
§ Select Zoom. With a single finger, touch and hold a corner
of the area of interest, and then slowly drag diagonally
toward the opposite corner of the area.
§ Select Multi-Touch. Touch the plot with two fingers and drag
apart to zoom in, or pinch together to zoom out. Either axis
can be zoomed, but not simultaneously. The axis that the
user’s fingers more closely align with determines which axis
zooms. The same axis is affected until the fingers are
removed from the screen.
o On all displays: Select Zoom or Multi-Touch, if available.
Rotate the mouse wheel forward to zoom in or backward to
zoom out. Both axes scale. To scale only one axis, hold the Alt
key to scale the x-axis, or hold Shift to scale the y-axis.

· Once the plot is zoomed as described in Zoom, previous, use one

of the following methods to Pan the plot left to right or up to
down.
o On single-touch displays: Select Pan to move the plot left to
right or up to down using the mouse cursor.
o On multi-touch displays: Touch the plot with one finger and
drag or flick to move the plot as desired.
· Select Restore to restore the plot to its default view.

· Select the button to minimize the plot. To restore the

plot, select the analyte button.

· Select the button to minimize all analyte plots except the

current one. Select the button again to show all plots.

· Select Advanced and then select the button to show or

hide the different areas of signal such as baseline, integration, and
endline. The button appears only when a single replicate is
selected.

Analysis 844 Series 3–21

 Configuring the Calculations Plots
The calculations (calibration, drift, and blank) plots have additional
settings that can be configured by the user.

· Select All to see the entire plot.

· Select Included to focus on the data points included in the current
calculation.
· Select the desired plot type from the dropdown menu. Plot Type is
available only within calibrations. The Plot Type Options are
Adjusted Area, Absolute Error, and Relative Area. When changing
the plot type, the displayed replicate data changes to match the
plot.

Importing and Exporting

All data imports use the method described in this section, except for
sample files. For information on importing sample files, refer to
Creating and Importing a Sample File, page 3–34.

Importing
Import allows the user to restore exported data to the Cornerstone
brand software.

1. Select Import . The file browser opens.

2. Navigate to the location of the file to import using the file
browser, and then select Accept.
3. Select the file(s) to import, and then select Import.
4. The software displays a message under the Import action button
with the name(s) of the file(s) being imported and the path
name(s).
5. Select Save to complete the import process.

3–22 844 Series Analysis

 Exporting
Export allows the user to save information from the Cornerstone brand
software to an outside location.
1. Select the information to be exported.

2. Select Export . The file browser opens.

3. Navigate to the location to export the file using the file browser.
Use the Add, Rename, and Delete buttons to modify folders on
the computer.
4. Select Accept to confirm the location.
5. The software displays a message under the Export action button
with the name(s) of the file(s) being exported and the path
name(s).

Copy Output
1. From the Analysis screen, select the set(s) to copy.

2. Select Output on the Action bar.

3. Select the Copy tab.

4. Select Copy to copy the set(s) information to the system

clipboard.
Or
Select Close to close the Copy tab.

Export Output
1. From the Analysis screen, select the set(s) to export.

2. Select Output on the Action bar.

3. Select the Export tab, and then select the data type to be
exported. The following example uses Plot Data.

Analysis 844 Series 3–23

 4. Select one of the following options as desired.
· Export—Used to export the selected data. Continue with
step 5, following.
· Close—Closes the Export tab.
5. If Export was chosen in step 4, previous, a file browser opens.
Navigate to the location to export the information using the file
browser. Use the Add, Rename, and Delete buttons to modify
folders on the computer. Select Accept to continue, or select
Close to cancel the export.
6. If Accept was chosen in step 5, previous, complete the
appropriate steps as follows.
Plot Data:
· A file named “Plots.csv” is created in the selected location.
The export is complete.
Sample Data:
· A zipped folder containing the sample data is created in the
selected location. The export is complete.
Sample Data with Instrument Report:
A. A zipped folder containing the sample data is created in the
selected location.
B. An additional file browser opens. Navigate to the location to
save the Instrument Report PDF.
C. Enter a file name for the PDF in the File Name field, and then
select Save.

Including and Excluding

When an item is included, it can then be used for other tasks in the
software – such as in the login, blank, calibration, and drifting
processes – and it is used to determine results on the analysis page.
When an item is excluded, it remains in the database but is not
available for use in other tasks. When a counter is excluded, it is no
longer part of the instrument maintenance process.
Excluded items are marked with an "X." On the Analysis screen, sets
that contain some excluded replicates are marked with a "/," and sets
that contain all excluded replicates are marked with an "X.”

Cloning
1. Select the information to be cloned.

2. Select Clone . The cloned item appears in the list as “Name

of Item Copy.”

3–24 844 Series Analysis

 Customizing Analyze Button with Logo
The following procedure explains how to personalize the software’s
Analyze button with a company logo.
1. Shut down the Cornerstone brand software.
2. Name or rename the image file “CustomLogo.png.” or
“CustomLogo.jpg.” The file must be a .png or .jpg image to work
properly.
3. Place the custom logo .png or .jpg file here:
C:\ProgramData\LECO\CustomLogo.png
Or
C:\ProgramData\LECO\CustomLogo.jpg
The file name must match exactly.
4. Restart the Cornerstone brand software.

Using the Guide

The guide contains videos detailing the performance of some
necessary maintenance procedures.

1. Select Guide from the Utility bar.

2. Choose a video, and then select Play.
· Use the slide bar to move to a desired portion of the video.
· Select Pause at any time to stop the video.

Using Help

Select Help from the Utility bar to open the instruction

manual. The onboard manual is updated with every software upgrade
and may differ from the hard copy received with the instrument.
If more than one instruction manual is associated with an instrument,
complete the following steps to select the desired manual.

1. Select Help from the Utility bar.

2. Select Document.

3. A keyboard appears, displaying the list of available manuals.

Select the desired manual, and then select Enter.

Analysis 844 Series 3–25

 Navigating within the Manual

· Use the outline to select a specific section of the manual. Select the
arrows to expand or collapse sections with subheadings.

· Select Increase Zoom and Decrease Zoom to change the

magnification level.
· Use the Previous Page, Previous Chapter, Next Page, and Next
Chapter buttons to move between pages and chapters without
scrolling.
· Select Back or Forward to navigate to previously selected sections
of the manual.

Searching the Manual

1. Select the search field next to the Find button.

2. Enter the desired search term.

3. Select Find to locate additional instances of the term within the
manual.

Printing Pages from the Manual

1. Enter the range of pages to be printed in the From

and To fields.
Select a desired section of the manual from the outline, and the From
and To fields automatically populate with the correct page range for
that section.
2. Select Print.

Using Select All

Select All is a feature available on the Action bar that will

select all the fields available on the current screen. Using Select All in
conjunction with filters is convenient for selecting sets for reports and
transports.
After Select All is used, the Select button deselects everything except
one highlighted item.

3–26 844 Series Analysis

 Using Multi Field

Multi Field is a feature available on the Action bar that will edit
fields from multiple sets or replicates at once if the same edit is
desired. For example, the same description can be added to multiple
sets.

1. Select Multi Field .

2. Edit the desired fields by completing one of the following
methods.
· Select one of the fields to be edited. A keyboard appears.
Select the same field in each of the other sets or replicates to
be edited. Enter the desired information, and then select
Enter.
· Select one of the fields to be edited. A keyboard appears.
Enter the desired information, and then select the same field
in each of the other sets or replicates to be edited. When all
of the desired sets or replicates have been edited, select
Enter.

Analysis 844 Series 3–27

Daily Startup Procedure

The following section explains tasks that should be completed on a

daily basis.
1. Check the air filters for excess dirt. Refer to Performing Air Filter
Maintenance, page 6–55.
The following step does not apply to all instrument configurations.

2. Check the flow scrubber and replace when the Anhydrone has
caked. Refer to Replacing the Flow Scrubber Tube, page 6–21.
3. Check the particle filter and replace when the filter has darkened
significantly. Refer to Replacing the Particle Filter, page 6–27.
4. Inspect the incoming scrubber and replace when the Anhydrone
has caked or when the LECOSORB® has turned color. Refer to
Replacing the Incoming Scrubber Tube, page 6–9.
5. Check the cellulose trap and replace when 1-inch of the cellulose
has turned black or if the cellulose has turned brown. Refer to
Replacing the Cellulose Trap Tube, page 6–19.

6. Check Counters to ensure that no other maintenance items will

expire during the planned set of analyses. Refer to Counters,
page 5–30.
7. Perform the regular maintenance on the auto cleaner or manual
cleaner. Refer to Maintaining the Auto Cleaner, page 6–28, or
Maintaining the Manual Cleaner, page 6–32.
8. Check the dust filter and replace when it is visibly dirty. Refer to
Maintaining the Dust Filter, page 6–35.
9. Check the combustion tube and replace when there is excessive
buildup on the walls or if cracks have developed. Grease all
combustion tube o-rings. Refer to Maintaining the Combustion
Tube, page 6–33, and Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings,
page 6–8.
10. Check the vacuum filters and manifold. Replace filters when full
and wipe manifold to remove excess dust. Refer to Maintaining
the Vacuum Cleaner, page 6–48.
11. Check the crucible bucket, and empty it if necessary.
12. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
13. Turn On the gas and verify that “Ready to Analyze” appears in the
status bar.
14. If QC is enabled, perform necessary blanks, checks and/or
calibration in order to be in control. Refer to Configuring Quality
Control, page 4–17.

3–28 844 Series Analysis

Crucibles

When analyzing low carbon (<0.1%) samples, pre-baking the crucibles

is necessary to achieve the best results. The crucibles are “burned off”
by firing them at 1350 °C (2500 °F) for at least 20 minutes in a TF4 or
TF10 LECO Tube Furnace. Loading and unloading the crucibles into the
tube furnace is crucial to ensuring they are sufficiently prepared for
low-composition analyses.
Prior to loading the crucibles, verify that the tube furnace is regulated
at 1350 °C.
The following steps describe how to prepare crucibles using one side of
the tube furnace. The same procedure can be repeated with additional
tube(s), if applicable.
1. From the back of the tube furnace, feed 12 crucibles, positioned
on their side, into the furnace. After the 12th crucible has been
loaded, push it further into the furnace with a device such as the
LECO Boat Puller until a gap of approximately 5 inches is left
between the back of the 12th crucible and the end of the ceramic
tube. This gap will ensure that the first set of six crucibles are
positioned in the 1350 °C “hot zone” of the furnace.
2. After the crucibles have baked for at least 20 minutes, insert
another six crucibles into the back of the furnace. Again, leave
approximately a 5-inch gap after the last crucible is inserted. The
new crucibles will push the first set of six crucibles into a cooler
portion of the furnace and the middle set of six crucibles into the
“hot zone” of the furnace. A total of 18 crucibles should now be
loaded in the furnace.
3. Wait at least another 20 minutes for the first set of six crucibles
to cool and the middle set of six to bake. Remove the first set of
six crucibles from the furnace and place them on a heat-resistant
surface.

HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING

Though the removed crucibles have been “cooling” in a cooler
portion of the tube furnace, they are still hot (up to 600 °C).
Do not touch the crucibles with bare hands. Use only crucible
tongs to transfer the crucibles. The last two crucibles removed
from the furnace may still be too hot to place directly on a
crucible tray. They can be allowed to cool in the front of the
furnace for approximately 60 to 90 seconds prior to removal.

4. Transfer the crucibles to a desiccator for storage if they will not

be immediately used.

Analysis 844 Series 3–29

 5. Repeat this process of loading and unloading sets of six crucibles
as needed to ensure the crucibles are sufficiently pre-baked and
subsequently cooled.

CAUTION
Do not touch the crucibles with bare hands after they have
been pre-baked in the tube furnace, even when they are cool.
Natural oils from your hands will contaminate the clean
crucibles.

If the pre-baked crucibles are not used within 4 hours of being

removed from the tube furnace, they must be pre-baked again.

3–30 844 Series Analysis

Logging in Replicates for Analysis
To analyze a replicate, sample information is logged in using the
software. The following section explains how to log in Blanks,
Standards, Drifts, Samples, Gas Doses, and Templates for analysis.
Before a replicate is analyzed, the sample type and information
associated with it must be entered. A sample set is entered with “n”
user defined replicates. A sample set consists of the sample name,
sample number of replicates, description, method, and average
results. Sample replicates consist of the mass, comments, and sample
results.
Sample masses can be logged in from the keyboard or balance.

Logging in a Blank
1. Enter the number of replicates for the blank set by adjusting the

+ or – buttons on the Login bar.

2. Select Blank on the Login bar.

All blanks automatically have a mass determined by the Nominal
Mass field set in the Method. This value can be edited only from the
Method Edit screen. Refer to Creating and Editing Methods,
page 4–13.
3. Select Method, and then select a method name from the list.

Logging in a Standard
1. Enter the number of replicates for the sample adjusting the + or

– buttons on the Login bar.

2. Select Standard on the Login bar.

3. Select a standard from the list, and then select Enter. The
standard list displays only included standards from the
Settings/Standards screen. Refer to Creating and Editing
Standards, page 4–39.
4. For each rep, enter the mass of the standard, select Default: [X],
select Read Mass from Balance, or press the Print button on the
balance, and then select Enter.
5. Select Method, and then select the desired method name from
the list.

Analysis 844 Series 3–31

 Logging in a Drift
A replicate with a Sample Mass outside 10% or 1 mg, whichever is
greater, of the average sample mass used at calibration cannot be
used to drift a method.
1. Enter the number of replicates for the sample by adjusting the +

or – buttons on the Login bar.

2. Select Drift on the Login bar.

3. If the current method has a drift standard selected in the
calibration, select a drift standard from the list, and then select
Enter. The drift standard list displays only included drift
standards.
If the current method does not have a drift standard, one must
be added. Refer to Adding Standards for Drift, page 3–50.
4. For each rep, enter the mass of the standard, select Default: [X],
select Read Mass from Balance, or press the Print button on the
balance, and then select Enter.

Logging in a Sample
1. Enter the number of replicates for the sample by adjusting the +

or – buttons on the Login bar.

2. Select Sample .
3. Enter a name for the sample.
4. For each rep, enter the mass of the standard, select Default: [X],
select Read Mass from Balance, or press the Print button on the
balance, and then select Enter.
5. Select Method, and then select a method name from the list.

Logging in a Gas Dose

The gas doser is not available on all models.

1. Enter the number of replicates for the sample by adjusting the +

or – buttons on the Login bar.

2. Select Gas Dose .

3. Select the gas dose standard to use in the analysis, and then
select Enter. All gas doses automatically have a mass determined
by the Nominal Mass field set in the Method. This value can be
edited only from the Method Edit screen. Refer to Creating and
Editing Standards, page 4–39.
4. Select Method, and then select a method name from the list.

3–32 844 Series Analysis

 Logging in a Template
Sample templates are a quick way of logging in multiple sample sets of
various sample types that comprise a routine analysis pattern (for
example: running five blanks, two check standards, and three normal
unknown samples each day). For more information on templates, refer
to Creating and Editing Templates, page 4–41, and Using Sample
Templates, page 4–42.

Splitting
A replicate can be split off from a set and made into a new set of its
own. The Name, Method, Comments, and Description fields will be
copied into the new set. The comments associated with each sample
replicate will be retained.
1. Select the replicate(s) to be split.

2. Select Split from the Action bar on the Analysis screen.

Merging
To merge two or more sets into one, the Name and Method must
match. The Description and Comment fields do not have to match.
When sets are merged, sample replicate comments are retained. The
merged sample sets will have the same description as is associated
with the first sample set.
1. Select the sets to be merged.

2. Select Merge from the Action bar on the Analysis screen.

Excluding or Deleting a Sample

A sample can be excluded from the set result or permanently deleted
from the software.
A standard sample that is referenced by a calibration cannot be
deleted.
1. Select the sample set or sample rep to exclude or delete.

2. Select Exclude . Once a rep has been excluded, its results

will not be used in the set results or when setting a blank, drift,
or calibration.

Analysis 844 Series 3–33

 3. To permanently delete a sample, select the sample again and

select Delete .
Any unanalyzed sample with a mass, except for blanks, must be
excluded before it can be deleted.

Creating and Importing a Sample File

Sample Import allows the user to import sample files (in .csv format)
into the Cornerstone brand software to analyze. To transmit the
results back to the .csv file, refer to Data Transmit, page 5–35.

Creating a Sample File to Import

A .csv (comma separated value) file containing all of the sample
information can be created in any text editor. Refer to Table 3-1,
following, for the description and valid values for each column in
the file.
Column Description Valid Values
A Set ID Any text value. Rows with matching Set ID
values will be grouped as replicates in a
single set.
B Sample Type “Blank,” “Standard,” “Drift,” “Sample,” or
“GasDose”
C Name For Standard, Drift, or GasDose sample
types, this value must be the name of the
Cornerstone-defined standard. For all
other samples types, any text value. If
multiple Standard names are listed under
the same Set ID value, only the first value
will be applied to the set.
D Method Name Name of Cornerstone-defined method. If
multiple Method names are listed for the
same Set ID value, only the first value will
be applied to the set.
E Description Any text value. Optional. If multiple
Description values are listed for the same
Set ID value, only the first value will be
applied to the set.
F Replicate ID Any text value. Optional.
G Mass Valid double value specified with invariant
culture (“.” as the decimal separator). This
value will not be used for Blank or Gas
Dose sample types.
H Comments Any text value. Optional. This is applied at
the Replicate level.

3–34 844 Series Analysis

 Column Description Valid Values
I Operator Any text value. Optional.
J Auto Loader Any valid loader location (for example: for
Location a CS instrument with a 60-place shuttle
loader: A1-A10, B1-B10,…F1-F10
Table 3-1
Column Definitions Table

1. To create a .csv file in a text editor or in Microsoft® Excel®, enter

each sample as a separate line with the following fields (as
described in Table 3-1, previous): Set ID,Sample
Type,Name,Method Name,Description,Replicate
ID,Mass,Comments,Operator,Auto Loader Location.
To import multiple reps into the same set, give the reps the same Set
ID value (column 1).
2. The fields must be delimited by commas in a text editor or by
tabs in Excel. Refer to Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4, following, for
examples of the same sample information entered into Excel and
Notepad.
The following screenshot illustrations are examples only and may not
be the same on all instrument configurations.

Figure 3-3
.csv File Created in Excel

Figure 3-4
.csv File Created in Notepad

3. To skip over fields (for example, optional fields such as

Description, Replicate ID, Comments, or Operator), you will need
to put in delimiters (commas in a text editor or tabs in Excel) as
placeholders to indicate which fields should be filled in.
4. Save the file with a .csv file extension.

Analysis 844 Series 3–35

 Importing a Sample File

1. From the Analysis screen, select Import . The file browser

opens.
2. Navigate to the location of the file to import using the file
browser.
3. Select the file to import, and then select Accept. The samples log
in beneath the existing samples.

3–36 844 Series Analysis

Performing Blanks

Blanks are used to calculate the system blank or baseline, sometimes

called a blank area. The system blank determines the system response
without a sample present. A blank correction compensates for the
system blank when calculating the analysis result. The system blank
should be determined every day by performing a blank correction
before analyzing unknown samples.
1. Log in and perform at least three blank analyses. Refer to Logging
in a Blank, page 3–31.
2. Select the set of the blank replicates in the software.

3. Select Blank on the Action bar.

4. To review individual blank values, select the tab for the analyte

range, and then select Edit .

5. To exclude results, select the tab for the analyte range, and then
select the set of reps or a single rep.

6. Select Exclude .
7. Select Save to save changes.

Analysis 844 Series 3–37

Performing Calibrations

Calibration is the process that adjusts the instrument response to

produce an analysis result that is equal to that of a known calibration
standard.
Because a generic calibration for typical samples was performed during
manufacturing, it may be necessary to create a calibration that
corresponds to the samples that will be analyzed and the methods that
will be used. When it is necessary to create a calibration, the following
section explains how to calibrate in two ways: one, using standards
with similar weights, but multiple compositions; and two, using
standards with the same composition, but multiple weights.
Calibrations are stored per method: one method’s calibration is not
valid on samples run under other methods.

Multiple Compositions with Similar Mass

1. Develop a method for calibration that is suitable for the
calibration sample. Refer to Creating and Editing Methods,
page 4–13.
2. Perform two analyses on the highest composition standard samples
as a conditioner. Refer to Running an Analysis, page 3–53.
3. Run conditioners, blanks, and then set the blank.
4. Log in three to five Standards of varying compositions to use for
calibration. Refer to Creating and Editing Standards, page 4–39.
5. Perform analysis using all the standards selected. The analysis
should be performed for each analyte if there is more than one
analyte. Analyze at least three samples per composition. Start with
the lowest composition and end with the highest composition. Refer
to Running an Analysis, page 3–53.
6. With the calibration results displayed, select the set results for
calibration. All the results analyzed for calibration should be

selected. To set a calibration, select Calibrate .

7. At this point, the user has the choice of selecting Save to set all
calibrations without further review.
8. To review individual calibrations, select the analyte range, and

then select Edit .

To expand the plot, select the tab and drag it down.

3–38 844 Series Analysis

 9. To view relative and absolute error plots or display only included
replicates, change the plot type. Refer to Configuring the
Calculations Plots, page 3–22.
10. In the Existing Calibration box, select Show to display the current
calibration, or select Hide and the plot will not appear.
11. In the New Calibration box, for Regression Type, select Full
Regression. If there is not enough data for a full regression, the
calibration will default to a force through origin calibration.
12. The samples analyzed for calibration and then selected will be
listed. Look at the calculated values of each set, the relative
error, and the points plotted on the graph.
13. Use the RMS Error as a guide when deciding which replicate
results to include or exclude from the calibration. The Root Mean
Square (RMS) Error decreases when the plotted points are closer
to the calibration line. To exclude or include a result, select the

signal on the plot, and then select Exclude or

Include .

Refer to Calibration Definitions, page 3–42, for descriptions of the

information displayed.
14. Repeat the procedure for each range tab.
15. Select Save to save the calibration.

Multiple Masses with Same Composition

This approach assumes that the response of the instrument is zero

when the analyte composition is less than detectable; therefore,
calibrations created with this approach are not as robust as
calibrations with multiple compositions with similar mass.

1. Develop a method for calibration that is suitable for the

calibration sample. Refer to Creating and Editing Methods,
page 4–13.
2. Perform two analyses as a conditioner. Refer to Running an
Analysis, page 3–53.
3. Run blanks, and then set the blank.
4. Perform three to five analyses.

If the same standard is run at different masses, each mass group

should be logged in as a different set.

Analysis 844 Series 3–39

 5. With the calibration results displayed, select the results for
calibration. All the results analyzed for calibration should be
selected except for the first two conditioning results. To set a

calibration, select Calibrate .

6. At this point, the user has the choice of selecting Save to set all
calibrations without further review.
7. To review individual calibrations, select the analyte, and then

select Edit .

To expand the plot, select the tab and drag it down.

8. To view relative and absolute error plots or display only included
replicates, change the plot type. Refer to Configuring the
Calculations Plots, page 3–22.
9. In the Existing Calibration box, select Show to display the current
calibration or select Hide and the plot will not appear.
10. In the New Calibration box, for Regression Type, select Forced
through Origin.
11. The samples analyzed for calibration and then selected will be
listed. Review the calculated values of each set, the relative error,
and the points plotted on the graph.
12. Use the RMS Error as a guide when deciding which replicate
results to include or exclude from the calibration. The Root Mean
Square (RMS) Error decreases when the plotted points are closer
to the calibration line. To exclude or include a result, select the

signal on the plot, and then select Exclude or

Include .

Refer to Calibration Definitions, page 3–42, for descriptions of the

information displayed.
13. Repeat the procedure for each range tab.
14. Select Save to save the calibration.

3–40 844 Series Analysis

 Adding or Replacing Standards in a Method Calibration
Complete the following steps to add or replace standards in an existing
method calibration.
Refer to Calibration Definitions, page 3–42, for descriptions of the
information displayed.

The default option when entering a calibration is “Don't Use” for

Existing Standards and “Use” for New Standards. Therefore, when a
standard is added to a single analyte, the other analytes will need to
be set to “Use” for Existing Standards and “Don't Use” for New
Standards. When saving a calibration, the existing and new standards
will be recalculated using the current method blank.
1. From the Analysis screen, select the set(s) needed to add to or
modify the existing calibration.

2. Select Calibrate .
3. Select the tab for the desired analyte.
4. Choose one of the following options as desired.
· To replace the existing calibration with a new
calibration: Select Don’t Use next to Existing Standards and
Use next to New Standards.
· To keep the existing calibration without adding any
new sets: Select Use next to Existing Standards and Don’t
Use next to New Standards.
· To add new sets to the existing calibration: Select Use
next to both Existing Standards and New Standards.
5. Sets and replicates can be included or excluded as desired. Select
the set or replicate, and then select Include or Exclude on the
Action bar. Refer to Including and Excluding, page 3–24.
6. To change the regression type and regression order complete the
following steps.
A. Select Edit. The Editing screen appears.
B. Under New Calibration, select the Regression Type drop-
down arrow, and then select the desired regression type.
C. Select Close to close the Editing screen.
7. Select Save to save changes.

Analysis 844 Series 3–41

 Calibration Definitions

The following section explains the parameters displayed on the

Calibration screen. The information displayed is helpful when reviewing
the calibration results.
Drift—Select Yes to use the standard to drift this calibration. The
default is No. Drift standards can also be set by completing the steps
in Managing Drift Standards, page 3–51.
Certified Composition—The certified composition of the standard for
each set. The value and the units displayed are the same as those
entered for that standard on the Standards screen.
Calculated Composition—The composition of the standard as
determined by the calibration equation. The units displayed here are
the same as those entered on the Standards screen. At the set level,
the Calculated Composition shown is the average result for the
underlying included replicate measurements. Excluded replicates are
not included when determining the average value. (Refer to
Calculation of Analysis Results, page 7–6, for more information.)
Error—The difference between the average Calculated Composition
and the Certified Composition for each set. The units displayed are the
same as those entered on the Standards screen.
Analysis Date—The date and time when a replicate analysis began.
At the set level, the value shown is the date and time when the last
replicate began.
Sample Mass (g)—The sample mass entered by the user when the
sample was weighed for analysis.
Certified Mass (g)—The absolute amount of analyte expected in the
sample as determined by the Sample Mass and the Certified
Composition.
Calculated Mass (g)—The absolute amount of analyte present in the
sample as determined by the calibration equation. (Refer to
Calculation of Analysis Results, page 7–6, for more information.)
Adjusted Area—The peak area after the Sensitivity Factor and Blank
Correction have been applied. The value displayed here can be
changed to Adjusted Area, Absolute Error (g), or Relative Error (%) by
selecting the corresponding value for Plot Type via the Plot

button . (Refer to Calculation of Analysis Results, page 7–6, for

more information.)

3–42 844 Series Analysis

 Peak Height—The maximum height of the measured peak. For dual-
range instruments, the Peak Height is used to determine which range
is used to report the result for that analyte. The final result is a
function of the low and high threshold values as configured in the
Method settings. (Refer to Calculation of Analysis Results, page 7–6,
for more information.)
Weighting—Allows the user to enter a custom factor used to adjust
the relative importance of individual replicates when the calibration
coefficients are determined. The greater the value, the more
significant the replicate when determining the calibration coefficients.
By default, the value is 1.0. (Refer to Calculation of Analysis Results,
page 7–6, for more information.)

Analysis 844 Series 3–43

 Gas Dose Standards
The gas doser is available only on the following models: CS844 and
C844.
The gas dose loops are calibrated prior to shipment, and the values
are stored in the software. Calibration of the gas dose system is
completed by using known calibration standards. Independent
calibration of the gas dose system can be completed on site as
necessary. On site calibration of the gas dose system is required if
custom gas mixtures are used as dose gases. The following procedure
outlines how to calibrate the gas dose system.

CAUTION/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE
GLOVES
Carbon dioxide is a gas under pressure. It can become volatile
when subjected to heat or high temperatures. It is an
asphyxiant and may displace the oxygen in the room.
Protective gloves and eyewear should be worn at all times
when handling this material.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

1. Attach the gas dose lines on the instrument. Pressurize the dose
gas regulator to 20 psi.
2. In order to purge air from the dose gas lines:
A. Select Diagnostics, and then select Digital I/O.
B. Activate the dose pneumatic valve that corresponds with the
attached lines.
C. Activate the gas dose that corresponds with the
attached lines.
D. Allow the lines to purge for at least 2 minutes.
E. Deactivate the gas dose that corresponds with the
attached lines.
F. Deactivate the dose pneumatic valve that corresponds with
the attached lines.
3. In the software, select Settings, and then select Standards.

4. Select Add to create a new gas dose standard.

5. Enter a name for the new standard.
6. Select the Gas Dose being used, but leave the remaining fields
empty.
· Gas Dose A
· Gas Dose B
· Gas Dose AB (use with T fitting)
7. Select Save.

3–44 844 Series Analysis

 8. Perform an instrument calibration.
9. Run a gas dose using the same method used for the calibration
standard.
10. Enter the composition value returned in step 9 in the gas dose
standard created in step 4 for Certified value.
11. Enter the standard deviation value returned in step 9 in the gas
dose standard created in step 4 for the uncertainty value. This
gas dose can now be used as a calibration standard.
12. Repeat procedure for other analyte ranges as necessary for the
application.

Calculating the Gas Dose Loop Volumes

The Gas Doser is available only on the following models: CS844 and
C844.
Gas dose loop volumes can be determined by performing a series of gas
doses using pure gases on a calibrated instrument. The analyte results, given
in % or ppm, are used to back calculate the dose loop volume through the
following equations.
1. Convert Analyte Element Composition ( ) to grams of Analyte Element
( ):

, or

2. Convert to moles of Analyte Element ( ):

3. Convert to moles of Dose Gas ( ):

where is the number of moles of dose gas per mole of analyte element.
For example, 1 mol of CO2 contains 2 moles of O2 and 1 mol of C.

4. Calculate the gas dose loop volume ( ):

For the previous equations, is the molecular weight of the analyte

element ( , , , and

), is the gas constant ( ), is the dose

loop temperature in Kelvin which is held constant ( ), and is the gas
pressure in atm which should always be because all gas dose results
are corrected to this pressure.

Analysis 844 Series 3–45

 Example 1.
Ten CO2 gas doses were performed using Gas Dose A and an average Carbon
result of 0.0130 % was obtained.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Example 2.
Ten CO2 gas doses were performed using Gas Dose B and an average Oxygen
result of 410 ppm was obtained.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3–46 844 Series Analysis

 Using Mixed Gases with the Gas Doser
· The Gas Doser is available only on the following models: CS844
and C844.
· The gases used in this section are examples only and may not be
applicable to all models.
It is possible to use a gas mixture as the dose gas. For example, CO2 and/or
SO2 intermixed in a cylinder of Nitrogen can be used to achieve various
levels of C or S composition. In the case of a mixed gas, it is necessary to
use the gas dose loop volume to calculate the expected analyte element
(AE) composition. Given that the pressure, temperature, and volume of the
gas doses can be thought of as constants because the temperature is
controlled and the pressure is corrected to 1 atmosphere, the number of
moles of analyte gas is determined using the ideal gas law ( ). This
value is then adjusted to reflect the composition of the analyte gas in the
mixed gas cylinder. After doing so, the expected composition is determined
by converting the adjusted moles of analyte gas to moles of analyte
element. This result can then be converted to grams of analyte element
using the molecular weight of the analyte element ( ,

, , and ) and then to

percent by multiplying by 100.
See the following for equations and examples.
1. Determine the total number of moles of gas in the gas loop ( ):

, where
2. Calculate the molar fraction (MF) of Analyte Gas in the Cylinder:

or

3. Calculate moles of analyte gas in the gas dose loop:

4. Convert to moles of analyte element ( ):

5. Convert to :

6. Convert to :

7. Convert to :

Analysis 844 Series 3–47

 Example 1.
A mixed gas cylinder of 1% SO2 in Nitrogen is connected to the gas doser
and used for gas dosing. The expected Sulfur composition in % is calculated
as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Example 2.
A mixed gas cylinder of 1000 ppm CO2 in Argon is connected to the gas doser
and used for gas dosing. The expected Oxygen composition in % and ppm is
calculated as follows:

1. l

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

3–48 844 Series Analysis

Performing Drifts
Drifts should be performed when the check standards are outside
established limits. Drift correction adjusts the original calibration
response to match the current instrument response and ensures
accurate analysis results.
Drift standards are included in the original calibration by selecting Yes
in the Drift column of the Calibration table for the specific standard
that will be used to drift.
To add a standard as a drift standard after the original calibration has
been established, refer to Adding Standards for Drift, following.
For each Sample Set, the Sample Mass of each included replicate
must be within 10% or 1 mg, whichever is greater, of the average
sample mass for that set in order to be used as a drift standard.

1. OPTIONAL: If necessary, run conditioners.

2. Run blanks, and then set the blank.
3. Log in and perform at least three analyses with the drift
standards that have been selected in the Calibration table. Refer
to Running an Analysis, page 3–53.

4. Select the set of drift reps, and then select Drift .

5. Select Save to make no further changes.
Or
A. To review individual drift factors, select the drift range, and

then select Edit

B. To exclude individual results, select the set of replicates or a

single replicate, and then select Exclude .

Analysis 844 Series 3–49

 C. Repeat as necessary, depending on the application.
D. Select Save to set all drift factors.
The drift factor must be between 0.5 and 1.5 in order for the software
to save the drift changes.

Adding Standards for Drift

A standard can be added as a drift standard after determining the
original calibration.
· For each Sample Set, the Sample Mass of each included
replicate must be within 10% or 1 mg, whichever is greater, of
the average sample mass for that set in order to be used as a
drift standard.
· For best accuracy, blank and drift the method using current
drift standards prior to adding new standards for drift.
· When adding standards for drift, the calculated values for each
range will not change. The standards are only added to the drift
standards list and a baseline value is determined. Once added,
the standards can then be analyzed as drift standards and used
to calculate new drift values.
1. OPTIONAL: If necessary, run conditioners.
2. Run blanks, and then set the blank.
3. Run a current drift standard, and then perform a drift. Refer to
steps 3 through 5 of Performing Drifts, page 3–49.
4. Run an analysis with a standard that is to be added for drifting
the calibration. Refer to Running an Analysis, page 3–53, and
Performing Drifts, page 3–49.
5. Select the standard to be added for drift, and then select Drift

.
6. The newly added drift standard appears in the Standards Added
For Drift table.

7. Select Add, and then select Save. The newly added drift standard
will now be listed in the Manage Drift Standards table with the
Drift standards included in the original calibration. Refer to
Managing Drift Standards, following.

3–50 844 Series Analysis

 Managing Drift Standards
Managing Drift Standards allows drift standards to be configured for
each range in a given method.
1. When editing a method, select Manage Drift Standards located
under Calculations. Refer to Method Parameters, page 4–15.
2. Select the desired analyte range by selecting its tab.
3. Drift standards are included in the calibration by selecting Yes in
the Drift column of the Manage Drift Standards table for the
specific standard that will be used to drift.
4. Select Save to save changes.

Analysis 844 Series 3–51

Recalculating

After a sample is analyzed, the result can be recalculated if sample

data has changed. Recalculation may be necessary if the mass, blank,
drift, or calibration has changed.
1. In the software on the Analysis screen, select the sample.

2. Select Recalc on the Action bar. The selected samples will

be recalculated using the new sample mass, method parameters,
blank, calibration, and drift factor.

3–52 844 Series Analysis

Running an Analysis
After a sample is logged in it can be analyzed. Analysis will start with
the first unanalyzed sample. Refer to Logging in Replicates for
Analysis, page 3–31. Saturated cell results will be indicated by blue
text in the software.
HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING
The removed crucibles/boats (if applicable) may still be hot.
Do not touch the crucibles/boats with bare hands. Use only
crucible tongs to transfer the crucibles/boats.

1. Select the Gas button to turn On the gas supply.

2. If unanalyzed replicates are available, the top one will be the next
to analyze. If no unanalyzed replicates are available, log in a new
sample set. On some configurations, the next replicate to be
analyzed can be changed. Refer to Using Next, following.
3. Select the Analyze button to start the analysis.
4. During many analysis types, the Analyze button must be pressed
to continue the analysis after loading a sample or crucible/boat.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

Using Next
The Next button is not available on all instrument configurations.

In a queue of more than one unanalyzed set or replicates, an

unanalyzed set or replicates can be promoted out of chronological
order to be the next analyzed. The status indicator in the replicate orb
will change from yellow to green to indicate that it is the next replicate
to be analyzed. The system will then continue analyzing the set or
replicates in chronological order.
1. From the Analysis screen, select the replicate to be analyzed
next.

2. Select Next on the Action bar.

Aborting an Analysis
During sample analysis, the analysis can be stopped or aborted. To
stop an analysis, select Abort.

Analysis 844 Series 3–53

 Pausing and Restarting an Analysis
Use Pause to prevent an analysis from automatically being initiated. A
paused sample can be resumed either manually or at a predetermined
time.
· Once an analysis has started, Pause may not be able to be applied.
· Delayed Pause is available only for gas doses or instruments with
auto loaders installed.
1. Select the desired sample, and then select the Pause button on the
Action bar.
2. If the replicate is to be restarted manually, select the Manual
button to stop the analysis and manually restart it later. A black
Pause symbol will be displayed in the replicate orb to indicate that
it is manually paused. Select the Analyze button to initiate a
manually paused sample.
Or
If the replicate is to be automatically analyzed at a later time,
continue with step 3, following.

3. To delay the start of the analysis until a predefined time, select the
time/date button and enter the desired time. A green and black
Pause symbol will be displayed in the replicate orb to indicate that
it is a delayed paused.

4. Select Clear to remove the pause if desired.

Deleting a Sample
Refer to Excluding or Deleting a Sample, page 3–33, for more
information.

3–54 844 Series Analysis

 Viewing Sample History
Viewing Sample History is not available on all instrument
configurations.
History of specific samples can be viewed from the Analysis screen.
1. Select the set orb next to the desired set. If more than one set is

desired, select Multi on the Action bar, and then select the
set orbs next to the desired sets.

2. Select History . Then, refer to History, page 5–25.

Analysis 844 Series 3–55

Working with Sample Filters
Filters determine which sample results are displayed. For example,
sample results can be grouped by a method name, a date range, or a
sample name. A filter can be created that selects all samples analyzed
before a certain date for deletion, or a filter can be created that selects
all of the current day's results to export or print.

1. On the Action bar, select Filter .

2. A tab bar to filter by Sample Type, Methods, Date, Excluded,
Description, Comments, or Operator appears.

Filtering by Sample Type

1. Select the Sample Type tab.
2. Select the sample type(s): Blank, Standard, Drift, Sample, or Gas
Dose (not applicable to all instrument configurations). Selected
sample types will be highlighted, and additional tabs appear if
Standard, Sample, or Gas Dose is selected.

3. If Standard, Drift, Sample, or Gas Dose is selected, complete the

following steps as desired. Otherwise, continue with step 4,
following.
A. Select the tab for the desired sample type: Standards,
Sample Name, or Gas Dose. The following example uses the
Standards tab.
B. Select inside the box for the selected sample type.

· In the Standards tab, select specific standards as desired.

3–56 844 Series Analysis

 · In the Sample Name tab, enter samples names as
desired. This field is case-sensitive, but a partial name can
be entered.
· In the Gas Dose tab, enter gas dose names as desired.
This field is case-sensitive, but a partial name can be
entered.
· Additional items of the same type can be added to the

filter with the button. Extra items of a type can be

removed with the button.

4. Select Apply to activate the filter; select Clear to remove all
selected items and any filter currently applied to the sets; select
Collapse to close the Filter area. To clear the filter parameters on
the current tab, select Clear Sample Type.

Filtering by Methods
1. Select the Method tab.
2. Select inside the Method box. A list of methods appears.

3. Select the desired method from the list, and then select Enter.

4. Additional methods can be added to the filter with the

button. Extra methods can be removed with the button.

5. Select Apply to activate the filter; select Clear to remove all
selected items and any filter currently applied to the sets; select
Collapse to close the Filter area. To clear the filter parameters on
the current tab, select Clear Methods.

Analysis 844 Series 3–57

 Filtering by Date
1. Select the Date tab. The date selections appear.

2. Select the desired time sequence.

3. Select Apply to activate the filter; select Clear to remove all
selected items and any filter currently applied to the sets; select
Collapse to close the Filter area. To clear the filter parameters on
the current tab, select Clear Date.

Filtering by Excluded
1. Select the Excluded tab.

2. Select to show or hide excluded sets. Select Exclusive to show

only the excluded sets or reps.
3. Select to show or hide excluded reps. Select Exclusive to show
only the excluded sets or reps.
4. Select Apply to activate the filter; select Clear to remove all
selected items and any filter currently applied to the sets; select
Collapse to close the Filter area. To clear the filter parameters on
the current tab, select Clear Excluded.

Filtering by Description
1. Select the Description tab.
2. Select inside the Description box. The keyboard appears.

3–58 844 Series Analysis

 3. Enter the description as desired. A partial description can be
entered.

4. Additional descriptions can be added to the filter with the

button. Extra descriptions can be removed with the button.

5. Select Apply to activate the filter; select Clear to remove all
selected items and any filter currently applied to the sets; select
Collapse to close the Filter area. To clear the filter parameters on
the current tab, select Clear Descriptions.

Filtering by Comments
1. Select the Comments tab.
2. Select inside the Comments box. The keyboard appears.

3. Enter the comment as desired. A partial comment can be entered.

4. Additional comments can be added to the filter with the

button. Extra comments can be removed with the button.

5. Select Apply to activate the filter; select Clear to remove all
selected items and any filter currently applied to the sets; select
Collapse to close the Filter area. To clear the filter parameters on
the current tab, select Clear Comments.

Filtering by Operator
1. Select the Operator tab.
2. Select inside the Operator box. The keyboard appears.

3. Enter the operator name as desired. A partial name can be

entered.

Analysis 844 Series 3–59

 4. Additional operators can be added to the filter with the

button. Extra operators can be removed with the button.

5. Select Apply to activate the filter; select Clear to remove all
selected items and any filter currently applied to the sets; select
Collapse to close the Filter area. To clear the filter parameters on
the current tab, select Clear Operators.

Saving and Deleting a Filter

· To save filter settings, after applying the desired filter
parameters, select Save Current Filter.
· To delete filter settings, after applying the desired filter
parameters, select Delete Current Filter.
· To clear the filter parameters on the current tab, select Clear “X,”
where “X” is the name of the current tab. Or, clear specific
parameters by selecting the “X” in the parameter name.

Applying a Saved Filter

Select the desired filter from the Apply Saved Filter Parameters
dropdown menu.
The Save Current Filter tab is not available until the filter has been
applied by selecting Apply.

3–60 844 Series Analysis

4 Settings
The Settings chapter describes procedures and options for customizing
the Cornerstone® brand software.

Configuring the Display.................................................................. 4–5

Setting Display Settings ............................................................ 4–5
Creating a Sample Display......................................................... 4–5
Analyte Units Tab ..................................................................... 4–6
Samples Tab............................................................................ 4–7
Selecting Fields to Display .................................................... 4–8
Distributing Rows and Columns............................................. 4–8
Adding Rows or Columns...................................................... 4–8
Inserting ............................................................................ 4–9
Removing........................................................................... 4–9
Moving the Freeze Bar ......................................................... 4–9
Spanning Fields................................................................... 4–9
Plots Tab ............................................................................... 4–10
Editing the Display ................................................................. 4–11
Editing Styles ........................................................................ 4–11
Applying a Display.................................................................. 4–12
Creating and Editing Methods ....................................................... 4–13
Cloning a Method ................................................................... 4–13
Deleting Methods ................................................................... 4–13
Viewing Method History........................................................... 4–14
Method Parameters ................................................................ 4–15
General Parameters ........................................................... 4–15
Constant Furnace Mode................................................. 4–15
Ramped Furnace Mode.................................................. 4–15
Element Parameters .......................................................... 4–16
Gas Dose Parameters ........................................................ 4–17
Calculations........................................................................... 4–17
Configuring Quality Control...................................................... 4–17

Settings 844 Series 4–1

 QC Status ........................................................................ 4–19
QC Blanks ........................................................................ 4–20
General....................................................................... 4–20
Conditioners ................................................................ 4–20
Schedule ..................................................................... 4–20
Threshold .................................................................... 4–21
QC Checks........................................................................ 4–21
General....................................................................... 4–21
Schedule ..................................................................... 4–21
Check Standards .......................................................... 4–22
QC Calibration .................................................................. 4–23
General....................................................................... 4–23
Schedule ..................................................................... 4–23
Calibration Standards ................................................... 4–23
When Quality Control (QC) Steps are Executed ..................... 4–24
Creating and Editing Fields ........................................................... 4–25
Creating a Field...................................................................... 4–25
Editing a Field........................................................................ 4–26
Using the Equation Editor ........................................................ 4–27
Field Creation Example ...................................................... 4–29
Functions ......................................................................... 4–29
Numeric Functions........................................................ 4–29
Parentheses Function.................................................... 4–30
If/then/else Function .................................................... 4–31
Comparison Functions................................................... 4–31
Logic Functions ............................................................ 4–32
Text Function............................................................... 4–32
Creating and Editing Reports ........................................................ 4–33
Creating Reports .................................................................... 4–33
Editing Reports ...................................................................... 4–34
Font Settings Tab ................................................................... 4–34
Analyte Units Tab ................................................................... 4–34
Samples Tab.......................................................................... 4–35
Plots Tab ............................................................................... 4–36
Customizing Print Header with Logo.......................................... 4–37
Editing Styles ........................................................................ 4–37

4–2 844 Series Settings

 Printing Reports .......................................................................... 4–38
Creating and Editing Standards..................................................... 4–39
Viewing Standard History ........................................................ 4–40
Creating and Editing Templates..................................................... 4–41
Using Sample Templates ......................................................... 4–42
Using Single-Sample Templates ............................................... 4–43
Creating and Editing Transports .................................................... 4–44
Creating Transports ................................................................ 4–44
Transmit Option ................................................................ 4–44
File............................................................................. 4–45
Ethernet...................................................................... 4–45
Serial Port ................................................................... 4–46
Transport Automatically ..................................................... 4–46
Transport Headers............................................................. 4–46
Transport Format .............................................................. 4–46
Special Fields.................................................................... 4–47
Special Field Reference Table.............................................. 4–48
Transport Units with Results ............................................... 4–49
Character Encoding ........................................................... 4–49
Include Unanalyzed Samples .............................................. 4–49
Editing Transports .................................................................. 4–49
Analyte Units Tab ................................................................... 4–49
Samples Tab.......................................................................... 4–49
Editing Styles ........................................................................ 4–50
Transport Output ................................................................... 4–50
Working with User Permissions ..................................................... 4–51
Enabling User Permissions for the Administrator Account ............ 4–51
Adding a New User Account ..................................................... 4–53
Editing User Account Settings .................................................. 4–56
Deleting a User Account .......................................................... 4–56
Cloning a User Account ........................................................... 4–57
Selecting a Different User Account............................................ 4–58
Resetting the Password for the Administrator Account................. 4–59
LECO Cornerstone for Mobile Devices............................................. 4–60
Security Considerations........................................................... 4–60
Setting Up Mobile Connectivity................................................. 4–61

Settings 844 Series 4–3

 Setting Up Notifications........................................................... 4–62
Using Assign Notify................................................................. 4–65

4–4 844 Series Settings

Configuring the Display

Depending on the instrument configuration, the following screens

may not exactly match the screen shown to the user.

Setting Display Settings

1. Select Settings, and then select Display.

2. Select the default Scale Factor by entering a number in the field
or using the sliding scale. The scale factor affects button size
throughout the software, and row height for the current sample
display.
3. Select whether or not to display the function key labels. Refer to
Keyboard Shortcuts, page 3–15.
4. Select the monitor to be used when displaying the software.
5. OPTIONAL: Select the desired sample display for remote clients.
Refer to Remote Access, page 5–33.
6. Select the desired sample display for the Analysis screen.

Creating a Sample Display

1. Select Settings, and then select Display.

2. Select Add to create a new Sample Display.

Sample displays can also be imported or exported. Refer to Importing
and Exporting, page 3–22, for more information.
3. Enter a name for the new display settings, and enter a description
if desired.
4. Change the available settings as needed. Refer to the following
sections for instructions on editing these settings.

Settings 844 Series 4–5

 Analyte Units Tab

Use the following steps to determine how the analyte units display in
the software. If all uses of an analyte should use the same unit and
formatting, it is easiest to set this using the Analyte Units tab.
1. Select the desired sample display, and then select Edit. Analyte
Units will be automatically highlighted.
2. For units, select the Mass Ratio field. A keyboard appears.
3. Select the desired unit.
4. Select Enter.
5. Select the desired Rounding Method, which controls the method
used to determine the number of significant digits to display or
report. Refer to Cornerstone Brand Software Rounding, page
7–14, for more information.

Fixed Decimals—Shows results with a specified number of digits

after the decimal point.

Significant Digits—Shows results rounded to a specified

number of significant digits.

6. Select Enter.
· Numeric settings will be displayed only if all numeric entries
selected are of the same type. Mass and Mass Ratio fields cannot
be mixed.

· Numeric settings set in the Analyte Units tab apply to all fields
unless they are overridden by a Style setting. To change the
Style refer to Editing Styles, page 4–11.

7. Select the number of Significant Digits or Decimal Places to be

displayed.
8. Select Enter.

4–6 844 Series Settings

 Samples Tab
The data displayed in the designer is the currently selected sample, or
the last run sample if no sample is currently selected.

Selected Fields show what will be displayed.

Available Fields is located under Selected Fields and shows the
available fields (buttons) that can be added to the report. General
fields will be shown first, followed by element-specific fields.

Settings 844 Series 4–7

 Selecting Fields to Display
· Select a field and select Style from the Action bar to edit the style.
Refer to Editing Styles, page 4–11.
· Some fields are defaults and cannot be removed.
· If a field is dragged to a location that is not allowed, it will return
to its original location.
1. Select Samples from the display editor screen.
2. Select the tab next to a row to show the available fields for that

area. This navigation may also be done by selecting the Set

or Replicate button next to Available Fields. Fields that

are in use are muted yellow , and fields not in use

are gray .

3. Select an element button to show the available fields for that

element.
4. Select a cell in the Selected Fields grid. Available fields that are in
use by other cells in the same grid are muted yellow in color.
5. Add fields from the Available Fields area to the Selected fields
area by one of the following methods:
· Select a cell in the Selected Fields area, and then select a
field from the Available Fields area to add it to the selected
cell.
· Drag a field from the Available Fields area to add it to a
desired cell in the Selected Fields area.
6. Drag a field outside the Selected Fields area to remove it from the
selected fields.
7. In the Selected Fields area, drag a field to desired place in the
display.

Distributing Rows and Columns

Distribute adjusts selected rows or columns to all have

the same height or width.
1. With Multi enabled, select two or more rows or columns in the
Selected Fields area.
2. Select Distribute.

Adding Rows or Columns

1. Select any row or column.
2. Select Add Row or Add Column. A row or column will be added to
the end of the grid.

4–8 844 Series Settings

 Inserting
1. Select any row, column, or field.
2. Select Insert. A new row will be added above the selected row. A
new column will be added to the left of the selected column. A
new empty field will be added and the existing fields will be
shifted to the right.

Removing
1. Select any row, column, or field.
2. Select Remove.

Moving the Freeze Bar

When more columns have been defined than will fit on the screen, the
columns can be scrolled. The frozen column is the last one that does
not scroll. Every column to the right of the frozen column will scroll
when the scroll left and scroll right buttons are used.
When scrolling, the currently frozen column appears with a freeze bar
on the right side of the column.
There can be only one freeze bar in the grid.

A column cannot be frozen when a field is spanned across it.

To move the freeze bar:
1. Select a column.
2. Select Freeze.

Spanning Fields
A field may be stretched across multiple columns or rows using the
span feature. A field cannot be spanned without adjacent empty fields.
Span can be used in Single- and Multi-selection modes. Fields cannot
be spanned across a freeze bar.
1. Double-tap a field to select and enable Span.

2. Drag the cursor to stretch field across the desired columns or

rows.

Settings 844 Series 4–9

 Plots Tab

Available Fields: Some custom fields may be displayed as an option.

· The following options are available only when Advanced Plot is
selected on the Analysis screen.
· Show Blend Range is not available on all instrument configurations.
· Ambient Trace Data is not available on all instrument
configurations.
Show Blend Range—In the plotting window for dual-range analytes
in the advanced mode, this setting activates markers to indicate when
the data enters the range crossover region as controlled in the method
settings. This option is available only for dual range instruments.
Popup Duration—If a single time point is selected for detailed
information on the Analysis screen in the Advanced plot mode, this is
the length of time the information window will stay open.
Ambient Trace Data—If a single replicate is selected and a plot
window is in the Advanced information mode, the setting can activate
additional plotting of furnace information.
Use the following steps to edit plot features.
1. Select Plots from the display editor screen.
2. Select the desired field. Available Fields include custom fields.
Refer to Creating and Editing Fields, page 4–25.
3. Select Enter.
4. Select Save to keep the changes, or select Cancel to return to
Settings.

4–10 844 Series Settings

 Editing the Display
1. Select Settings, and then select Display.
2. Select a sample display.
3. Select Edit.

Editing Styles
A style is a collection of settings that controls how information is
displayed. Styles can be edited for fields in Display, Reports, and
Transports. The style for each field is unique to each Display, Report or
Transport configuration.

· The style will be applied only to the field or fields currently

selected. Use Multi or Select All to apply a style to

multiple fields.

· Repeatedly selecting Select All will first select all available fields,
then will select all fields for a single analyte.

1. Select the desired field(s).

2. Select Style . A default style format will appear.

Depending on the instrument configuration, the following screens
may not appear exactly as those on your instrument.

Settings 844 Series 4–11

 3. Change fields as needed. A sample of the output for the field will
be displayed at the top of the screen. Refer to Cornerstone Brand
Software Rounding, page 7–14, for more information.
Display Units—The reporting units for results.
Rounding Style—The method used to determine the number of
significant digits to display.
Fixed Decimals—Shows results rounded to a specified
number of digits after the decimal point.
Significant Digits—Shows results rounded to a specified
number of significant digits.
Variable Rounding—Shows average results rounded to the
number of fixed decimals needed to match the decimal
position of the significant digits in the standard deviation.
When there is only one replicate in a set, the result is
displayed with a specified number of digits after the decimal
point. Appears only for analyte results.
· Display units will be editable only if all numeric entries selected
are of the same type. Mass and Mass Ratio fields cannot be mixed.
When multiple types of numeric fields are selected, Display Units
will read “Incompatible units selected.”

· An empty entry indicates that one or more fields are currently

using different values. If unchanged in styles, these values will be
retained even after saving other changes.

4. Select Save .

Applying a Display
1. Select Settings, and then select Display.
2. For Current Sample Display, select the desired display.

3. Select Enter.

4–12 844 Series Settings

Creating and Editing Methods

A method is a set of analytical parameters used to control the

instrument during analysis and calculation of the final result. A method
must be created before a sample can be analyzed. Once a method is
created, it will appear in a list on the Methods screen. The following
section explains how to create and edit methods. For an explanation of
method parameters, refer to Method Parameters, page 4–15.
Methods are not accurate until they are blanked and calibrated. Once
the following steps have been completed, refer to Performing Blanks,
page 3–37, and Performing Calibrations, page 3–38.
1. Select Settings, and then select Methods.

· To create a new method, select Add .

· To edit an existing method, select the method, and then

select Edit .
2. Select the Name field. A keyboard appears.
3. Enter a name for the method.
4. Enter a description if desired.
5. Enter the method parameters. Refer to Method Parameters, page
4–15.

Cloning a Method
1. Select the desired method.

2. Select Clone . The cloned method appears in the list as

“XX Copy,” where “XX” is the name of the method that was
cloned.

Deleting Methods
The following section explains how to delete a method from the
software.
When a method is deleted, all associated items such as samples,
calibrations, and blanks that are referenced by that method will also
be permanently deleted.

1. Select the method to delete, and then select Exclude on

the Action bar. The method moves to the bottom of the list.

2. Select the excluded method .

Settings 844 Series 4–13

 3. On the Action bar, select Delete . A list of the samples,
calibrations, and blanks associated with the method appear.

4. Select Delete on the Action bar to remove the method and

all associated items, or select Back to return to the previous

screen without deleting items.

Viewing Method History

Viewing Method History is not available on all instrument
configurations.
History of specific methods can be viewed from the Methods screen.
1. Select the orb next to the desired method. If more than one

method is desired, select Multi on the Action bar, and then

select the orbs next to the desired methods.

2. Select History . Then, refer to History, page 5–25.

4–14 844 Series Settings

 Method Parameters
The following section explains the parameters used to create methods.
The definitions can assist when creating methods for specific
applications.

General Parameters
Purge Time—The time before an analysis when the furnace is closed and
atmospheric impurities are purged from the combustion area with oxygen.
Delay Time—The amount of time between the purge time and analysis in
which the instrument establishes a stable baseline for detection.
Sample Cool Time—The time to wait after the analysis has completed
before lowering the furnace pedestal.
Furnace Mode—Selects the Furnace Mode during an analysis. Selections:
Constant or Ramped.
Analysis Mode is available for CS844ES and S844ES models only.

Analysis Mode—Select whether to run in Normal Mode or Enhanced

Sensitivity (ES) Mode. When the gas is turned On, the system will set to the
mode utilized by the next sample to be analyzed. If no samples are logged
in, the system will use the last analyzed sample. If no sets are logged in,
the system will default to Normal Mode.
· Normal Mode—flows and pressures are set to standard values.
· ES Mode—flows are lowered, and pressures are increased. Due to
the lower flow rate, methods will need to be modified accordingly.
Nominal Mass—allows the user to set the nominal sample mass that
appears automatically when a blank sample is logged in. The nominal mass
is method based, and the mass of a blank cannot be changed on the
Analysis screen.

Constant Furnace Mode

Furnace Power—The percentage of full furnace power applied to the
furnace during an analysis.

Ramped Furnace Mode

Furnace Low Power—The furnace power, in percent of full power, at the
start of analysis.
Furnace High Power—The furnace power, in percent of full power, applied
to the furnace at the end of an analysis.
Time—The time over which the ramp from Low Power to High Power will
occur. The ramp will hold the High Power setting if more time is needed to
complete the analysis based on the Element Parameters.

Settings 844 Series 4–15

 Element Parameters
Use the Element Parameters tab to define parameters for the analytes and
ranges.
Select the tab for the target analyte. The parameters that appear
depend on the selected analyte.
Integration Delay—Period of time after the sample drops, during
which data for the analyte is not collected. The baseline is taken before
the integration delay ends. To compensate for fluctuations between
samples, this delay should end before sample gas reaches the
detection systems as observed in the plot.
Starting Baseline—Period of time (at the end of the integration
delay) before the sample signal appears during which the average
baseline level is determined.
Use Comparator—Select Yes to use a comparator to determine the
end of analysis; only a beginning baseline correction will be applied.
Selecting No causes the system to use a fixed integration time period.
Comparator Level—Enter a value, measured as a percentage of
sample peak height, that will end the analysis. This parameter appears
only if Yes is selected for Use Comparator.
Minimum Integration Time—Enter a minimum time in seconds for
the analysis to complete. This parameter appears only if Yes is
selected for Use Comparator. If comparator has not been met, analysis
will continue. If comparator is met, analysis will terminate.
Maximum Integration Time—Enter a maximum time in seconds for
the analysis to complete. This parameter appears only if Yes is
selected for Use Comparator. It will end the analysis at the selected
time even if the comparator level has not been met.
Integration Time—The fixed number of seconds during which sample
peaks will be collected. Appears only if Use Comparator is No.
Use Endline—Select Yes to enable Endline correction. When set to
Yes, data from the beginning and end of the analysis will be used to
determine a baseline correction to be applied throughout the analysis.
If the Starting Baseline is set to 0, only the Endline value will be used.
Appears only when Use Comparator is set to No.
Ending Baseline—describes the time after integration during which
the average endline is collected. Appears only when Use Comparator is
set to No and Use Endline is set to Yes.
Range Select—Allows the user to alter the range used when multiple
detectors are present to measure a single analyte. Default option is
Auto, which selects the appropriate range based on the data.
Range Lower Limit—Describes the peak height value for the Low cell
under which only the low range result will be used. Appears with
Range Select set to Auto.
Range Upper Limit—Describes the peak height value for the Low cell
above which only the high range result will be used. Appears with
Range Select set to Auto.

4–16 844 Series Settings

 Gas Dose Parameters

The following Gas Dose parameters are available only on the

following models: CS844 and C844.
The following section explains how to specify the gas dose parameters for
the gas dose. Use Gas Dose parameters to define the gas flow through
the gas loops. Refer to Glossary, page 12–1, for parameter definitions.
1. Select the tab for the target analyte. The parameters that appear
depend on the selected analyte.
2. Set the data collection parameters as needed. The fields are the
same as described in Element Parameters, page 4–16.

Calculations
Use this section to view, edit, or manage existing calibrations, drifts,
and blanks.
1. To view, select Calibration, Drift, Manage Drift Standards,
or Blank.
2. If changes are necessary, select Edit.
· For more information on calculating calibrations, refer to
Calculation of the Calibration Equation, page 7–10.
· For more information on calculating drifts, refer to Drift
Correction, page 7–9.
· For more information on managing drift standards, refer to
Managing Drift Standards, page 3–51.
· For more information on calculating blanks, refer to Blank,
page 7–7.

Configuring Quality Control

Quality Control (QC) is a procedure intended to ensure that the
instrument adheres to a defined set of quality criteria or meets the
requirements of the client or customer.
QC Method uses procedures such as blanks, standard checks,
calibration, and drift standards to verify that the instrument met
quality standards while the analysis was run. These quality procedures
are assigned by the user to run at predefined intervals.
Using Quality Control requires a registration key configured with QC.

Settings 844 Series 4–17

 The parameters controlling the QC feature are located within a
method. Within the method definition, QC is comprised of settings
controlling the analysis of blanks, check standards, and calibration
standards. Each of these may be enabled or disabled independently of
each other, and the entire QC functionality can also be enabled or
disabled. This allows the user to customize QC for their exact scenario.
When QC is enabled for a particular method, the current QC status will
be displayed next to the designated method for any unanalyzed
samples. If QC is considered “in control,” then this status will be
indicated with a green star. If QC is considered “not in control,” then
this status will be a warning icon.

These status indicators are only visible on unanalyzed samples that

have been assigned a method for which QC has been enabled.
After an analysis is complete, the replicate will be assigned the QC
state that was in effect at the time the analysis started. If QC was “in
control” at the start of the analysis, the sample will be affixed with a
green star, which indicates that at the time the sample results were
determined, QC was “in control.”

A user can select the set they would like to run “in control” and then

select the Quality Control action bar. The software then

automatically logs in the necessary QC blanks, checks, and calibration
standards before the sample set selected.

4–18 844 Series Settings

 QC Status
In the Quality Control section of the desired method, select the Status
button.

The method’s QC Status screen provides a dashboard containing the

state of all QC components. It also allows for the following parameters
to be set.
The entire QC functionality can be enabled or disabled. If disabled,
then QC steps will not be undertaken to bring the instrument into
control and the QC green star and warning icons will not be displayed
on the Analysis screen.
· If QC is enabled and in control, this screen will display a green star
icon.

· If QC is enabled and not in control, this screen will display a

warning icon that includes an explanation for why QC is not in
control.

The desired action to be taken when running a manual analysis and QC

is found to not be in control can be selected. Next to Manual Analysis
Action When Not in control, select Continue Analysis With Warning or
Stop Analysis.
Sample replicates can be adorned with a green star to indicate their
Quality Control state at analysis time. Next to Use Green Star to
Indicate in Control, select Yes or No.
From this status screen, the user can force the requirement of blanks
and check standards by selecting the appropriate Reset button in the
dashboard. This action may be desired after instrument maintenance
has occurred.

Settings 844 Series 4–19

 QC Blanks
The parameters controlling the analysis of blanks for a method are
found in the method’s Quality Control Blanks screen. Once analyzed on
the Analysis screen, set the Blank. This will reset the QC blanks setting
to be in control. Refer to Performing Blanks, page 3–37.

General
Select Enable to define standard blanks as part of the QC Method, and
then enter the desired number of Blanks to Analyze and Blanks to
Calculate.
Blanks to Calculate—This value indicates the number of replicates
from which to calculate the standard deviation. The replicates used will
be the last of the analyzed set, so this value should be less than the
number of Blanks to Analyze.

Conditioners
Enter the number of conditioning samples to run before and after the
QC blanks. Some instruments do not support pre-blank and/or post-
blank conditioning samples.

Schedule
Blanks can be required after a user defined time has elapsed.
Select Yes for After Time Lapse, and enter a time in the box to
schedule the blank analysis after a certain length of time.

4–20 844 Series Settings

 Threshold
Select Enable for each analyte to enable a standard deviation
threshold. This setting indicates if the standard deviation of the Blanks
to Calculate must be below a threshold to be considered in control.

QC Checks
The parameters controlling the analysis of check standards are found
in the method’s Quality Control Checks screen.

General
Only standards that have one or more elements with Check Standard
set to Yes in the Standards screen will be viewable within QC checks.
Select Enable in the include check standards as part of the QC routine.
Choose the minimum number of check replicates required to be run in
order for QC to be satisfied. Refer to the example in Check Standards,
page 4–22, for more information.

Schedule
Check standards can be required after different specified events to
confirm that the instrument is still providing expected results.
Select Yes for After Blanks to schedule a check after running blank
analyses.
Select Yes for After Calibrating to schedule a check after calibration.
Select Yes for After Drifting to schedule a check after running a drift
standard.

Settings 844 Series 4–21

 Select Yes for After Time Lapse and enter the length of time lapse in
the box to run a check standard after the determined length of time.

Check Standards
The specific standards to be analyzed are selected in this section and
the number of replicates to analyze applies to each selected standard.
Check marks to the right of the certified and uncertainty values
indicate which elements are set as Check Standards in the Standards
screen.
Example: If three check standards are selected and the number of
replicates to analyze is set to 2, then a total of six analyses will need
to be performed: two for each standard.
Once analyzed on the Analysis screen, select all the check standards
sets. Select the Check button on the action bar to reset the QC check
standards setting to be in control.

4–22 844 Series Settings

 QC Calibration
The parameters controlling the analysis of calibration standards are
found in the method’s Quality Control Calibration screen.

General
The inclusion of calibration standards into QC can be enabled or
disabled from this screen.
Choose the minimum number of calibration replicates required in order
for QC to be satisfied.

Schedule
Calibration standards can be required following the analysis of blanks,
or if a check standard failed to be within range.

Calibration Standards
Similarly to the QC Checks screen, the standards to use for the
calibration are specified this screen, and the number of replicates to
analyze applies to each selected standard. Refer to Check Standards,
page 4–22.
Check marks to the right of the calibration standards indicate that the
standard is required to be within the analyte’s upper and lower limits
for the calibration to be saved.
Make sure that the appropriate range is selected within Standards to
obtain good calibration curves.

On the Analysis screen, select all the calibration standards sets. Save
the new calibration in order to reset the QC calibration standards
setting to be in control. Refer to Performing Calibrations, page 3–38.

Settings 844 Series 4–23

 When Quality Control (QC) Steps are Executed
It is important to understand when the required QC steps will be
executed. Read the following section carefully.
Given that the parameters controlling QC blanks and check standards
contain a time lapse field, it is common to think that QC will display a
warning the moment the specified time lapse has occurred. However,
this is not the case.
QC will wait until a sample analysis is logged in before checking the QC
status. At this point QC will allow the analysis to continue if it is in
control, or it will require QC steps to be performed.

The Quality Control button on the action bar can be selected for
the software to automatically insert the necessary blank, check
standard, and calibration standard replicates as specified on the QC
method screens, before the user sample.
These QC replicates will be analyzed and at their completion, QC will
again determine if it is in control.
· If QC is in control, then the user’s sample analysis will be
performed.
· If QC is not in control, the necessary QC steps will continue to be
requested to be performed until QC is in control. Instrument
maintenance may be required.

4–24 844 Series Settings

Creating and Editing Fields

Depending on your configuration, the following screens may not

appear exactly as the screen on your instrument.

Creating a Field
1. Select Settings, and then select Fields.

2. Select Add to create a new custom field.

3. Enter a name for the new field, and enter a description if desired.
4. Select the Type.

Number—Provides a number.

Text—Provides text. The following screenshots are examples of

text fields.
Field—Provides another field as the result of a calculation
expression.

Settings 844 Series 4–25

 5. Make the following selections depending on what was chosen in
step 4, previous.
· Entry Method. This parameter is available if Number or Text is
chosen. Field is by default a Calculated entry method.
Editable—Used to display numeric or text entry.
Calculated—The value displayed is calculated from other
fields. For more information on creating a calculated field,
refer to Using the Equation Editor, page 4–27.
· Measurement Type. This parameter is available if Number has
been selected for the Type. The Measurement Type is the
type of base unit for the field, which allows for conversion to
the defined unit. The choices are: Unitless, Mass Ratio, Mass,
and User Defined.
Unitless—The measurement has no unit or the unit does not
match the other defined measurement types.
Mass Ratio—The measurement is a composition that can be
scaled. The output unit is %, ppm, or similar and can be
changed using Analyte Units or the Styles button within
Display, Reports, or Transports.
Mass—The measurement is a mass value.
User Defined—The measurement unit is supplied by the
user. Once a user-defined field is created, the user can set
the units in the field using the Style button.
· Field Group Type. This parameter is available if Editable is
chosen. The Field Group Type allows the field to be marked to
be used in a Set or Rep.

Editing a Field
1. Select Settings, and then select Fields.
2. Select a field.
3. Select Edit, and then refer to Creating a Field, page 4–25, for
instructions on editing field parameters.

4–26 844 Series Settings

 Using the Equation Editor
A calculated field can be created using the equation editor. A
calculated field can be set to use set data or replicate data. Calculated
fields can use any of the provided functions and fields to create an
equation. Additionally, any user-created fields are available to create
new calculated fields.
1. Create a calculated field or edit an existing calculated field. Refer
to step 5 of Creating a Field, page 4–26.
2. Select the Functions, Fields, or Numeric tab from the calculation
options. Each tab contains different elements that can be used in
building a calculation. For a list of definitions of the available
functions, refer to Functions, page 4–29.
3. For the Fields tab, select Set or Replicate, and then select the
appropriate analyte button. The selection of these buttons will
affect which fields are available to use in the equation editor.

Settings 844 Series 4–27

 4. Elements can be added in two ways:
· Select an element to add it to the current equation.
· Drag an element to the equation and drop it.
· The yellow highlight shows what is currently selected.

· The new element will be positioned within the currently selected

item in the equation.

· For example, in the following screenshot, a new element added to

the equation will appear inside the parentheses.

· In the following screenshot, a new element will replace the Abs()

element.

5. Drag an element within the equation editor to rearrange it. When

dragging elements, wait to release the element until the desired
area is highlighted in yellow. Refer to the following screenshot.

6. Elements can be removed in two ways:

· When the desired element is highlighted, select Remove.
· Drag the element outside the editor area. The element will
disappear from the editor only if it is not part of the current
equation.

4–28 844 Series Settings

 Field Creation Example
The following section is an example of creating a calculated field. The
specific fields shown will not be available on all models.
1. Create a new field named C[CaCO3].

2. Add the multiply function from the Functions tab of the calculation
options.

3. Add Carbon from the Fields tab. Carbon is available only when
Replicate and Carbon are selected.

4. Use the Numeric tab to enter 8.333.

Functions

Numeric Functions
Input—Expression that evaluates to a number
Output—Numeric results of operation
Function Definition In Use

+ Plus

- Minus

x Multiply

Settings 844 Series 4–29

Function Definition In Use

÷ Divide

Pi (constant value of
π
3.14…)

Abs Absolute value

Log10 Log base 10

Ln Natural log

Sqrt Square root

Max Maximum value

Min Minimum value

^ Raise to the power

Parentheses Function
The parentheses function is used to group elements of an equation
together to clarify which parts are evaluated first.
Function Definition In Use

() Parentheses

4–30 844 Series Settings

 If/then/else Function
Input for If—Expression that evaluates to true or false
Input for Then and Else—Expression which evaluates to a number
Output—Then or else value, depending on the result of the if
statement.
Function Definition In Use

“If/then/else”
If/then/else
statement

Comparison Functions
Input—Expression that evaluates to a number
Output—Logical result of the operation (true or false)
Function Definition In Use

= Equal to

≠ Not equal to

< Less than

<= Less than or equal to

Greater than or
>=
equal to

> Greater than

Settings 844 Series 4–31

 Logic Functions
Input—Expression that evaluates to true or false
Output—Logical result of the operation (true or false)
Function Definition In Use

“And” logic
And
statement

“Not” logic
Not
statement

Or “Or” logic statement

“Exclusive Or” logic

Xor
statement

Text Function
This function lets the operator enter text into the equation editor.
Function Definition In Use

Text “Text” Statement

Text= Text Equal To

Text≠ Text Not Equal To

“If/then/else”
If/then/else
statement

4–32 844 Series Settings

Creating and Editing Reports

Depending on your configuration, the following screens may not

appear exactly as the screen on your instrument.

Creating Reports
1. Select Settings, and then select Reports.

2. select Add . A default print setup is automatically created.

3. Enter a name for the new report, and enter a description if

desired.
4. Next to Printer, select the printer to be used.
5. Next to Page Orientation, select the portrait or landscape page
orientation needed.
6. Next to Spacing Between Sets, select the desired spacing
between sets: a page break or no page break.
7. Next to Report format, select Normal Report or Grouped Report.
When a grouped report is generated, the software calculates the
statistics of each report field for replicates with the same
set name.
8. Next to Include Unanalyzed Samples, select whether to include
unanalyzed samples in the report.

Settings 844 Series 4–33

 9. Change the available field settings (located at the bottom of the
default print setup window) as needed. Refer to Configuring the
Display, page 4–5.
10. Edit the styles for Selected Fields if desired. Refer to Editing
Styles, page 4–11.

11. Select Preview on the Action Bar to evaluate the setup of

the report and determine if the width of the fields are
appropriate.

Editing Reports
1. Select Settings, and then select Reports.
2. Select a Report.

3. Select Edit, and then refer to Creating Reports, page 4–33, for
instructions to edit report parameters.

Font Settings Tab

Select the font settings, as desired, to apply to the report.

Analyte Units Tab

For more information on setting analyte units, refer to Analyte Units
Tab, page 4–6 .

4–34 844 Series Settings

 Samples Tab

Selected Fields—Shows what will be printed. Drag fields to reorder.

Return Arrow—Used to start a new line on the printout.
Available Fields—Located under the display area and shows the
available fields (buttons) that can be added to the report. General
fields will be shown first, followed by element-specific fields.

To select available fields so that they will be part of the report:

1. Select which type of fields to see; available fields for that type
will be shown.

2. Select Set Begin or the TOP orb in the display

area. Select the set fields to be shown BEFORE the replicate
information.

3. Select Replicate or the MIDDLE orb in the

display area. Select the replicate fields to be shown.

4. Select Set End or the BOTTOM orb in the

display area. Select the set fields to be shown AFTER replicate
information.

Settings 844 Series 4–35

 Within each Set Begin, Rep, and Set End:
A. Select Element.
B. Select the fields to be shown for that element.

When switching between elements, the fields are displayed in the

same order for easy location.

Select Fields:
A. The new field will appear at the end of the display area.
B. Drag the field to the desired place in the report.
C. To add a return arrow, select the existing return arrow (found
at the end of the line in the display area and move it to the
desired area.
D. To remove a return arrow, drag it to the end of the line or
section in the display area where there is already a return
arrow, and then release it The duplicate symbol appears.
There will always be a return arrow at the end of the section (Set
Begin, Rep, Set End).

Plots Tab

1. Select Plots.
2. Use adjustment tools inside the lower-right of the rectangles to
resize the rectangle. This will not affect the alignment. The
nature of each plot can also be adjusted by selecting it and
selecting the Configuration Options underneath the Setup
window.
3. Drag plots to change desired order.

To select available fields so that they will be part of the report:

A. Select Set or Replicate.
Set Plot—Applies to each set of replicates; will print at the
end of each set.
Replicate Plot—Applies to an individual replicate of data
only; will print after each replicate.
B. Select type of plot desired (Curve and/or Scatter).

Within each Set Plot and Rep Plot:

A. Select Element.
B. Select type of plot to be shown for that element.

If no “Available Fields” are selected for a plot, that plot will not be
printed.

4–36 844 Series Settings

 Customizing Print Header with Logo
The following procedure explains how to personalize the software’s
print head with a company logo.
1. Shut down the Cornerstone® brand software.
2. Name or rename the image file “CustomPrintHeaderLogo.png” or
“CustomPrintHeaderLogo.jpg.” The file must be a .png or .jpg
image to work properly.
3. Place the custom print header logo .png or .jpg file here:
C:\ProgramData\LECO\CustomPrintHeaderLogo.png
Or
C:\ProgramData\LECO\CustomPrintHeaderLogo.jpg
The file name must match exactly.
4. Restart the Cornerstone brand software.

Editing Styles
For more information on editing styles, refer to Editing Styles,
page 4–11.

Settings 844 Series 4–37

Printing Reports

When printing or previewing a report, a progress indicator appears

while the report(s) are being prepared. Selecting outside this
progress indicator will cancel the report preparation.

1. Select the set(s) to print.

2. Select Output on the Action bar.

3. Select the Report tab.

4. Select the Print format. If only one is available it will be

automatically selected.
5. Select one of the following options:
· Clear—Deselects any selected reports.
· Preview—Used to see how printed data will look.
· Print—Prints the selected set(s) using the selected
report(s).
· Close—Closes the Report tab.

4–38 844 Series Settings

Creating and Editing Standards
A Standard is a sample of known type and value used to calibrate the
instrument for best accuracy. A Standard can be used to perform
automatic calibration checks if the upper and lower control limits have
been set. Because Standard Calibration is saved with each method,
each method must be calibrated after it is created.
For check standards, results that are out of range will be indicated by
orange text in the software; saturated cell results will be indicated by
blue text in the software.

1. Select Settings, and then select Standards.

• To add a new standard, select Add .

• To edit an existing standard, select the standard, and then

select Edit .

2. Enter a name for the standard. The part number and lot number
of the standard is recommended to be used as the name.

3. OPTIONAL: Add a description. The type of standard can be

entered as the description.

4. If the standard is a Gas Dose, select which dose gas to use (Gas
Dose A, Gas Dose B, Gas Dose AB). If it is not a Gas Dose, go to
step 6, following.

5. If the standard is a Gas Dose, enter the number of doses to

perform in each analysis.

Last Used and Last Modified display information about the standard.
These fields cannot be edited.

6. Select the tab for the desired analyte. The parameters that
appear depend on the selected analyte.

Range—Select the calibration range or ranges for which this is a

valid standard.
Range is not available on all instrument configurations.

Certified—Enter the certified composition of the standard. The

units entered can be changed within the keyboard.
Uncertainty—Enter the uncertainty of the certified value.

Settings 844 Series 4–39

 Lower Control Limit—Enter the lowest value in which the
standard is still considered within range. If the standard analysis
result is below this value and Yes is selected for Check Standard,
then the result will appear in orange type. The software
automatically sets the value to the certified value minus the
uncertainty.
Upper Control Limit—Enter the highest value in which the
standard is still considered within range. If the standard analysis
result is above this value and Yes is selected for Check Standard,
then the result will appear in orange type. The software
automatically sets the value to the certified value plus the
uncertainty.
Check Standard—select Yes if the standard will be used as a
check standard. If the standard result is outside the Lower or
Upper Control Limit values, then the result will appear in orange
type. If No is selected, the instrument will not check the standard
result. This parameter is an option only if there is an Uncertainty
entered.
7. Select Save to keep the information, or select Cancel and the
standard information will not be saved.

Viewing Standard History

Viewing Standard History is not available on all instrument
configurations.
History of specific standards can be viewed from the Standards screen.
1. Select the orb next to the desired standard. If more than one

standard is desired, select Multi on the Action bar, and

then select the orbs next to the desired standards.

2. Select History . Then, refer to History, page 5–25.

4–40 844 Series Settings

Creating and Editing Templates
Templates allow the user to quickly add a predefined group of samples
for analysis. Depending on the instrument configuration, the group of
samples will be a single batch or a group of sets and replicates.
Some sample types are available only on certain configurations.

1. Select Settings, and then select Templates.

· To add a new template, select Add .

· To edit an existing template, select the template, and then

select Edit .
· To import an existing template, select Import. Refer to
Importing and Exporting, page 3–22.
Before importing a template, import its referenced method in order
to avoid a blank method field in the template.
2. Enter a name for the template.
3. Add a description for the template, if desired.
4. Select the template type: Single Sample or Multi Sample. The
Template Type option is available only when editing Single-
Sample types that were created prior to Cornerstone brand
software version 2.8.2. LECO recommends changing any such
templates to Multi-Sample types so that they behave in the same
way as new sample templates. Refer to Using Sample Templates,
page 4–42.
5. Select the method to be used for the template.
6. Use the login bar to add blanks, standards, drifts, samples,
and/or gas doses to the template as described in Logging in a
Sample, page 3–32, and Logging in a Standard, page 3–31. Fill in
all relevant fields to properly run an analysis.
7. Select Save to keep the information, or select Cancel and the
template information will not be saved.

Settings 844 Series 4–41

 Using Sample Templates
Complete the following steps to apply a sample template.
1. Select Analysis.

2. Select the Template button on the Login bar. The sample

template login bar displays.

3. Select the desired template from the list at the bottom of the
software screen.

4. Select Enter or Tab to enter the selected sample template (or

select Cancel to cancel the login process). The samples specified
by that sample template are logged in.
5. OPTIONAL: The blanks, standards, drifts, samples, and/or gas
doses added with a template can be edited once added from the
Login bar. Any changes made apply only to the current batch
being analyzed. The sample template will not change.
6. Select Analyze to begin the analysis.

4–42 844 Series Settings

 Using Single-Sample Templates
Complete the following steps to apply a single-sample template.
Single-Sample templates are available only when Single-Sample
templates were created prior to Cornerstone brand software version
2.8.2. LECO recommends changing any such templates to Multi-
Sample types so that they behave in the same way as new sample
templates. Refer to Using Sample Templates, page 4–42.
1. Select Analysis.

2. Select the Sample button on the Login bar.

3. Select the drop-down menu next to the Name field at the bottom
of the software screen, and select the desired single-sample
template.

Settings 844 Series 4–43

Creating and Editing Transports

The Transport feature is a data output format such as File Export,

Ethernet Export, or Serial Port Transmit.

Creating Transports
1. Select Settings, and then select Transports.

2. Select Add . A default transport format appears.

3. Enter a name and description, if desired, for this transport

format.
4. Select and edit parameters and files required to create the output
format.

Transmit Option
Transmit Option determines the format for the transport (File,
Ethernet, Serial Port).

4–44 844 Series Settings

 File

Export Options—Determine how the file is created (Append,

Overwrite, or Auto Increment). If Auto Increment is selected, a
date/time string is appended to the file name.
Export File Name—The file name or path to which data transmitted
to a file is entered.
· [default] can be used to direct transport data to the default file
location, which is: C:\ProgramData\LECO\XXXXX####\Transport.

· XXX is the model number and #### is the serial number of the
analyzer.

· Alternatively, a specific file name may be entered in this location

following a standard folder path.

· For example: C:\Users\LECO\Desktop\Output.txt

Ethernet

IP Address {xx.xx.xx.xx}—The Internet Protocol address of the

target network device.
IP Port—The Internet Protocol port of the target network device.

Settings 844 Series 4–45

 Serial Port

Port—The COM port is used for this transport format (for example:
COM1, COM2).
Baud Rate—Bits per second data transmission rate used to configure
the COM port.
Parity—Data transmission parity used to configure the COM port.
Data Bits—Number of data bits used to configure the COM port.
Stop Bits—Number of stop bits used to configure the COM port.

Transport Automatically
Transport Automatically determines if results are automatically
transported at the end of the analysis.
Transport Only When All Replicates Within Set Analyzed—
Determines whether the transport is delayed until all replicates within
a set are analyzed.

Transport Headers
Transport Headers determines when to transport set and rep headers.
Select Never, Once per Transport, or Always.

Transport Format
Transport Format determines the format of the output created: CSV
(RFC 4180), Delimited, XML Format.

4–46 844 Series Settings

 Special Fields
The following fields are available only when using the delimited
transport format.

Transmit Begin—The first character in the data transport format.

Transmit End—The last character in the data transport format.
Set End—The last character that follows the selected Set fields in the
data transport format.
Replicate End—The last character that follows the selected Rep fields
in the data transport format.
Field Begin—The character that precedes each field in the data
transport format.
Field End—The character that will follow each field in the data
transport format.

Settings 844 Series 4–47

 Special Field Reference Table
ACK acknowledge
BEL bell
BS back space
CAN cancel
CR carriage return
CRLF carriage return line feed
Comma comma
DC1 device control 1
DC2 device control 2
DC3 device control 3
DC4 device control 4
DLE data link escape
EM end of medium
ENQ enquiry
EOT end of transmission
ESC escape
ETB end of transmission block
ETX end of text
FF form feed
FS field selector
GS group separator
HT horizontal tab
LF line feed
NAK negative acknowledge
NUL null
RS record separator
SI shift in
SO shift out
SOH start of heading
Space space
STX start of text
SUB substitute
SYN synchronous idle
Tab tab
US unit separator
VT vertical tab

4–48 844 Series Settings

 Transport Units with Results
Transport Units with Results determines if the results are transported
with or without units.

Character Encoding
Select the type of character encoding desired for transmitting data:
ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-8 without BOM, Unicode, Unicode without BOM.

Include Unanalyzed Samples

Select whether to include unanalyzed samples in the transport.

Editing Transports
1. Select Settings, and then select Transports.
2. Select a Transport.

3. Select Edit . Transports can be prioritized by selecting from

Name, Description, Last Used, or Last Modified. Refer to Creating
Transports, page 4–44, for instructions to edit transport
parameters.

4. Select Preview on the Action Bar to evaluate the setup of

the transport.

5. Select Print to print the transport report.

Analyte Units Tab

For more information on setting analyte units, refer to Analyte Units
Tab, page 4–6.

Samples Tab
For more information on setting the transport layout, refer to Samples
Tab, page 4–35.

Settings 844 Series 4–49

 Editing Styles
For more information on editing styles, refer to Editing Styles,
page 4–11.

Transport Output
1. Select the set(s) to transport.

2. Select Output on the Action bar.

3. Select the Transports tab.

4. Select the Transport format. If only one is available, it will be

automatically selected.
5. Select one of the following options:
· Clear—Deselects any selected transports.
· Preview—Used to see how transported data will look.
· Transport—Used to transport data.
· Close—Closes the Transport tab.

4–50 844 Series Settings

Working with User Permissions

User permissions allows the user to edit, add, include, exclude, delete,
and clone user accounts to limit what different users can change within
the software. Once user accounts are created, users can log in and out
of the software by selecting the Session button at the top of the
screen.
There are two user accounts set on the instrument by default:
Administrator and Guest.
• Administrator has complete control over user permissions. The
Administrator account permissions cannot be changed. The
purpose of the Administrator account is to set up and edit any
additional user accounts. The Administrator account is also used to
enable/disable the User Security in the software.
• The Guest account allows only read-only permission to the
software. The Guest account permissions cannot be edited.
When user permissions are enabled in the Administrator account, a
new user account can be created only by the Administrator or other
users that are set up with permission to edit user accounts. In order to
add, edit, delete or clone a user, the currently logged in user must
have permission to edit user accounts and enter their password.
The Remote Query (RQ) option must be enabled on the security key
in order to allow mobile application access to user accounts. Refer to
Adding Options to the Registration Key, page 2–36, for more
information.

Enabling User Permissions for the Administrator Account

User Policies can be set to ensure that safe security practices are
followed by all users. These features are especially important when the
Remote Query option is being used, as well as when data is reviewed
remotely, when data may be accessed over the Internet.
The User Policies field is available only when editing the Administrator
user account. The User Policy Domain option in the User Policies
section controls which set of users are bound by the policies.

1. Select Settings, then Users, and then select Administrator.

2. Select Edit on the Action Bar.

3. Enter your password if prompted to do so. The user permissions

screen appears.

4. Select the box next to Enable User Security. Select Yes to enable
user security.

5. Select the box next to User Policy Domain and choose the users
group to be affected by the user policy settings: No Users,
Mobile Users Only, or All Users.

Settings 844 Series 4–51

 6. Select and edit parameters to create the desired user security
requirements as follows.

Minimum Password Length—enter the desired minimum

number of characters that must make up a password. The value
may range from 0 to 14.
Minimum Password Age—enter the desired minimum number
of days between password changes. Minimum password age and
password history prevents a user from cycling through a set of
passwords to reuse a favorite password.
Maximum Password Age—enter the desired number of days
after a password change before the password becomes invalid
and must be changed. A dialog box displays when a user tries to
log in with an expired password, requiring a password change.
The value may range from 1 to 999 days.
Enforce Password History—enter the desired number of prior
passwords that the system will remember for a user. Users may
not set a new password to one that is in their password history.
The value may range from 0 to 24.

7. Complete steps 5 through 11 of Adding a New User Account,

page 4–54.

8. Select Save on the Action Bar when done.

4–52 844 Series Settings

 Adding a New User Account

1. Select Settings, and then select Users. A list of users appears.

2. Select Add on the Action Bar.

3. Enter a password.

4. Enter the Text Message Address and Email, if desired. Refer to

Setting Up Notifications, page 4–62, for more information.

Settings 844 Series 4–53

 5. Select and edit parameters to create the desired user security
requirements as follows.
The Text Message Address, Email, and Allow Mobile Application
Access fields appear only with the RQ option enabled. The Allow
Remote Control Access appears only with the RSL, RC, or RQ option
enabled.

6. Next to Auto Logout When Inactive, select Yes or No.

7. Next to Auto Logout Delay, enter the length of inactivity (in

minutes) before the software automatically logs out the user.

8. Next to Allow Mobile Application Access, select Yes to allow the

user’s credentials to be used by the Cornerstone mobile or a
custom remote control app to view instrument data.

9. Next to Allow Remote Control Access, select Yes to allow the

user’s credentials to be used by a custom remote control app to
control the instrument.

4–54 844 Series Settings

 10. Select Custom, Full, or Basic in the permissions field.
Custom—Allows you to customize user permissions individually
from the Menu Bar items: Analysis, Diagnostics, Settings, and
Instrument.
Full—Changes every user permission setting to “All,” and the
user may edit everything in the software with the exception of the
Administrator’s account.
Basic—Gives the user permission to perform common tasks in
the software in order to run the instrument. The user is not
allowed to perform calculations or edit users.

11. All or None may be selected from the list of Menu Bar items to
choose what the user may access. Certain functions within these
Menu Bar items, such as Editable or Read Only, may also be
selected for the user account by selecting the expand/collapse
arrow next to the Menu Bar item’s name. Some is selectable only
if the menu bar items have a mixture of Editable and Read-Only
functions selected.

12. Select Save on the Action Bar when done. The new user will now
appear in the list of users.

Settings 844 Series 4–55

 Editing User Account Settings

1. Select Settings, and then select Users. A list of users appears.

2. To edit a user account, select the user from the list by selecting
the orb next to their name and then selecting Edit on the Action
Bar. Enter the password if prompted to do so.

3. Complete steps 5 through 11, as desired, of Adding a New User

Account, page 4–54.

4. Select Save on the Action Bar when done.

Deleting a User Account

1. Select Settings, and then select Users. A list of users appears.

2. From the list of users, select the user account to delete by

selecting in the orb next to the user account, and then selecting
Exclude on the Action Bar.

Administrator and Guest cannot be deleted from the list of user

accounts.

4–56 844 Series Settings

 3. Reselect the user account to delete by selecting the orb next to
the user account. Select Delete on the Action Bar to delete the
user account.

Cloning a User Account

1. Select Settings, and then select Users. A list of users appears.

2. From the list of users, select the user account to clone for a new
user account.

3. Select Clone on the Action Bar. A copy of the selected user account will
appear in the list of users.

4. Select the new user account and edit any necessary information by
selecting Edit on the Action Bar.

Settings 844 Series 4–57

 Selecting a Different User Account

1. Select the Session button on the Title bar.

2. A window pops up that gives you the option to select a different user
account, log out, go back, or exit the software.

3. To change the user account, select the name of the currently

logged in user.

4. Select the desired user account from the list of users and
select Enter.

5. Enter the password if necessary.

4–58 844 Series Settings

 Resetting the Password for the Administrator Account
This process can be used to reset only the password of the built-in
Administrator user account.

1. Close the software, and then restart it.

2. Select Administrator under Username.

3. Select Reset Password.

4. Contact LECO Service and relay the challenge key found on the Reset
Password screen.

5. LECO Service personnel will provide a challenge response.

6. Enter the challenge response in the appropriate area.

7. Enter and confirm a new password.

8. Select the Enter button.

Settings 844 Series 4–59

LECO Cornerstone for Mobile Devices

Depending on the instrument configuration, the following screens

may not appear exactly as the screens on your instrument or
mobile device.
LECO Cornerstone Mobile is a subscription-based service that allows
smart phones, tablets, and PCs to access analytical data from LECO
Cornerstone instruments. These devices can view analysis results,
combustion plots, maintenance status, method details, current system
temperatures, pressures, and more. LECO Cornerstone for mobile
devices is a viewer application only; the instrument may not be
controlled from the mobile device. LECO currently offers support for
iPhone®, iPad®, Android® phones, Android tablets, and Microsoft®
Windows® 10 PC and phones. LECO Cornerstone for mobile devices is
available from the LECO website at http://www.leco.com/cornerstone-
mobile and in the iTunes Apps Store, Google Play, and the Microsoft
Apps store.
The Remote Query (RQ) option must be enabled on the security key in
order to access mobile settings within the Cornerstone brand software.
The subscription must be processed prior to activation within the
Cornerstone brand software. The following terms are available: 1 Year
Cornerstone Mobile Subscription 619-592-882-B/O and 3 Year
Cornerstone Mobile Subscription 619-592-899-B/O. Adding Options to
the Registration Key, page 2–36 , for more information. The RQ option
is set with an expiration date and must be renewed periodically.
In order to access LECO Cornerstone from your mobile device, you
must have the proper User Permissions set up in the software of your
instrument. Enable User Security and Allow Mobile Application Access
must be set to “Yes.” Refer to the Working with User Permissions,
page 4–51.

Security Considerations
Each enabled Cornerstone instrument transmits a laboratory name and
laboratory key to the server and remains connected to the server
using a “long-polling” technique. When activated by the user, the
mobile device transmits the user-supplied laboratory name, laboratory
key, user id, and user password to the server. For each Cornerstone
instrument connected to the server with a matching laboratory name
and key, the server forwards the user id and password to the
instrument for authentication.
The internet-based server passes all authentication and instrument
data between the mobile devices and the Cornerstone instruments.
User ids, passwords, and instrument data are not stored on the
internet-based server. Data is only retained by the Cornerstone
instrument itself. As soon as the Cornerstone instrument is
disconnected from the server, its data is no longer accessible to any
mobile device.

4–60 844 Series Settings

 For those who prefer to avoid the public internet, LECO can supply the
server software to be deployed on the customer’s own private network
as a Network Query (NQ) option. The RQ option is still required when
using the NQ option; the NQ option alone will not enable RQ capability.
It is the customer’s responsibility to equip the mobile devices with
access to the company’s private network, possibly through VPN or a
corporate-secured Wi-Fi.

Setting Up Mobile Connectivity

The standard connectivity infrastructure consists of a publicly
accessible internet-based server, which the mobile devices connect to
using the https secure protocol using cellular networks or Wi-Fi
connectivity.
Cornerstone instruments also connect to the server using the https
secure protocol using customer-supplied internet connectivity to the
instrument. No special firewall accommodations are needed in the
laboratory beyond what is required for web browsing.
1. In the software, select Settings, and then select Networking.
2. Select Mobile Settings.

3. Ensure Server Communication Enabled is set to Yes.

4. Enter the Lab Name and Lab Key in the appropriate fields. The
Lab Name and Lab Key should be set up by the Administrator.
Lab Name—Segregates instruments into logical groups for
mobile access. The user can choose any name desired for the lab
name and each Cornerstone instrument with a similar lab name
will be grouped together and viewed together. An Administrator
can provide certain users mobile access to only specific
instruments by controlling the lab names.

Settings 844 Series 4–61

 Lab Key—Provides a safeguard for login credential uniqueness.
The Lab Key can be made as complex as necessary. Enter any
desired value for the key, or use the Generate Unique Lab Key
button to have a unique key automatically generated.
5. Test the connection to the mobile server by selecting the Test
Connection button.
6. On the mobile device, download LECO Cornerstone if you have
not already done so.
7. Enter the user credentials, and then select login. The Username,
Password, Lab Name, and Lab key must match those set up in the
Cornerstone instrument.

Setting Up Notifications
The RQ option can be used to notify users of instrument events.
1. In the software, navigate to Settings Ø Networking Ø Email
Server Parameters.
2. Select the desired notification server by completing the following
steps.
· To send notifications using LECO's Cornerstone Cloud
Server:
a) Select the parameter field next to Notification Server.
b) Select Cornerstone Cloud Server in the Notification
Server window at the bottom of the screen, and then
select Enter.
If the Cornerstone Health Management (CHM) participation level is
Not Specified, a notice will appear. CHM-0 or CHM-1 must be chosen
to use the Cornerstone Cloud Server. Refer to Cornerstone® Health
Management, page 5–36.
· To send notifications using another server:
a) Select the parameter field next to Notification Server.
b) Select Manual in the Notification Server window at the
bottom of the screen, and then select Enter.
c) Enter information for applicable fields in the Email
Notification Information area. These settings are used to
set up the instrument to send emails. The information
for these fields is typically provided through an IT
department within the user’s organization.

4–62 844 Series Settings

 d) OPTIONAL: To test the settings entered in the Email
Server Parameters, enter an email address in the
parameter field next to Address, and then select Send.
An email is received at the entered email address that
says “Test email sent from Cornerstone instrument….”

3. Select Settings, and then select Notifications. This screen displays

the types of events that users can be notified of.
4. Select an event, and then select Edit in order to change the
notification settings for the event.

5. Select the Maximum Notification Frequency to the desired unit of

time or to set the frequency to each occurrence of the event.

Settings 844 Series 4–63

 6. Set the Notification Frequency Value to the desired interval for
notifications of the event.
7. Set the notification channels for each user.
For users who are set to receive notifications via email or text
message, their email and text message addresses must be entered
on their Users screen in order to receive the notifications. For more
information on Working with User Permissions, page 4–51.
8. Select Save on the Action Bar when done.
9. Select Settings, and then select Users.
10. Select the desired user, then select Edit, and then enter a
password if applicable.
11. Enter the appropriate information in the fields for Email and Text
Message Address if notifications will be received in those forms.

The text message address can be found in the documentation for the
phone service; it can also be retrieved by sending a new SMS (not
MMS) text message to an email address from the phone. Contact the
phone service to find out if your phone is set up for SMS or MMS text
messages.

4–64 844 Series Settings

 Using Assign Notify

The Assign Notify button can be selected to alert the user

when a replicate analysis is completed.
1. From the Analysis screen, select an analyzing or unanalyzed
replicate.

2. Select Assign Notify .

3. When the replicate to which Assign Notify has been added completes
analysis, will be sent via the channel selected in the Notifications settings
screen. Refer to Setting Up Notifications, page 4–62.

Settings 844 Series 4–65

This page intentionally left blank.

4–66 844 Series Settings

5 Instrument
The Instrument chapter describes common procedures and options
related to configuring the analyzer.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING

During installation and operation of this instrument, the
ON/OFF switch must be easily accessible. The ON/OFF switch
is located on the left side of the instrument.

Illustrations .................................................................................. 5–4

Automation .................................................................................. 5–5
Auto Cleaner ........................................................................... 5–5
Shuttle Loader ......................................................................... 5–6
Homing the Shuttle Loader ................................................... 5–6
Adding Options to the Registration Key .................................. 5–7
Shuttle Loader Definitions .................................................... 5–7
General Parameters ............................................................. 5–8
Calibration ......................................................................... 5–8
Calibration Prerequisites.................................................. 5–8
Calibration Steps............................................................ 5–9
Pedestal ........................................................................ 5–9
Carousel ..................................................................... 5–10
Disposal ...................................................................... 5–11
Full............................................................................. 5–11
Post Calibration............................................................ 5–12
Reasons to Calibrate..................................................... 5–12
Maintenance ..................................................................... 5–12
Analysis and Operation ...................................................... 5–12
Installing the Balance .................................................................. 5–13
Preparing the Balance ............................................................. 5–13
Setting the Data Characters Parameters.................................... 5–14
Setting Up Communication with the Balance.............................. 5–14
Secura Balance ................................................................. 5–14
Installing the USB Driver............................................... 5–15

Instrument 844 Series 5–1

 Entris II Balance ............................................................... 5–18
Configuring the Software......................................................... 5–19
Testing the Balance ........................................................... 5–21
Resetting the Balance ............................................................. 5–21
Data Management ....................................................................... 5–22
Database .............................................................................. 5–22
Validating the Database .......................................................... 5–22
Database Information ............................................................. 5–22
Backing Up the Database ........................................................ 5–22
Automatic ........................................................................ 5–23
Restoring the Database........................................................... 5–23
Choosing a Startup Database................................................... 5–24
Exporting the Database........................................................... 5–24
Viewing Message History ......................................................... 5–24
Maintenance Counters History.................................................. 5–25
History.................................................................................. 5–25
Detectors ................................................................................... 5–27
Infrared (IR) Cells .................................................................. 5–28
Graph of IR cell voltage as a function of time........................ 5–28
Table of IR cell settings and readings................................... 5–28
Maintenance ............................................................................... 5–30
Counters ............................................................................... 5–30
Log Entry ......................................................................... 5–30
Adding or Editing Maintenance Counters .............................. 5–30
General Maintenance .............................................................. 5–31
Hardware Calibrations............................................................. 5–31
Error Reports ......................................................................... 5–31
CAN Error Count .................................................................... 5–32
Using the Service Key ............................................................. 5–32
Remote Access ........................................................................... 5–33
Remote Sample Login ............................................................. 5–34
Remote Control...................................................................... 5–35
Data Transmit........................................................................ 5–35
Analysis Results ..................................................................... 5–35
Remote Connection ................................................................ 5–35
XML Command Table .............................................................. 5–35

5–2 844 Series Instrument

 System ...................................................................................... 5–36
Cornerstone® Health Management............................................ 5–36
Updating the Registration Key, Software, or Remote Query ......... 5–37
Updating the Registration Key............................................. 5–37
Updating the Software ....................................................... 5–38
Product Information Bulletins......................................... 5–38
Scheduling Gas Standby.......................................................... 5–39
Gas Standby Mode ............................................................ 5–39
Gas Standby Pedestal Down Gas State................................. 5–39
Gas Standby Time ............................................................. 5–39
Scheduling Gas Wake Up......................................................... 5–40
Disabling an Analyte ............................................................... 5–40
Leak Check............................................................................ 5–40
Configuring Other System Settings........................................... 5–41
Dust Filter Heater.............................................................. 5–41
Dust Filter Temperature ..................................................... 5–41
Back Pressure Control ........................................................ 5–41
Determining Barometric Pressure ................................... 5–42
Gas Doser ........................................................................ 5–43
Auto Increment Sample Name ............................................ 5–43
Printer .................................................................................. 5–43

Instrument 844 Series 5–3

Illustrations

Figure 5-1 Horizontal Gripper and Carousel Assembly Offset.................. 5–11

Figure 5-2 Remote Access Screen ...................................................... 5–34

5–4 844 Series Instrument

Automation

If the auto cleaner has been added as a kit, it may be necessary to

update the registration key. Refer to Adding Options to the
Registration Key, page 2–36.
The available automation items will vary, depending on instrument
configuration.

Auto Cleaner
1. Select Instrument, and then select Automation.
2. Select General Parameters under Auto Cleaner to determine the
parameters for the auto cleaner operation.
3. For Auto Cleaner State, select:
· Enabled.
· Disabled.
4. For Number of Clean Cycles, enter the number of brush strokes to
run each time the combustion tube is cleaned.
5. For Analysis Clean Interval, enter the number of analyses to
count before an auto clean is performed. Enter a value between
1 and 200. For example, entering 1 means the auto clean cycle
will run after every analysis. It is recommended to run auto clean
after every analysis.
6. Analysis Count displays the number of analyses that have
been run.

Instrument 844 Series 5–5

 Shuttle Loader
The shuttle loader is controlled by motors. The SL10 has 3 motors, and
the SL60 has 4 motors. The shuttle loader function for monitoring and
calibrating is available in the following software location: Instrument Ø
Automation Ø Shuttle Loader.
Running the shuttle loader requires Cornerstone® brand software
version 1.81 or newer, as well as a registration key configured for a
SL60 or SL10 shuttle loader.
ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES
POSSIBLE SHUTTLE LOADER MOTOR DAMAGE
The shuttle loader motors have components that are sensitive
to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). All handling should be
completed using proper ESD protection.
CAUTION
POSSIBLE SHUTTLE LOADER MOTOR DAMAGE
Never remove or reinstall any of the shuttle loader motors
without performing the maintenance step in the following
software location:
Instrument Ø Automation Ø Shuttle Loader Ø Maintenance
The motors can be damaged if removed while power is
applied.

Homing the Shuttle Loader

Shuttle Loader Homing is not applicable to all instrument
configurations.
When the Cornerstone brand software is started, a screen appears
prompting the user to move the shuttle loader horizontally so that the
grippers can rotate without hitting the pedestal or crucible trays. This
screen can also be reached by navigating to Instrument Ø
Automation Ø Shuttle Loader Ø General Parameters, and then
selecting Initialize Shuttle Loader Motors.

5–6 844 Series Instrument

 Follow the onscreen prompts to home the shuttle loader.

Adding Options to the Registration Key

Refer to Adding Options to the Registration Key, page 2–36, for more
information.

Shuttle Loader Definitions

Rotary Motor—Moves the crucible grippers clockwise and
counterclockwise.
Horizontal Motor—Moves the rotary motor/gripper assembly
horizontally between the pedestal and crucible carousel.
Carousel Motor—Moves the crucibles into a position for the gripper
assembly to pick them up.
Vertical Motor (SL60 only)—Moves the crucible carousel vertically to
place the various platters into position.
Cold Gripper—Holds a crucible that has not been combusted.
Hot Gripper—Holds a crucible that the software recognizes as
combusted.

Instrument 844 Series 5–7

 General Parameters
Shuttle Loader State—Indicates if the shuttle loader hardware is
enabled and should be used during analysis. The choices are:
Enabled - Use in Analysis; Enabled – Do Not Use In Analysis; and
Disabled.
Check Standard Out of Range Behavior—Select the action to take
when a check standard is analyzed and found to be out of range:
continue without warning, continue with warning, or stop analysis.
Refer to Creating and Editing Standards, page 4–39.
Initialize Shuttle Loader Motors—Initializes the motors used by the
shuttle loader. This process includes powering On each motor,
checking the version of firmware installed on the motor (and
upgrading if necessary), and finding the home position of the motor.
This process will be performed automatically when Cornerstone is
started and can be initiated whenever necessary from this screen.
Motor Status—Provides status information on the state of each motor
used by the shuttle loader. It also verifies that the crucible bucket is
correctly installed and that all of the motors are homed.
The shuttle loader hardware cannot be used during an analysis if either
of these features displays a warning.
· If the motors are not homed, select the Initialize Shuttle Loader
Motors button to the left of the warning.
· If the bucket location is not found, install the bucket on the
bucket/loader plate and adjust the magnet until the software
recognizes the switch.

Calibration
Each of the motors has a set of defined positions that need to be
calibrated. This section describes the steps for performing calibration
of these positions using Cornerstone brand software.
It does not address the various mechanical adjustments that are also
available on the shuttle loader hardware for properly placing the
mechanism.

Calibration Prerequisites
In order for the shuttle loader to be calibrated, the motors must be
powered On and have had their home position set. This is indicated in
the software location: Instrument Ø Automation Ø Shuttle Loader Ø
General Parameters.
Select Initialize Shuttle Loader Motors to power On or initiate the
homing process. This process may take several minutes depending
upon the version of firmware present on each of the motors.

5–8 844 Series Instrument

 Calibration Steps
Shuttle loader calibration is performed in the following software
location:
Instrument Ø Automation Ø Shuttle Loader Ø Calibration.
The Calibration screen has four subsections and each is comprised of a
set of calibration parameters, and calibration and life cycle controls.
It is recommended that the calibration be performed in the order of
the subsections:
1. Pedestal
2. Carousel
3. Disposal
4. Full
The Full calibration subsection is used as a summary of the previous
settings.
Start Calibration will place the motors into position and allow for real-
time adjustment of the calibration parameters for tuning.
The default calibration parameters will place the motors close to the
desired locations.
Start Life Cycle will test out the calibration parameters with a crucible
in a set of actions confined to the area being calibrated. Adjustment of
the calibration parameters may also be performed while the life cycle
is being performed.
Stop Calibration/Stop Life Cycle, Save, Cancel, or navigating to
another subsection will halt a calibration or life cycle process.
If a motor experiences an error at any time during a calibration or life
cycle process, the process will be terminated, the motors will return to
a safe position, and the cause of the error will be displayed. A common
example of this would be moving a motor too far during a calibration
such that it physically runs into a mechanical dead stop, thereby
producing a motor stall condition.

Pedestal
Use the Pedestal subsection to calibrate the following:
Rotary Cold to Pedestal Position Offset—The position of the cold
grippers over the pedestal.
Horizontal Position Offset at Pedestal—The position of the
horizontal motor when at the pedestal.
Lift Position Offset When Raised—The height the lift motor will rise
when lifting crucibles off of the pedestal.

The following automation controls may be helpful in determining the

calibrations:
Toggle State of Cold Gripper—Open or closed.
Toggle State of Lift Motor—Up or down.

Instrument 844 Series 5–9

 If the height of the pedestal is determined to be too low during the
calibration procedure, refer to the kit instructions for the proper
procedure to adjust the pedestal height.
It is recommended that this be the first calibration performed as the
pedestal height is fixed and all other shuttle loader calibrations will be
affected by the value of the lift motor offset set in this subsection.
The life cycle sequence in this sub-section will repeatedly grab a
crucible that is placed on the pedestal, lift it off, and place it back on
the pedestal.

Carousel
Use the Carousel subsection to calibrate the following:
Carousel Home Position—The rotation of the carousel assembly.
Rotary Cold to Carousel Position Offset—The position of the cold
grippers over the carousel.
Horizontal Position Offset at Carousel—The position of the horizontal
motor when at the carousel.
Vertical Home Position—The height of the carousel assembly.
Lift Position Offset When Raised—The height the lift motor will rise
when lifting crucibles off of the carousel. Note that changes to this value
here will change the same value on the Pedestal subsection.
The following automation controls may be helpful in determining the
calibrations:
Toggle State of Cold Gripper—Open or closed.
Toggle State of Lift Motor—Up or down.
The life cycle sequence in this subsection will repeatedly grab a
crucible that is placed on the pedestal and place it on carousel location
A1. It will then return it to the pedestal and repeat the pattern. Place
crucibles in the A2 and A10 positions of the carousel to ensure that the
opened gripper arms do not touch the crucibles next to the pickup
position.
The system is properly aligned when the pedestal, rotary motor, and
pick-up position on the carousel are co-linear.

5–10 844 Series Instrument

 Figure 5-1
Horizontal Gripper and Carousel Assembly Offset

Disposal
Use the Disposal subsection to calibrate the following:
Rotary Hot To Dump Position Offset—The position of the hot
grippers over the dump position.
The following automation control may be helpful in determining the
calibrations:
Toggle State of Hot Gripper—Open or closed.

Full
The Full subsection provides access to all the calibration parameters in
the Pedestal and Carousel subsections. It is intended as an end-to-end
test of the parameters. The life cycle tests in this subsection are
helpful for verifying the consistency of placing and retrieving crucibles
from different carousel locations. For the SL60, the life cycle
performed in this subsection allows for the selection of various
carousel positions.
· A1, F1—the life cycle will take a crucible from the pedestal and
place it on carousel location A1. It will then move that crucible
back to the pedestal and then place it on carousel location F1. This
pattern will be repeated until the life cycle is stopped.

· A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1—this life cycle is similar to the previous
one, with the exception that the crucible will be placed in the
number 1 position on all platters.

· All 60 positions—this life cycle is the most complete, as it will move

the crucible from the pedestal to all 60 available positions.

Instrument 844 Series 5–11

 Post Calibration
Once the calibration has been performed, the calibration parameters
must be saved in order to be applied.
· Select Save in the Action bar to save the calibration parameters.
Or
· Select Cancel to revert any calibration parameter changes.

Reasons to Calibrate
Once the calibration process is completed, the calibration parameters
should remain in effect, even if the Cornerstone brand software is shut
down and restarted. However, a new calibration is required to ensure
proper and accurate crucible retrieval, placement, and disposal in the
following circumstances:
· Maintenance is performed in which a motor is removed or replaced.
· The loader hardware position is physically adjusted.

Maintenance
For information on maintaining the shuttle loader, refer to Shuttle
Loader, page 6–56.

Analysis and Operation

When the shuttle loader mechanism is enabled, the main analysis
screen will display a field for specifying a loader location for each
replicate. Activating this field will cause the loader location keyboard to
be displayed. Refer to Setting Display Settings, page 4–5.
This keyboard provides for the selection of the location (A1 through
F10) for the replicate. It also provides controls for ease of setting the
loader location of any existing replicates that follow the replicate being
edited.
· Update locations of remaining unanalyzed replicates?
Toggling ‘Yes’ on this control will update the loader location value
for all unanalyzed replicates that follow the replicate being
analyzed, incrementing their locations sequentially.

· Only update replicates within the current set?

This field applies only if the previous field has a value of ‘Yes’.
Toggling ‘Yes’ on this control will only apply the behavior described
above to unanalyzed replicates within the sample set containing
the replicate currently being edited.

If the loader location field for a replicate is blank, a manual analysis

will be performed when pressing the Analyze button and the replicate
is marked as the next to analyze.

5–12 844 Series Instrument

Installing the Balance
A Sartorius® analytical balance is available as an option. The following
procedures should be performed to install a balance. For additional
information, refer to the manual supplied with the balance.
Two balances are available: Secura and Entris II. When the procedures
in this section are noted to be different, follow the appropriate
instructions for the balance being used.
The instrument will only support Sartorius analytical balances. Other
balances may be used; however, LECO is not responsible for their
installation or proper operation.
After the balance is set, do not change any of the configuration
parameters. The configuration parameters can be changed to custom
configure the balance, but only after the installation procedure is
completed and the balance is properly operating with the instrument.
To restore the balance to factory defaults, refer to Resetting the
Balance, page 5–21.

1. Set up the balance in the location where it will be used. Be sure

the balance location chosen is on a stable, even surface that is
not exposed to vibrations. Refer to the manual supplied with the
balance for more information. Refer to Preparing the Balance,
page 5–13.
2. Follow the procedure in Setting the Data Characters Parameters,
page 5–14.
3. Set up communication between the balance and instrument
software. Refer to Setting Up Communication with the Balance,
page 5–14.
4. Test the balance to ensure proper operation. Refer to Testing the
Balance, page 5–21.
5. Complete the Warranty Registration Card that came with the
balance, and then return it to the balance manufacturer.

Preparing the Balance

1. Unpack the balance and assemble it as shown in the manual
supplied with the balance.
2. Plug the AC adapter, supplied with the balance, into facility
power.
3. Connect the AC adapter cable to the power-input jack on the rear
of the balance.
4. Level the balance by completing the appropriate step depending
on your balance model.
A. For Secura balance only: Level the balance by following
the instruction manual supplied with the balance.
B. For Entris II balance only: Manually adjust the two front
feet until the air bubble is centered within the circle of the
level indicator.

Instrument 844 Series 5–13

 Setting the Data Characters Parameters
The parameters do not have to be adjusted for the Entris II balance to
work with the Cornerstone® brand software.

Set the data character according to the instructions in the

manufacturer’s manual supplied with the balance.

Setting Up Communication with the Balance

The following section explains how to set up communication between
the computer and the external balance.
Complete the appropriate set of instructions depending on your
balance model.
Secura Balance: Secura Balance, following
Entris II Balance: Entris II Balance, page 5–18

Secura Balance
Complete the instructions in this section for the Secura balance only.
For the Entris II balance, complete the following steps in Entris II
Balance, page 5–18.

A USB driver is required to connect the balance to a USB port on the

computer. The driver creates a Virtual COM on the computer, which
emulates a serial interface (COM port). The USB Driver is stored on the
balance and can be downloaded by connecting the balance to the
computer with a USB Mini-B to USB Type-A cable.
If using Microsoft® Windows® XP, then Service Pack 3 or newer is
required to install the driver.

5–14 844 Series Instrument

 Installing the USB Driver
1. Connect the balance to the PC using the supplied USB cable.

2. To access the balance systems settings, select (Setup) from

the balance menu on the balance control panel.
3. To access the USB mass storage menu option on the balance, go
to More Settings, and then select USB Mass Storage.

4. To connect the balance memory to the PC, select Connect.

Instrument 844 Series 5–15

 5. To install the installation program for the USB driver on the PC,
select the appropriate removable data carrier (in this case, the
E: drive), and then select the Driver folder.

6. Select the appropriate Windows version for your PC, and then
select the folder.

7. Select the file called InstallDriver.exe and follow the onscreen

instructions.

5–16 844 Series Instrument

 8. Once the driver is installed, Direct data transfer to PC is available
for both balance operating modes (PC-SBI and PC-xBPI). Select
Disconnect to return to the main balance menu.

9. The USB CDC Serial Port connection appears in the Device

Manager of the PC under Connections.

10. If the software does not recognize the balance upon installation of
the driver and selection of the correct COM port, complete the
following steps:
A. Change to a different COM port.
B. Turn Off the LECO software
C. Restart the LECO software.
D. Select the new COM port.
11. Continue to Configuring the Software, page 5–19.

Instrument 844 Series 5–17

 Entris II Balance
A driver is not required to be downloaded for the Entris II balance. The
balance emulates a serial interface (COM port) when the balance is
connected to the computer with a USB-C to USB-A cable.
1. Connect the balance to the PC using the supplied USB cable.
2. The USB CDC Serial Port connection appears in the Device
Manager of the PC under Connections.

3. If the software does not recognize the balance upon installation of

the driver and selection of the correct COM port, complete the
following steps:
A. Change to a different COM port.
B. Turn Off the LECO software
C. Restart the LECO software.
D. Select the new COM port.

5–18 844 Series Instrument

 Configuring the Software
Select the communication port in the LECO software that was specified
in step 9 of Setting Up Communication with the Balance, or in step 2
of Entris II Balance, page 5–18.
The following screenshot illustration is an example only and may or
may not be applicable to specific procedures.
1. Select the Instrument tab, and then select Balance.

Instrument 844 Series 5–19

 2. The Connection Type is set to RS-232 for the serial transmission
of data and is not editable.
3. Select the communication port the balance is connected through
by selecting the Port box, and then selecting the appropriate port
from the list.
4. Select the baud rate for the balance by selecting the Baud Rate
box, and then selecting the desired baud rate from the list.
5. Select the Parity by selecting the Parity box and then selecting
either odd or even.
6. Select the Data Bits by selecting the Data Bits box and then
selecting the desired value from the list.
7. Select Stop Bits by selecting the Stop Bits box and then selecting
either 1 or 2 from the list. Refer to the Sartorius Instruction
Manual.
8. Select the desired decimal places to set the number of digits to be
displayed after the decimal place for the sample mass. You may
either select the Decimal Place box, and then set the decimal
place, or use the slider. The decimal place range is 1 through 6.
9. Set the balance to Manual Data Output by completing the
appropriate steps for your balance model.
For Secura balance only:

A. From the main software screen on the balance, select

(Menu), and then select (Setup).

B. Select Printout from the Settings menu, and then select
Manual Print from the list.
C. Select Manual Print Format, and then select Value w/o
Identifier from the list.
D. To return to the main menu, select the arrow in the upper left
corner.
For Entris II balance only:
A. From the main software screen on the balance, select

(Menu).

B. Use the (Down arrow) to scroll down the main menu

until “DATA.OUT.” is highlighted. Then, select

(Confirm).
C. From the “DATA.OUT.” menu, select the “COM.SBI” menu.

Then, select (Confirm).

5–20 844 Series Instrument

 D. From the “COM.SBI” menu, select the “COM.OUTP.”

parameter. Then, select (Confirm).

E. From the “COM.OUTP.” parameter menu, use the

(Down arrow) until “IND.AFTR.” is highlighted (for manual

data output after stability). Then, select (Confirm).

F. Select the (Back arrow) until the Main screen is reached.

If a parameter has been changed, the balance will beep and appear to
reset itself when the Main screen has been reached after exiting the
menu.

Testing the Balance

Select the Get Mass button. The weight displayed in the software
screen should match the weight displayed on the balance control
panel.

Resetting the Balance

Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction manual supplied with the
balance. Consult the LECO Service Department before resetting the
balance to factory defaults.

Instrument 844 Series 5–21

Data Management

Database
The database is an organized collection of information from each
analysis. The database keeps track of setup parameters, calibration
settings, and other information, and it is vital to the software and
instrument's performance.

Validating the Database

1. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Data Management Ø
Database Validator.
2. Choose Yes or No for the options of tasks to be performed during
validation.
3. Select Validate to begin validation. The database validator log
indicates when the database validation is finished.
4. Select Cancel to stop validation if necessary.
5. OPTIONAL: After validation, select Copy to copy the database
validator log.

Database Information
In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Data Management Ø
Database Information to view the location of the database and the
number of sets and reps that have been analyzed.

Backing Up the Database

In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Data Management Ø
Database Backup to set the database backup parameters for both
automatic and manual backups.
Backups can be scheduled to occur automatically at the same time of
day and at the desired frequency. Refer to Automatic, page 5–23.

To manually back up the database at any time, select Backup

from the Action Bar.
1. Select the desired backup location.
· To use the default backup location, select No next to Use
Custom Location. The default backup location appears next to
Location.
· To choose a different backup location, select Yes next to Use
Custom Location. Select the box next to Location and choose
the desired file location, and then select Accept.
The field next to Last Backup displays the date and time that the last
backup occurred.

5–22 844 Series Instrument

 2. Select Yes or No next to Delete Old Samples After Backup.
· If Yes is selected, enter the age (in days) of the samples to
keep in the box next to Delete Samples Older Than. Sample
sets that are not referenced by functions, such as Calibration,
that do not have any unanalyzed (or analyzing) reps, and that
are older than the age entered next to Delete Samples Older
Than will be removed from the current database after they
are backed up.
· If No is selected, samples will remain in the current database
after they are backed up.
3. Select Save to save the settings and exit this screen, or continue
with Automatic, following, to schedule an automatic backup.

Automatic
1. Turn On automatic backups by selecting On next to Automatic.
Select Off to disable automatic backups.
2. Select the box next to Interval, and then enter the desired
backup interval (in days).
3. Select the box next to Time, and then enter the time of day for
the backup to occur. It is recommended that you choose a time
when the software will not be analyzing samples and no one will
be using the instrument.
Once saved, the box next to Next Backup displays when the next
scheduled backup will occur.
4. Select Save to save the settings and exit this screen.

Restoring the Database

1. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Data Management Ø
Database Restore to set the database restoration parameters.
2. Select the location of the database backup to be restored.
· To use the default restoration location, select No next to Use
Custom Location. The default restoration location appears
next to Location. The default restoration location will be the
location set in Backing Up the Database, page 5–22.
· To choose a different restoration location, select Yes next to
Use Custom Location. Select the box next to Location, then
choose the file location, and then select Accept.
3. Select the box next to Backed Up Database to Restore, and
specify which backup to restore. The backups are named by the
date and time that they were backed up, and the most recent are
listed first.
4. Select the box next to Restored Database Name, and then enter a
new name for the restored database, if desired.

Instrument 844 Series 5–23

 5. Select Restore from the Action Bar to restore the
database. A new, restored database is created.
6. Open the new database by completing the actions in Choosing a
Startup Database, following.

Choosing a Startup Database

To open a different database, exit the software, and then follow the
instructions in Starting the Software, page 3–16.

Exporting the Database

Complete the following steps to create a simplified database, designed
for starting fresh. The exported database will contain only sample sets
associated with method calculations.
1. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Data Management Ø
Database Export.
2. To choose a new export location, select the box next to Location.
The file browser opens.
3. Navigate to the location to export the database folder using the
file browser. Use the Add, Rename, and Delete buttons to modify
folders on the computer.
4. Select Accept.
5. To enter a name for the database folder, select the box next to
Name. The keyboard appears. Enter the name as desired, and
then select Enter.

6. To export the database, select Export .

7. To use an exported database, exit the software, and then follow
the instructions in Starting the Software, page 3–16.

Viewing Message History

In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Data Management Ø
Message History to view a list of messages that have recently been
displayed to the user.
Select the desired tab below the Action bar to filter the date range

before selecting Copy or Print .

Use the Start and End tabs to create custom date filters. Refer to
History, page 5–25, for instructions on using the calendar.

5–24 844 Series Instrument

 Maintenance Counters History
Select Instrument, Data Management, and then Maintenance Counters
History to view the history of maintenance performed on the
instrument.
Select the desired tab below the Action bar to filter the date range

before selecting Copy or Print .

Use the Start and End tabs to create custom date filters. Refer to
History, page 5–25, for instructions on using the calendar.

History
History is available only with the AT option. When the AT option is
activated within the software, the feature is enabled automatically and
cannot be disabled.
1. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Data Management Ø
History to access the history. Any existing history appears on the
History screen and can be exported to a file.
2. Select the box next to Time. The calendar appears.

3. Select the desired date and time for the starting date to view the
history from by using one of the following methods.
· Use the keyboard to enter the desired date and time in the
text box.
· Use the calendar to select the desired date and time.

Instrument 844 Series 5–25

 4. Select Enter.
5. Select the box next to To. The calendar appears.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set the desired date and time for the end
of the history.

If History was selected from the Methods, Standards, or

Analysis page, steps 7 through 9 do not apply.
7. Select the box next to File. A list of file types appears. Select
which file type to include in the history: All, Standard, Method, or
Sample.
8. Select Enter.
9. If Standard, Method, or Sample was selected in step 7, a box
appears in the File row and a list of all the files of that type
appears in the bottom of the screen. Select the desired files to
include in the history, and then select Enter.
10. Select the box next to User. A list of all Users appears. Select the
name of the user to include the history of changes made to the
files by that user.
11. Select the box next to Modification. A list of the types of
modifications that have been made appears. Select which types
of modifications to include in the history: All, Changed, Added,
Removed, or Tampered.

“Tampered” refers to files that have been detected as being modified

outside of the Cornerstone brand software system.
12. Select Enter.
13. If desired, select Export to export the query results, or select
Print to print them.

5–26 844 Series Instrument

Detectors
Detectors provides the means to view the settings for each detector
installed in the analyzer. A separate tab will be displayed for each
detector.
The following actions can be performed:
• Detector settings can be imported and exported by selecting the
buttons labeled Import and Export. Import new settings to
overwrite the existing settings for all detectors.

• Detector settings can be printed by selecting the button labeled

Print. A table of values will be printed for all Detectors installed in
the analyzer.

• The Check Signals button provides a way to determine if the

detectors within the instrument are working properly. Accurate
results can be measured only when the analyzer has been stable
for an appropriate amount of time. The value reported will reflect
any signal disturbances recorded during that period, so it is critical
that the detector outputs are stable, with the gas flow On, in order
to obtain results. If results are unable to be determined due to
poor input data, an exception will display at the top of the screen.
Passing results will be indicated by a “Pass” beside the result. A
“Fail” indicates that the result failed.

Instrument 844 Series 5–27

 Infrared (IR) Cells
The following information is displayed for each IR cell installed in the
analyzer.

Graph of IR cell voltage as a function of time

Table of IR cell settings and readings

• Last Modified—Displays the date and time when the detector

settings were last saved.
• Reference—Displays the initial IR cell voltage measured with no
analyte present in the carrier flow. This value is used in the IR cell
calculations to minimize the effects of long-term drift of the IR cell.
The reference voltage is stored on each IR cell so that the value
can be updated automatically if a new cell is installed into the
analyzer.

5–28 844 Series Instrument

 • Saturation—Displays the initial IR cell saturation voltage
determined with high amounts of analyte present in the carrier
flow. This value is used in the IR cell calculations to minimize the
effects of long-term drift of the IR cell and to linearize the response
of the IR cell. The saturation voltage is stored on each IR cell so
that the value can be updated automatically if a new cell is
installed into the analyzer.
• Signal, Signal-to-Noise Ratio, and Signal Quality—Selecting
the Check Signals button will calculate these values for all
detectors. Detectors that are disabled in the System screen are not
included. The calculations require the last 10 minutes of IR cell
data. To obtain a valid measure, the carrier flow should be On and
the analyzer stable for at least 10 minutes prior to selecting the
Check Signals button.
o Signal—Displays the average IR cell voltage.
o Signal-to-Noise Ratio—A ratio of the magnitude of the signal
relative to the variation of the signal.
o Signal Quality—A measure of the amount of anomalous
disturbances (spikes) present in the IR cell signal. It is a ratio
of the standard deviation of the signal divided by the median
absolute deviation.
• Tune Emitter and Perform Diagnostic Test—Displays the result
of the diagnostic test. Tuning the emitter adjusts the Average
Emitter Power for optimal IR cell performance. The gas must be On
before this test can be run.
• Emitter on Time—Displays the IR cell serial number and the total
time that the emitter has been On.

· The IR cell emitter is On whenever the carrier flow is On. No

appreciable signal should be observed when the IR cell emitter
is Off.

· Each day, the software will check the IR cell function and, if
necessary, tune the emitter to improve cell performance.

The following action can be performed:

• Run—Tunes the IR emitter and checks that the IR cell is
functioning properly.

Instrument 844 Series 5–29

Maintenance
This feature provides access to Maintenance items, including:
Counters, General Maintenance tasks, Hardware Calibrations, Error
Reports, and using the Service Key. Refer to Maintenance, page 6–1.

Counters
This feature tracks the periodic maintenance performed on selected
instrument components and alerts the operator when periodic
inspection or maintenance is necessary. Inspection counters can be
ignored, inspected, or performed. However, Stop counters require that
the specified maintenance be performed before running another
analysis.
LECO provides a general guideline for periodic maintenance in the
Frequency column, which may need to be adjusted depending on a
particular analysis. Refer to Periodic Maintenance Schedule, page 6–5.
The list of maintenance counters can be sorted by selecting the name
tab, description tab, expiration tab, and last modified tab.
Default Maintenance counters cannot be deleted, but they may be
excluded. Excluded counters will not prompt the user for an action
Refer to Including and Excluding, page 3–24.

Log Entry
When the operator selects the desired maintenance item, additional
comments appear in the log entry. To edit the comments, select the
Comments field; the keyboard appears. Enter the desired text, and
then select Enter.
Comments are logged when Perform is selected on the Action bar.
Navigate to Instrument Ø Data Management Ø Maintenance Counters
History to view the log.

Adding or Editing Maintenance Counters

1. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Maintenance Ø
Counters.

2. Select Add to add a new counter , or select the desired

maintenance item and then select Edit to modify an existing

counter. The maintenance parameters appear.
3. For a new counter, enter a Name and Description if desired.
Counter Type—Select Days, Analyses, or Hours. The parameters
that appear will vary, depending on the counter type selected.
When Analyses is selected, Count Blanks will display. Select Yes
or No.

5–30 844 Series Instrument

 Current Count—Displays the number of analyses run or the
number of days or hours remaining before maintenance is
required.
Number of Resets—Displays the number of times the counter
has been reset.
Last Reset—Displays the date and time of the last reset.
Inspect—Select On or Off. When On is selected, enter a value to
determine when a warning message appears to indicate the need
for maintenance.
Stops—Select On or Off. When On is selected, an analysis cannot
proceed once the target value is reached.
4. Enter instructions for the maintenance item if desired.

General Maintenance
The General Maintenance screen provides quick access to frequently
used tasks. Refer to Maintenance, page 6–1 for step-by-step
maintenance procedures.
Heaters—Turns On or Off the incoming purifier heater, catalyst
heater, or dust filter heater.
Digital Outputs—Turns On or Off the coolant pump.
Incoming Pressure—Changes the valve state to read the
incoming pressure. The pressure should read 35 psi.
Combustion Tube—Follow the steps to perform maintenance
on the combustion tube if automated combustion removal
feature is available.
Oscillator Tube —Notifies when the oscillator tube was last
replaced and to log in a new tube.
The following items are not available on all instruments.

Touch Screen—Calibrates the touch screen. Refer to Calibrating

the Touch Screen, page 6–54.

Hardware Calibrations
Refer to Calibrating the Hardware, page 9–5.

Error Reports
Error reports provides an error report package, which can then be sent
to LECO for diagnosis.
1. In the software, select Instrument, and then select Maintenance.
2. Select Error Reports.
3. Select Execute next to Create Error Report to create and save the
error report.
The Error Report Path provides the user with the location that the
error report was saved. It is not an editable field.

Instrument 844 Series 5–31

 CAN Error Count
Communication errors in the instrument may result in CAN error
messages, which can be used to troubleshoot the problem.
1. In the software, select Instrument, and then select Maintenance.
2. Select Error Reports.
3. Once a problem has been fixed, select Execute next to Clear CAN
Error Count to reset the error.

Using the Service Key

CAUTION
Many settings that require the service key can cause damage
to the instrument if handled incorrectly. If the service mode is
activated, make changes only as directed or suggested by
qualified LECO service personnel.
The service key provides access to areas of the software that are
available only with a service key number provided from LECO Service.
Contact LECO Service for additional information. This screen is also
used to deactivate the key.

1. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Maintenance Ø Service

Key.
2. Enter the Service Key number obtained from LECO in the
Response Key field.
3. Select Enter Key.
An active Service Key expires automatically 10 hours after activation
or if the Cornerstone brand software is restarted.

5–32 844 Series Instrument

Remote Access

Remote Access includes the Remote Query (RQ) option, the Remote
Sample Login (RSL) option, the Remote Control (RC) option, and Data
Transmit. These software options are found on select LECO products to
facilitate their use in an automated environment. They can be used to
control the instrument from a remote location via network interface
and/or to receive data from the instrument.
RQ allows a remote computer to request data and settings from the
instrument. RQ does not allow control of the instrument, logging in
samples, or modifying any data on the instrument.
RSL allows a remote computer to log in unanalyzed samples while the
local computer retains control. RC allows a remote application running
on another computer to control the instrument without interaction
from the operator. Data Transmit allows sample data to be transmitted
to a remote computer. For additional information and instructions,
refer to Remote Sample Login, page 5–34; Remote Control, page
5–35; Data Transmit, page 5–35; and Analysis Results, page 5–35.
Data Transmit needs at least uni-directional communication from the
local computer to the remote computer.
RSL and RC communicate with the local computer via a bi-directional
communication protocol using XML commands. The remote computer
exchanges commands and data with a remote computer via network
connection. The network connection is a TCP/IP stream with a
configurable port.
The remote computer sends commands to the local computer, and the
local computer acknowledges the commands or returns the requested
data. Return data will be in XML format; however, sample results are
returned in the format specified by the current sample display layout
for remote clients defined within Cornerstone. For a list of commands
that can be sent to the local computer and what will be returned to the
remote computer, refer to XML Command Table, page 5–35.
The text of the commands and data can be in ASCII or Unicode and
are formatted in XML. The XML format is a way of tagging the
commands and data fields inside of angle brackets (less-than and
greater-than signs). The use of spaces, tabs, carriage returns, and line
feeds are optional.

Instrument 844 Series 5–33

 Remote Sample Login
Remote Sample Login Mode allows a remote user on a remote
computer to log in samples to be analyzed and to check the overall
status of the instrument. The local user running the instrument retains
control of the instrument and can add the remote-login samples for
analysis when convenient.
With RSL, the local computer will store sample data in temporary
memory as the sample data arrives from the remote computer until
the Remote Samples button on the Login bar is selected. After
selecting the Remote samples button, the sample data will be entered
into the application.
In order to use the RSL feature, Cornerstone must be running with the
RSL or Remote Control option specified on the registration key.

Figure 5-2
Remote Access Screen

5–34 844 Series Instrument

 Remote Control
The Remote Control (RC) mode allows a remote user on a remote
computer to log in samples to be analyzed, to check the overall status
of the instrument, to start an analysis, and to control the instrument.
In RC mode, the local user must relinquish control of the instrument;
the software does not allow the operator to interact with the software.
Instead, it relies completely on a remote computer to log in samples
and initiate the analysis. The remote control mode is active only when
the remote control monitor is displayed.
In order to use the RC feature, Cornerstone must be running with the
RC option specified on the registration key.

Data Transmit
Data transmit mode allows sample data to be sent to a remote
computer by transmitting sample results in a pre-defined (but
configurable) format to a remote computer. Refer to Creating and
Editing Transports, page 4–44.

Analysis Results

Analysis results can be obtained in two ways for both the Remote
Sample Login and the Remote Control modes:

· By using the appropriate remote protocol XML command as

defined by the XML Command Table, page 5–35.
· By configuring the software to automatically transmit the
results at the end of each analysis.

Remote Connection
The port used for remote communication can be configured from the
Remote Access screen in the Instrument section of the software,
shown in Figure 5-2, page 5–34.
The character encoding that is applied to the data sent to and from
remote clients can be selected. The options are UTF-16 and UTF-8.
Refer to Figure 5-2, page 5–34.

XML Command Table

LECO offers the up-to-date XML command table for download at
https://github.com/LECOSoftware/Remote-Control-Client-
Application/blob/master/docs/Remote%20Control.docx. Select the
Download button.

Instrument 844 Series 5–35

System

Cornerstone® Health Management

LECO’s Cornerstone Health Management (CHM) service is available to
all customers. CHM maximizes the reliability and availability of the
instrument by reporting critical system information to LECO engineers
for analysis. CHM does not transmit test results and does not have
access to non-Cornerstone program data. Participation in the CHM
service is optional and can be changed at any time. A warning triangle
is displayed until a CHM level has been selected.
The instrument must be connected to the Internet to send
information.
1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Cornerstone Health Management, select
the parameter field next to Participation Level. The options are as
follows:
· Off—The system will not participate in the CHM service. If a
software error occurs, the system will ask the user if they
would like to send the error report to LECO.
· CHM-0—The instrument reports its model number, serial
number, software version, software options, and operating
system status to LECO. This entry level service allows LECO
engineers to associate errors against the basic configuration
of the system. If a software error occurs, the system will
automatically send the error report to LECO.
· CHM-1—This is the recommended level of participation. In
addition to the information the instrument reports in CHM-0,
the instrument reports feedback from sensors, solenoids,
switches, counters, methods, leak checks, system checks,
warnings, log files, and system parameters to LECO. This
level allows LECO to better identify deficiencies and search
for hardware anomalies that may indicate potential
problems.
3. Once a level has been selected, the CHM content is collapsed and
is no longer visible. The content can be expanded by selecting the
arrow next to Cornerstone Health Management.

5–36 844 Series Instrument

 Updating the Registration Key, Software, or Remote Query
Remote Query is available only with the RQ option.

A warning triangle appears on the Instrument navigation button when

the registration key, software, or Remote Query is out-of-date.
Complete the following steps to make the available update.

1. Select Instrument, and then select System.

2. Determine whether the software or Remote Query is out-of-date
or whether a user-specific update is available for the registration
key.
· If the registration key requires an update, the warning
triangle appears next to Cornerstone Health Management.
Complete the steps in Updating the Registration Key,
following.
· If there is an updated version of the software available, the
warning triangle appears next to Software Update. Complete
the steps in Updating the Software, following.
· If the Remote Query option has expired, Remote Query
Expired appears on the System screen. Complete one of the
following options as desired.
o Contact the LECO sales representative to receive an
updated registration key file to extend the lifetime of the
option. Then, complete the steps in Updating the
Registration Key, following.
o Select Ignore, and then select Save to turn Off the
notification.
The warning triangle indicating that the registration key is out-of-date
will appear only if CHM-0 or CHM-1 has been chosen in the
Cornerstone Health Management service. Refer to Cornerstone®
Health Management, page 5–36.

Updating the Registration Key

Complete the following steps to update the registration key.
1. Select Update Registration Key under Cornerstone Health
Management.
2. Restart the Cornerstone brand software when prompted.

Instrument 844 Series 5–37

 Updating the Software
Select one of the following options as desired.
· Select Upgrade under Software Update to install the latest
available version of the software for the instrument. Then, follow
the onscreen prompts to install the software. Refer to Installing the
Software, page 2–34.
o Product Information Bulletins (PIBs) can be viewed, if desired,
by selecting View PIBs. Refer to Product Information Bulletins,
page 5–38, for more information.
· Select Ignore, and then select Save to turn Off the notification until
the next version of the software becomes available. The software
will remain available for update from the System screen until the
software is up-to-date.
· Select View PIBs (Product Information Bulletins) to view more
information about the changes included in the latest Cornerstone
brand software updates. The Internet browser opens to the PIBs
page. Then, follow the instructions in Product Information Bulletins,
page 5–38.
o PIBs can also be viewed from another computer. Refer to
Product Information Bulletins, page 5–38.
· The software upgrade notice appears only if the instrument is
connected to the Internet. The upgrade can be downloaded
manually, if desired, onto a flash drive or other disk from
www.lecosoftware.com.
· The Software Update section appears in the software only if a
newer version of the software is available.

Product Information Bulletins

Product Information Bulletins (PIBs) are available on the Cornerstone
brand software installation website to provide instrument specific
details about the latest software updates.
1. If View PIBs was selected in Updating the Software, previous, skip
to step 2, following. To access the PIBs from another computer,
navigate to https://www.lecosoftware.com/cornerstone. Under
For Instruments, select Product Information Bulletins (PIBs).

5–38 844 Series Instrument

 2. If the Enter Your Registration ID box is blank, select the

information button in the upper right corner of the

Cornerstone brand software to find the registration ID. If the
registration ID already appears in the box, skip to step 3,
following.
3. Enter the Registration ID found on the Information screen in the
text box under Enter Your Registration ID, and then select Find.

4. Select the link to the desired PIB under Available PIBs. Review
the PIB information.

Scheduling Gas Standby

Gas Standby Mode
1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Gas Standby, select the parameter field
next to Mode.
3. Select the action to be taken once the gas standby time has
passed.
4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Gas Standby Pedestal Down Gas State

1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Gas Standby, select the parameter field
next to Pedestal Down State.
3. Select the action to be taken once the gas standby time has
passed when the pedestal is down.
4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Gas Standby Time

1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Gas Standby, select the parameter field
next to Time.
3. On the keyboard, enter a value to determine the time before the
instrument automatically switches to the Gas Standby Mode.
4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Instrument 844 Series 5–39

 Scheduling Gas Wake Up
The following section explains how to schedule wake up times in the
software.
For CS844ES and S844ES models only: The system wakes up in
the state that is defined by the method of the next logged-in sample.
If no samples are logged in, the gas state is set by the method of the
last analyzed sample.
1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the system screen for Gas Wake Up, there are three wake ups
that can be scheduled: Weekday, Saturday, or Sunday.
A. Select Enabled next to the desired wake up to schedule a
wake up time; select Disabled to turn Off automatic wake up.
B. Select Enter.
C. When the wake up is enabled, enter a time for the instrument
to wake up using the + and – buttons.
D. Select Enter.
3. Select the parameter field next to Run Leak Check.
4. Select Yes to execute a leak check at the instrument wake up
time; select No to skip the leak check. The default is No.
5. Select Save to keep the changes, or select Cancel to return to
Analysis.

Disabling an Analyte

Analytes can be disabled only on instrument configurations that

analyze more than one analyte.
Disable an analyte to ignore it during analyses, blanks, drifts, and
calibrations. The other analyte(s) will still be analyzed. A disabled
analyte setting is applied to an entire set and cannot be changed via
recalculation.
1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. Under Analytes, enable analysis of an analyte by selecting Enable
next to Analyze <Analyte Name>. Selecting Disable will disable
analysis of that analyte.

Leak Check
The maximum pressure change allowed during a leak check can be
changed for certain leak checks, depending on instrument
configuration.
Segmented leak check is not applicable to all instrument
configurations.
1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Leak Check, select the parameter field
next to the desired leak check.

5–40 844 Series Instrument

 3. On the keyboard, enter a value for the maximum pressure
change allowed during a leak check.
4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Configuring Other System Settings

Dust Filter Heater

1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Other System Settings, select the
parameter field next to Dust Filter Heater.
3. Select Enabled or Disabled. If Enabled is selected, the dust filter
heater is used for analysis. If Disabled is selected, the dust filter
will not be used.
4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Dust Filter Temperature

1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Other System Settings, select the
parameter field next to Dust Filter Temperature.
3. On the keyboard, enter the temperature setpoint of the dust filter
heater. The default is 110 °C.
4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Back Pressure Control

1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Other System Settings, select the
parameter field next to Back Pressure Control.
3. On the keyboard, enter the pressure setpoint of the back
pressure controller. The pressure setpoint entered here should be
at least 30 mmHg above the highest expected barometric
pressure value at the location of the instrument. The highest
expected barometric pressure value may be obtained from a local
airport or government weather station. Exercise caution when
using this value as they are frequently normalized for elevation.
Refer to Determining Barometric Pressure, following.

All methods will need to be recalibrated if the back pressure setpoint

is changed.
4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Instrument 844 Series 5–41

 Determining Barometric Pressure
Because atmospheric pressure directly affects gas volume, it is
important to enter the correct barometric pressure in order to obtain
the most accurate results. Pressure is often reported in inches of
mercury (Hg), which must be converted to millimeters (mm) of
mercury for gas dose calculations. To convert from inches of Hg to mm
of Hg, multiply the barometric pressure by 25.4. Pressure varies
inversely with altitude and, if pressure readings are measured and
reported from a location other than the instrument location,
adjustments should be made accordingly. The following table
illustrates that as altitude increases, atmospheric pressure decreases.
When entering the barometric pressure, the value should be obtained
from a local, known accurate source.

Altitude (feet) Pressure (mm Hg)

0 760
250 753
500 746
750 740
1,000 733
2,000 707
3,000 681
4,000 656
5,000 632
6,000 609
7,000 586
8,000 564
9,000 543
10,000 523
Adjust reported level to reflect the operation level with this formula:
Operation Pressure Reported Adjusted
(from table) X Barometric = Pressure at
Pressure at Operation
760 0 feet

Enter the answer to this formula in the barometric pressure procedure.

Example:
Barometric pressure is reported at 750 mm Hg at sea level (0 feet) but
operation altitude is 1000 feet. Adjust the reported sea level pressure
to operation level pressure by using the formula:
733 mm Hg X 750 mm Hg = 723 mm Hg
760 mm Hg
In this example, the barometric pressure to be entered into the
instrument is 723 mm Hg.

5–42 844 Series Instrument

 Gas Doser

Gas dose is not applicable to all instrument configurations.

1. Select Instrument, and then select System.

2. On the System screen for Other System Settings, select the
parameter field next to Gas Doser.
3. Select Enabled or Disabled. If Enabled is selected, the gas doser
is utilized. If Disabled is selected, the gas doser is not utilized.
The heaters will turn Off, and the user will not be able to log in
gas dose samples. If unanalyzed gas dose samples are already
logged in, the software will not let the user disable the gas doser.

Auto Increment Sample Name

If Auto Increment Sample Name is enabled when a sample set is
logged in, the software automatically copies the previously used
sample name and increments the last numeric character, if available.
1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Other System Settings, select the
parameter field next to Auto Increment Sample Name.
3. Select Enabled and the software will auto increment a sample
name that contains a numeric character.
4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Printer
Use this feature to select the printer for general printing purposes.
For printer installation, refer to the manual supplied with the printer
and Installing the Computer, page 2–22.
1. Select Instrument, and then select System.
2. On the System screen for Peripheral Devices, select the Printer
parameter field next to System Printer.
3. Select the desired printer name.

4. Select Enter to close the keyboard.

Instrument 844 Series 5–43

This page intentionally left blank.

5–44 844 Series Instrument

6 Maintenance
The Maintenance chapter includes procedures that should be
performed on a regular basis to improve the instrument's performance
and lifespan. The procedures included in this chapter may require
disabling power to the instrument and should be performed only by
trained personnel.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING

During installation and operation of this instrument, the
ON/OFF switch must be easily accessible. The ON/OFF switch
is located on the left side of the instrument.

PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE GLOVES

Protective eyewear and gloves should be worn when handling
chemicals.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for the specific chemical
for additional information.

Illustrations .................................................................................. 6–4

Periodic Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 6–5
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings ................................................. 6–8
Replacing the Incoming Scrubber Tube ............................................ 6–9
Removing the Incoming Scrubber Tube..................................... 6–10
Packing the Incoming Scrubber Tube ........................................ 6–10
Installing the Incoming Scrubber Tube...................................... 6–11
Replacing the Incoming Purifier Tube ............................................. 6–12
Removing the Incoming Purifier Tube ....................................... 6–12
Packing the Incoming Purifier Tube........................................... 6–13
Installing the Incoming Purifier Tube ........................................ 6–14
Replacing the Catalyst Tube ......................................................... 6–16
Removing the Catalyst Tube .................................................... 6–16
Packing the Catalyst Tube ....................................................... 6–17
Installing the Catalyst Tube ..................................................... 6–18
Replacing the Cellulose Trap Tube ................................................. 6–19
Removing the Cellulose Trap Tube............................................ 6–19

Maintenance 844 Series 6–1

 Packing the Cellulose Trap Tube ............................................... 6–19
Installing the Cellulose Trap Tube............................................. 6–20
Replacing the Flow Scrubber Tube ................................................. 6–21
Removing the Flow Scrubber Tube ........................................... 6–21
Packing the Flow Scrubber Tube............................................... 6–22
Installing the Flow Scrubber Tube ............................................ 6–23
Cleaning the Screen Filters ........................................................... 6–24
Replacing the Pneumatic Gas Filter................................................ 6–25
Replacing the Particle Filter .......................................................... 6–27
Maintaining the Auto Cleaner ........................................................ 6–28
C844 Models.......................................................................... 6–28
CS844/S844 Models ............................................................... 6–29
Maintaining the Auto Cleaner Brushes....................................... 6–30
Maintaining the Manual Cleaner .................................................... 6–32
Before Each Use..................................................................... 6–32
Cleaning the Furnace Between Analyses.................................... 6–32
Maintaining the Combustion Tube.................................................. 6–33
Manual Removal..................................................................... 6–33
Automated Removal ............................................................... 6–33
Replacement ......................................................................... 6–33
Manual Installation ................................................................. 6–34
Automated Installation............................................................ 6–34
Maintaining the Dust Filter............................................................ 6–35
Cleaning the Dust Filter Assembly ................................................. 6–37
C844 Models.......................................................................... 6–37
Removing the Dust Filter Assembly from the Instrument ........ 6–37
Cleaning the Dust Filter Assembly ....................................... 6–37
Installing the Filter Assembly on the Instrument ................... 6–37
CS844/S844 Models ............................................................... 6–38
Removing the Heated Filter Assembly from the Instrument .... 6–38
Cleaning the Heated Filter Assembly.................................... 6–38
Installing the Heated Filter Assembly on the Instrument ........ 6–39
Maintaining the Furnace Out Tube ................................................. 6–41
Removing the Furnace Out Tube .............................................. 6–41
Cleaning the Furnace Out Tube ................................................ 6–41
Installing the Furnace Out Tube ............................................... 6–42

6–2 844 Series Maintenance

 Replacing the Dust Eject (Pinch Valve) Tubing ................................ 6–44
Maintaining the Coolant System .................................................... 6–46
Maintaining the Vacuum Cleaner ................................................... 6–48
Vacuum Cleaner Manifold ........................................................ 6–48
Weekly ............................................................................ 6–48
Monthly ........................................................................... 6–48
Performing Gas Dose Maintenance ................................................ 6–49
Cleaning the Touch Screen ........................................................... 6–53
Calibrating the Touch Screen ........................................................ 6–54
Performing Air Filter Maintenance.................................................. 6–55
Automation Maintenance .............................................................. 6–56
Shuttle Loader ....................................................................... 6–56
Rotary Motor Maintenance .................................................. 6–56
Crucible Gripper Maintenance ............................................. 6–59
Shuttle Loader Horizontal Housing Maintenance .................... 6–60

Maintenance 844 Series 6–3

Illustrations

Figure 6-1 Cleaning O-Ring ................................................................. 6–8

Figure 6-2 O-Ring Shine...................................................................... 6–8
Figure 6-3 Incoming Scrubber Tube Packing ........................................ 6–11
Figure 6-4 Incoming Purifier Tube Packing........................................... 6–14
Figure 6-5 Catalyst Heater Tube Packing ............................................. 6–18
Figure 6-6 Cellulose Trap Tube Packing ............................................... 6–20
Figure 6-7 Flow Scrubber Tube Packing............................................... 6–23
Figure 6-8 Screen Filters ................................................................... 6–24
Figure 6-9 Pneumatic Gas Filter ......................................................... 6–26
Figure 6-10 Particle Filter Replacement ............................................... 6–27
Figure 6-11 Furnace Out Tube Maintenance ......................................... 6–43
Figure 6-12 Right Casting Removal..................................................... 6–44
Figure 6-13 Pinch Valve Tubing .......................................................... 6–45
Figure 6-14 Coolant Reservoir Cap ..................................................... 6–47
Figure 6-15 Drain Fitting Access Door ................................................. 6–47
Figure 6-16 Gas Dose Assembly ......................................................... 6–50
Figure 6-17 Endcap for Gas Dose Assembly ......................................... 6–50
Figure 6-18 Endcap O-Ring................................................................ 6–51
Figure 6-19 Valve Stem in Gas Dose Manifold ...................................... 6–51
Figure 6-20 Valve Stem .................................................................... 6–51
Figure 6-21 Air Filter Location............................................................ 6–55
Figure 6-22 Rotary Motor and Gripper Assembly .................................. 6–57
Figure 6-23 Flat of Motor Shaft – Exploded View .................................. 6–58
Figure 6-24 Crucible Gripper Assembly ............................................... 6–59
Figure 6-25 Shuttle Loader Horizontal Housing..................................... 6–60

6–4 844 Series Maintenance

Periodic Maintenance Schedule
Following is a list of maintenance procedures that should be performed
on a regular basis. Periodic maintenance of the instrument will result
in improved instrument performance and will extend the life of the
instrument. This schedule is based on typical usage. Applications
where usage is lighter or heavier may require less or more frequent
periodic maintenance, depending on the types of samples and
methods used.
· Always perform a leak check before and after routine
maintenance.

· If a leak is detected, check the maintenance item or procedure

that was last performed.

· When performing any maintenance on the instrument, make sure

to turn the gas Off and allow the instrument to depressurize prior
to inspecting or removing any components.

· Not all components are applicable to all instrument configurations.

Frequency Part Procedure

Vacuum the air filters to remove any dust/debris.
Air Filters Refer to Performing Air Filter Maintenance,
page 6–55.
Remove any dust. Refer to Maintaining the Manual
Manual Cleaner
Cleaner, page 6–32.
Before Each Remove any dust and inspect/clean/lightly grease
Use Auto Cleaner o-rings. Replace brushes when worn. Refer to
Assembly Maintaining the Auto Cleaner, page 6–28, and
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
Inspect, clean, and lightly grease the o-rings. Refer
Combustion
to Maintaining the Combustion Tube, page 6–33, and
Zone O-Rings
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.

In addition to the daily leak check, perform a leak

Leak Check check after any maintenance procedure. Refer to
Leak Check, page 8–15.
Perform a system check after any maintenance
As Needed System Check procedure or as a general troubleshooting tool when
needed. Refer to System Check, page 8–17.
Clean filters when replacing the incoming and flow
Screen Filters scrubber reagent materials. Refer to Cleaning the
Screen Filters, page 6–24.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–5

Frequency Part Procedure
Inspect, clean, and/or replace filter o-ring when
Screen Filter replacing the incoming and flow scrubber reagent
O-Rings materials. Refer to Cleaning the Screen Filters,
page 6–24.
Inspect when changing the flow scrubber reagent
Furnace Out material. Clean when dust is visible within the
As Needed Tube tube/fittings. Refer to Maintaining the Furnace Out
(cont.) Tube, page 6–41.
Pedestal Remove the pedestal and pedestal base. Vacuum out
Screen any dust buildup on the screen.
Clean when visibly dirty or if touch response
Touch Monitor diminishes. Refer to Cleaning the Touch Screen,
page 6–53.

Clean when filter is visibly dirty or when flow

Dust Filter becomes restricted. Refer to Maintaining the Dust
Filter, page 6–35.
Perform leak checks daily, or after any routine
Daily Leak Check maintenance, to ensure the system is leak free.
Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
Replace the reagent when the Anhydrone has caked.
Flow Scrubber Refer to Replacing the Flow Scrubber Tube,
page 6–21.

Replace when the counter expires or 3/4 of the

*Catalyst platinum silica has become discolored. Refer to
Replacing the Catalyst Tube, page 6–16.
Replace when the counter expires, 1 inch of the
cellulose has turned black, or the cellulose has
*Cellulose Trap
turned brown. Refer to Replacing the Cellulose Trap
Tube, page 6–19.
Replace when the counter has expired or when 1/3 of
*Incoming
the copper oxide has turned reddish orange. Refer to
Purifier
Replacing the Incoming Purifier Tube, page 6–12.
Weekly Replace when the counter has expired, the
*Incoming LECOSORB® has turned white, or the Anhydrone has
Scrubber caked. Refer to Replacing the Incoming Scrubber
Tube, page 6–9.
Replace when the counter has expired or the filter
Particle Filter has darkened significantly. Refer to Replacing the
Pneumatic Gas Filter, page 6–25.
Remove the cleanup hose from its docked position
Vacuum and run the vacuum cleaner to remove dust buildup
Manifold from inside the manifold. Refer to Vacuum Cleaner
Manifold, page 6–48.

6–6 844 Series Maintenance

Frequency Part Procedure
Replace when filter is full or vacuum suction has
Vacuum Filter
diminished.
Check the coolant level within the reservoir and add
Weekly as needed. Refer to Maintaining the Coolant System,
(cont.) page 6–46.
Coolant
**Upon initial instrument installation or replacement of any water
system components, replace the water once a week for the first
month of operation.

Wash the Air Filters. Refer to Performing Air Filter

Air Filters
Maintenance, page 6–55.
Clean tube when dust buildup occurs. Replace tube
Dust Eject
when cracked or worn. Refer to Replacing the Dust
Tubing
Eject (Pinch Valve) Tubing, page 6–44.
Remove the vacuum manifold from the back of the
Vacuum
instrument and clean out any dust buildup. Refer to
Manifold
Vacuum Cleaner Manifold, page 6–48.
Clean the shuttle loader gripper motor cover once a
Shuttle Loader month. Refer to Rotary Motor Maintenance,
page 6–56.

Monthly Clean and lubricate the o-rings on the crucible

Shuttle Loader gripper once a month or if pneumatic leaks are
Gripper heard, grippers stick, or the rotary motor repeatedly
O-Rings stalls. Refer to Rotary Motor Maintenance,
page 6–56.
Replace the gripper finger actuator cones when they
Shuttle Loader
show signs of uneven wear. Clean and lubricate the
Gripper Finger
gripper finger actuator cone o-rings once a month.
Actuator Cones
Refer to Crucible Gripper Maintenance, page 6–59.
Clean the shuttle loader horizontal housing at least
Shuttle Loader once a month and more frequently if needed. Refer
Housing to Shuttle Loader Horizontal Housing Maintenance,
page 6–60.

Every 3 Drain and refill the coolant reservoir. Refer to

Coolant
Months Maintaining the Coolant System, page 6–46.

*Catalyst Tube, Cellulose Trap Tube, Incoming Purifier Tube, and

Incoming Scrubber Tube are available only on the following models:
CS844 and C844.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–7

Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings
Complete the following instructions when cleaning o-rings that require
greasing. Refer to Components and Accessories, page 1–48, for the
appropriate accessory pack.
1. Cut a lint-free foam cleaning wipe from the accessory pack into
four pieces of approximately equal size.
2. Clean the o-ring with a piece of the foam wipe, making sure not
to stretch the o-ring while wiping it. Refer to Figure 6-1,
following.

Figure 6-1
Cleaning O-Ring

3. Apply a light film of silicone-based high vacuum grease from the

component pack to the entire surface of the o-ring.
4. Using another piece of foam wipe, remove any excess grease
according to the following guidelines. Refer to Figure 6-1,
previous, and Figure 6-2, following.
· Make sure not to stretch the o-ring while wiping off excess
grease.
· When finished, the o-ring should have a visible sheen or
shininess on all surface areas.
· Any grease that is visible greater than a sheen or shininess is
excess and needs to be removed using the foam wipe.

Side A: Correct amount of sheen or

shininess

Side B: Excess lubrication that

must be removed.

Figure 6-2
O-Ring Shine
5. Install the o-ring, making sure it does not twist or roll and that no
part of the o-ring is nicked or cut. Make sure not to pinch the
o-ring between the sealing surfaces.

6–8 844 Series Maintenance

Replacing the Incoming Scrubber Tube

Packing the Incoming Scrubber Tube is required only on the following

models: CS844 and C844.

The following sections explain how to pack the incoming scrubber.

OXIDIZING/HARMFUL/
PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE GLOVES
Anhydrone is an oxidizer and a strong dehydrating agent.
Take the following precautions when handling Anhydrone:

· Anhydrone may cause severe eye irritation or damage, as

well as respiratory irritation. Avoid breathing Anhydrone
dust.

· Do not heat with organic matter, flammables, or

combustibles.

· Avoid contact with strong acids.

· Protective gloves and eyewear should be used at all times

when handling Anhydrone.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

CORROSIVE/HARMFUL/
PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE GLOVES
LECOSORB is harmful in contact with skin and may cause skin
burns, corrosion, or irritation. It may also cause eye damage
or irritation. Protective gloves and eyewear should be worn at
all times when handling the product.
Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional
information.

The reagents should be changed when a reagent becomes caked or

discolored. Alternatively, maintenance counters on the instrument
indicate when replacement is necessary to prevent accidental use of
expired reagent. The lifetime of the incoming scrubber reagent
depends on the quality of the carrier gas.

When packing the reagent tubes, tap them gently to settle the
reagents evenly. This prevents channeling and ensures efficient
operation.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–9

 PROTECTIVE GLOVES/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, including
safety glasses or goggles and cut-resistant gloves, when
handling quartz wool.
Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional hazard,
handling, storage, and personal protection information.

Removing the Incoming Scrubber Tube

1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Turn Off the gas.
3. Open the instrument front door.
4. Push the incoming scrubber tube up off the bottom block. Swing
the bottom out and pull it down off the top port block.
5. Check, clean, and grease the o-rings on the top and bottom
blocks where the tube seals. Replace the o-rings if they are
cracked or worn. Apply a thin coating of vacuum grease. Refer to
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.

FLAMMABLE/HEALTH HAZARD/HARMFUL/
PROTECTIVE GLOVES/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
Acetone is highly flammable and should be kept away from
hot surfaces. It may cause eye irritation and/or drowsiness.
Do not breathe fumes. Protective eyewear and gloves are
required when handling Acetone.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

6. If the tube was previously packed, remove the spent packing

material and clean the tube. To clean the tube, rinse it with
water, then acetone and allow it to dry. Refer to Figure 6-3,
page 6–11.
7. Pack the tube using the appropriate steps in Packing the
Incoming Scrubber Tube, following.

Packing the Incoming Scrubber Tube

Refer to Figure 6-3, page 6–11, while completing the following steps.
1. Insert a clean screen filter into the bottom end of the tube and
position it approximately 1/4-inch up from the edge of the tube.
The o-ring end of the filter should be positioned toward the
bottom opening of the tube. Refer to Cleaning the Screen Filters,
page 6–24, for screen filter maintenance.
2. Push a 1-inch wad of quartz wool into the open end of the tube
until it rests on the screen filter. The quartz wool should stop at
the lowest etch mark on the tube. When packing the reagent
tubes, tap them gently to settle the reagents evenly. This
prevents channeling and ensures efficient operation.

6–10 844 Series Maintenance

 3. Pour approximately 22/3 inches of Anhydrone over the quartz wool
up to the second etch mark, 1/3 of the way up the tube.
4. Pour LECOSORB over the Anhydrone, filling the tube to the top
etch mark.
5. Pack 1/2-inch of quartz wool on top of the LECOSORB. Make sure
no strands of quartz wool are left hanging out either end of the
tube or over the o-ring sealing surfaces.
6. Install the incoming scrubber tube using the instructions in
Installing the Incoming Scrubber Tube, page 6–11.

Figure 6-3
Incoming Scrubber Tube Packing

Installing the Incoming Scrubber Tube

1. Install the packed tube by pushing the top of the tube over the
top o-ring, swinging the bottom in, and pulling the bottom of the
tube down over the bottom o-ring.
2. Turn On the gas.
3. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–11

Replacing the Incoming Purifier Tube
Packing the Incoming Purifier Tube is required only on the
following models: CS844 and C844.

The following sections explain how to pack the incoming purifier.

HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING

To prevent personal injury, turn Off the incoming purifier
and allow it to cool to room temperature before performing
this procedure.

HEALTH HAZARD/HARMFUL/
PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE GLOVES
Copper Oxide is harmful if swallowed and may cause skin
irritation. It may also cause eye damage or irritation. It may
cause damage to organs through prolonged exposure.
Protective gloves and eyewear should be worn at all times
when handling the product.
Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional
information.

The reagents should be changed when a reagent becomes caked or

discolored. Alternatively, maintenance counters on the instrument
indicate when replacement is necessary to prevent accidental use of
expired reagents. The lifetime of the incoming purifier reagent
depends on the quality of the carrier gas.
Use only quartz wool and a quartz tube when repacking the
incoming purifier tube. Other materials may damage the
instrument.

PROTECTIVE GLOVES/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR

Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, including
safety glasses or goggles and cut-resistant gloves, when
handling quartz wool.
Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional hazard,
handling, storage, and personal protection information.

Removing the Incoming Purifier Tube

1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. In the software, select Instrument, then Maintenance, and then
select General Maintenance.
3. Turn Off the incoming purifier heater.
4. Allow the heater to cool to room temperature.
5. Turn Off the gas.
6. Open the instrument front door.

6–12 844 Series Maintenance

 7. Remove the screw and upper block that secures the top of the
incoming purifier tube. Set the block and screw aside.
8. Grasp the top of incoming purifier tube and pull it up and out of
the heater.

FLAMMABLE/HEALTH HAZARD/HARMFUL/
PROTECTIVE GLOVES/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
Acetone is highly flammable and should be kept away from
hot surfaces. It may cause eye irritation and/or drowsiness.
Do not breathe fumes. Protective eyewear and gloves are
required when handling Acetone.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

9. If the tube was previously packed, remove the spent packing

material and clean the tube. To clean the tube, rinse it with
water, then acetone and allow it to dry. Refer to Figure 6-4,
page 6–14.
10. Pack the tube using the steps in Packing the Incoming Purifier
Tube, following.

Packing the Incoming Purifier Tube

Refer to Figure 6-4, page 6–14, while completing the following steps.
1. Push 1-inch of quartz wool into the tube and position it at the
neck near the lower end of the tube.
2. Fill 5 inches of the tube with rare earth copper oxide.
3. Push 1/2-inch of quartz wool into the tube and position it at the
neck near the upper end of the tube. Make sure no strands of
quartz wool are hanging out either end of the tube or are over the
o-ring sealing surfaces.
4. Install the incoming purifier tube using the steps in Installing the
Incoming Purifier Tube, page 6–14.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–13

 Figure 6-4
Incoming Purifier Tube Packing

Installing the Incoming Purifier Tube

1. Check, clean, and grease the o-ring on the lower block where the
tube seals. Replace the o-ring if it is cracked or worn. Apply a thin
coating of vacuum grease. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the
O-Rings, page 6–8.
2. Check, clean, and grease the two o-rings on the upper block
where the tube seals. This is the block that was removed. Replace
the o-rings if they are cracked or worn. Apply a thin coating of
vacuum grease. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings,
page 6–8.
3. Insert the packed incoming purifier tube into the incoming purifier
heater and push it over the lower o-ring.
4. Reinstall the upper block and screw.

6–14 844 Series Maintenance

 5. Turn On the incoming purifier by selecting Start in the
Maintenance section of the software.
6. Turn On the gas.
7. Allow the incoming purifier temperature to stabilize.
8. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–15

Replacing the Catalyst Tube
Packing the Catalyst Tube is required only on the following models:
CS844 and C844.
The following instructions explain how to pack the catalyst tube.

HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING

To prevent personal injury, turn Off the catalyst and allow the
heater to cool to room temperature before performing this
procedure.

PROTECTIVE GLOVES/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR

Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, including
safety glasses or goggles and cut-resistant gloves, when
handling quartz wool.
Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional hazard,
handling, storage, and personal protection information.

Removing the Catalyst Tube

1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Select Instrument and then select Maintenance.
3. Select General Maintenance.
4. Turn Off the catalyst.
5. Allow the heater to cool to room temperature.
6. Turn Off the gas.
7. Open the instrument front door.
8. Remove the screw and upper block that secures the top of the
catalyst. Set the block and screw aside.
9. Grasp the top of the catalyst and pull it up and out of the heater.

FLAMMABLE/HEALTH HAZARD/HARMFUL/
PROTECTIVE GLOVES/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
Acetone is highly flammable and should be kept away from
hot surfaces. It may cause eye irritation and/or drowsiness.
Do not breathe fumes. Protective eyewear and gloves are
required when handling Acetone.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

10. If the tube was previously packed, remove the spent packing
material and clean the tube. To clean the tube, rinse it with
water, then acetone and allow it to dry. Refer to Figure 6-5,
page 6–18.
11. Pack the tube using the appropriate steps in Packing the Catalyst
Tube, following.

6–16 844 Series Maintenance

 Packing the Catalyst Tube
Refer to Figure 6-5, page 6–18, while completing the following steps.
1. Push a 2-inch wad of quartz wool into the tube until the wad rests
on the neck (narrow section) of the tube.
2. Fill 2-inches of the tube with platinum silica catalyst up to the
etch marking on the tube.
3. Insert an additional 3 inches of quartz wool into the top of the
tube. Make sure no strands of quartz wool are left hanging out
either end of the tube or are over the o-ring sealing surfaces.
4. Check, clean, and grease the o-ring on the lower block where the
tube seals. Replace the o-ring if it is cracked or worn. Apply a thin
coating of vacuum grease. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the
O-Rings, page 6–8.
5. Check, clean, and grease the two o-rings on the upper block
where the tube seals. This is the block that was removed. Replace
the o-rings if they are cracked or worn. Apply a thin coating of
vacuum grease. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings,
page 6–8.
6. Insert the packed catalyst tube into the catalyst heater and push
it over the lower o-ring.
7. Ensure that the quartz wool is not visible from outside the heater.
If visible, remove enough quartz wool so that all quartz wool is
within the heater area.
8. Install the catalyst tube using the steps in Installing the Catalyst
Tube, page 6–18.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–17

 Figure 6-5
Catalyst Heater Tube Packing

Installing the Catalyst Tube

1. Reinstall the upper block and screw.
2. Turn On the catalyst by selecting Start in the Maintenance section
of the software.
3. Turn On the gas.
4. Allow the catalyst heater temperature to stabilize.
5. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

6–18 844 Series Maintenance

Replacing the Cellulose Trap Tube

Packing the Cellulose Trap Tube is required only on the following

models: CS844 and C844.

The following instructions explain how to pack the cellulose trap tube.

Removing the Cellulose Trap Tube

1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Turn Off the gas.
3. Open the instrument front door.
4. Push the cellulose trap tube up off the bottom block. Swing the
bottom out and pull it down off the top port block.
5. Remove the spent cellulose.
6. Pack the tube using the appropriate steps in Packing the Cellulose
Trap Tube, following.

Packing the Cellulose Trap Tube

Refer to Figure 6-6, page 6–20, while completing the following steps.
1. Insert 9-inches of fresh cellulose into the tube. Packing should be
of uniform density and the fibers should not be twisted. Refer to
Figure 6-6, page 6–20.
2. Install the cellulose trap tube using the steps in Installing the
Cellulose Trap Tube, page 6–20.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–19

 Figure 6-6
Cellulose Trap Tube Packing

Installing the Cellulose Trap Tube

1. Check, clean, and grease the o-rings on the top and bottom
blocks where the tube seals. Replace the o-rings if they are
cracked or worn. Apply a thin coating of vacuum grease. Refer to
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
2. Install the packed tube by pushing the top of the tube over the
top o-ring, swinging the bottom in, and pulling the bottom of the
tube down over the bottom o-ring.
3. Turn On the gas.
4. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

6–20 844 Series Maintenance

Replacing the Flow Scrubber Tube

The following instructions explain how to pack the flow scrubber tube.

OXIDIZING/HARMFUL/
PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR/PROTECTIVE GLOVES
Anhydrone is an oxidizer and a strong dehydrating agent.
Take the following precautions when handling Anhydrone:

· Anhydrone may cause severe eye irritation or damage, as

well as respiratory irritation. Avoid breathing Anhydrone
dust.

· Do not heat with organic matter, flammables, or

combustibles.

· Avoid contact with strong acids.

· Protective gloves and eyewear should be used at all times

when handling Anhydrone.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

The reagents should be changed when a reagent becomes caked or

discolored. Alternatively, maintenance counters on the instrument
indicate when replacement is necessary to prevent accidental use of
expired reagent. The lifetime of the flow scrubber reagent depends on
the quality of the carrier gas.

When packing the reagent tubes, tap them gently to settle the
reagents evenly. This prevents channeling and ensures efficient
operation.
PROTECTIVE GLOVES/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, including
safety glasses or goggles and cut-resistant gloves, when
handling quart wool.
Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional hazard,
handling, storage, and personal protection information.

Removing the Flow Scrubber Tube

1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Turn Off the gas.
3. Open the instrument front door.
4. Push the flow scrubber tube up off the bottom block. Swing the
bottom out and pull it down off the top port block.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–21

 5. Check, clean, and grease the o-rings on the top and bottom
blocks where the tube seals. Replace the o-rings if they are
cracked or worn. Apply a thin coating of vacuum grease. Refer to
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.

FLAMMABLE/HEALTH HAZARD/HARMFUL/
PROTECTIVE GLOVES/PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
Acetone is highly flammable and should be kept away from
hot surfaces. It may cause eye irritation and/or drowsiness.
Do not breathe fumes. Protective eyewear and gloves are
required when handling Acetone.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

6. If the tube was previously packed, remove the spent packing

material and clean the tube. To clean the tube, rinse it with
water, then acetone and allow it to dry. Refer to Figure 6-7,
page 6–23.
7. Pack the tube using the steps in Packing the Flow Scrubber Tube,
following.

Packing the Flow Scrubber Tube

Refer to Figure 6-7, page 6–23, while completing the following steps.
1. Remove any dirt from the reagent stop. Check, clean, and grease
the o-rings, applying a thin coating of vacuum grease. Refer to
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
2. Insert a clean screen filter into the bottom end of the tube and
position it 1/4-inch up from the edge of the tube. The o-ring end
of the filter should be positioned toward the bottom opening of
the tube. Refer to Cleaning the Screen Filters, page 6–24, for
screen filter maintenance. When packing the reagent tubes, tap
them gently to settle the reagents evenly. This prevents
channeling and ensures efficient operation.
3. Push a 1-inch wad of quartz wool into the open end of the tube
until it rests on the screen filter. The quartz wool should stop at
the lowest etch mark on the tube.
4. Pour 21/2 inches of Anhydrone over the quartz wool up to the
second etch mark on the tube.
5. Pack 1/2-inch of quartz wool on top of the Anhydrone. The quartz
wool should stop at the top etch mark on the tube. Make sure no
strands of quartz wool are left hanging out either end of the tube
or over the o-ring sealing surfaces.
6. Install the reagent stop into the top of the tube until it rests
above the top etch mark.
7. Install the flow scrubber tube by using the steps in Installing the
Flow Scrubber Tube, page 6–23.

6–22 844 Series Maintenance

 Figure 6-7
Flow Scrubber Tube Packing

Installing the Flow Scrubber Tube

1. Install the packed tube by pushing the top of the tube up over the
top block, swinging the bottom in, and pulling the bottom of the
tube down over the bottom block.
2. Turn On the gas.
3. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–23

Cleaning the Screen Filters

The screen filters are located at the end of the various catalyst and
reagent tubes in the instrument. The filters should be cleaned
whenever the reagents are replaced.
The filters are easily removed using the screen removal tool from the
Accessory Pack, a threaded tool, or any #10-24 screw.
1. If one has not already been done, perform a leak check. Refer to
Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Remove the o-rings from the screen filters.
3. Inspect, clean, and lightly grease the o-rings. Replace the o-rings
if they are cracked or worn. Set the o-rings aside. Refer to
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
4. Insert the screen filters in an ultrasonic cleaner.
5. Sonicate the screen filters for 10 minutes.
6. Remove the screen filters from the ultrasonic cleaner and allow
them to air dry.
7. Install the o-rings on the screen filters.
8. Insert the clean screen filters into their original location; or
replace the clean filters with spare filters, if available, and store
for future use.
9. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Figure 6-8
Screen Filters

6–24 844 Series Maintenance

Replacing the Pneumatic Gas Filter
The pneumatic particle filter should be inspected every 2 months and
replaced as necessary.
1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Turn Off the gas to the instrument by selecting Gas on the Action
bar and then selecting Off.
3. Turn Off the pneumatic air at the source.

PINCH HAZARD
The upward pedestal motion causes a pinch point.

4. Cycle the pedestal to bleed the pneumatic pressure by selecting

Pedestal three times or until most of the pressure has

been relieved as indicated when the pedestal does not rise.
5. Turn Off the instrument power.
6. Remove the instrument side panel (left side when facing the front
of the instrument).

Maintenance 844 Series 6–25

 7. Unscrew the pneumatic gas filter housing. Refer to Figure 6-9,
page 6–26.

Figure 6-9
Pneumatic Gas Filter

8. Unscrew the pneumatic gas filter from the pneumatic filter holder
and inspect for residue. Replace the filter if necessary.
9. Inspect for moisture inside the pneumatic gas filter housing.
A. If moisture is present, release the valve on the bottom of the
pneumatic gas filter housing.
B. After moisture is relieved, tighten valve on pneumatic
housing until secure.
10. Reinstall the pneumatic gas filter into the housing and screw
in place.
11. Attach the pneumatic gas filter housing into its location and screw
it in place.
12. Restore pneumatic air flow at the source.
13. Reinstall the side instrument panel.
14. Turn On the instrument power.
15. Turn On gas by selecting Gas On the Action bar and then
selecting On.
16. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

6–26 844 Series Maintenance

Replacing the Particle Filter

1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

2. Turn Off the gas.
3. Open the instrument front door.
4. Push the particle filter up off the bottom block. Swing the bottom
out and pull it down off the top port block.
5. Pull the fittings off both ends of the old particle filter and discard
the filter. Refer to Figure 6-10, following.
6. Install the fittings on the new particle filter.
7. Position the arrow on the particle filter down and install it on the
instrument by pushing the top fitting over the top block, swinging
the bottom in and pulling the bottom fitting down over the bottom
block.
8. Turn On the gas.
9. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Figure 6-10
Particle Filter Replacement

Maintenance 844 Series 6–27

Maintaining the Auto Cleaner

C844 Models
1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Verify that the pedestal is in the lower position. If it is not, select

the pedestal button to lower it.

3. Remove the pneumatic lines from the auto cleaner assembly by
pulling down on the pneumatic gas line fitting.
4. Lift up on the auto cleaner lock ring and twist the auto cleaner
assembly to the right until it stops rotating and the indicator is in

the removal position . Pull up on the auto cleaner and

remove it from the system. The dust filter will most likely be
removed with the auto cleaner. Remove the dust filter from the
dust filter assembly if the filter is not removed with the brush
assembly. If this is the case, it may indicate that the brushes
need to be replaced.
5. If the dust filter is still on the brush assembly, remove it using a
clockwise twisting action while pulling it off the brush assembly.
6. Wipe the top of the dust filter assembly to remove any dust that
fell while removing the auto cleaner assembly.
7. Brush the majority of the dust from the auto cleaner assembly
and wipe clean. Manually extend the brush assembly by twisting
it in a counter-clockwise direction and clean the lance inlet
orifices between the two o-rings.
8. Inspect and lightly grease the o-rings on the lance inlet. Replace
as necessary. To replace the o-rings, the brush stack can be
removed from the auto cleaner. Refer to Maintaining the Auto
Cleaner Brushes, page 6–30, and Cleaning and Greasing the
O-Rings, page 6–8.
9. Inspect the brushes. If they need to be replaced, refer to
Maintaining the Auto Cleaner Brushes, page 6–30.
10. Remove the o-rings from the dust filter, clean, lightly grease,
place o-rings on a clean filter, and place the filter in the dust filter
assembly. Refer to the Maintaining the Dust Filter, page 6–35,
and Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
11. Manually retract the brush and return the auto cleaner assembly
to the dust filter assembly by inserting and twisting to the left
until it locks into place and the alignment indicator is in the

locked position .

6–28 844 Series Maintenance

 12. Lower the auto cleaner lock ring to secure the auto cleaner in
place.
13. Reconnect the pneumatic lines by inserting the fitting back into
the auto cleaner assembly.
14. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

CS844/S844 Models
1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. In the software, select Instrument and then select Maintenance.
3. Select General Maintenance.
4. Turn Off the heated dust filter.

HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING

The auto cleaner assembly may be hot. Allow it to cool to a
safe handling temperature before proceeding.

5. Verify that the pedestal is in the lower position. If it is not, select

the pedestal button to lower it.

6. Remove the pneumatic lines from the auto cleaner assembly by
pulling down on the pneumatic gas line fitting.
7. Lift up on the auto cleaner lock ring and twist the auto cleaner
assembly to the right until it stops rotating and the indicator is in

the removal position . Pull up on the auto cleaner and

remove it from the system. The dust filter will most likely be
removed with the auto cleaner. Remove the dust filter from the
heated dust filter assembly if the filter is not removed with the
brush assembly. If this is the case, it may indicate that the
brushes need to be replaced.
8. If the dust filter is still on the brush assembly, remove it using a
clockwise twisting action while pulling it off the brush assembly.
9. Wipe the top of the dust filter assembly to remove any dust that
fell while removing the auto cleaner assembly.
10. Brush the majority of the dust from the auto cleaner assembly
and wipe clean. Manually extend the brush assembly by twisting
it in a counter-clockwise direction and clean the lance inlet
orifices between the two o-rings.
11. Inspect and lightly grease the o-rings. Replace as necessary. To
replace the o-rings, the brush stack can be removed from the
auto cleaner as described in the next step. Refer to Maintaining
the Auto Cleaner Brushes, page 6–30, and Cleaning and Greasing
the O-Rings, page 6–8.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–29

 12. Inspect the brushes. If they need to be replaced, refer to
Maintaining the Auto Cleaner Brushes, page 6–30.
13. Remove the o-rings from the dust filter, clean, lightly grease,
place o-rings on a clean filter, and place the filter in the dust filter
assembly. Refer to Maintaining the Dust Filter, page 6–35, and
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
14. Manually retract the brush and return the auto cleaner assembly
to the dust filter assembly by inserting and twisting to the left
until it locks into place and the alignment indicator is in the

locked position .
15. Lower the auto cleaner lock ring to secure the auto cleaner in
place.
16. Reconnect the pneumatic lines by inserting the fitting back into
the auto cleaner assembly.
17. In the software, select Instrument, Maintenance, and then
General Maintenance.
18. Turn On the heated dust filter by selecting On.
19. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Maintaining the Auto Cleaner Brushes

1. Loosen the lock nut next to the combustion tube brush and
unscrew the spiral retainer from the end of the brush assembly.
Refer to Figure 10-63, page 10–69, and Figure 10-94,
page 10–100.
2. Remove the lock nut from the spiral retainer, and remove the
combustion tube brush.
3. Loosen the lock nut next to the filter brush, and unscrew the
shaft extension.
4. Remove the lock nut and remove the filter brush.
5. Use care when removing the brushes, taking into account the
Teflon® washers that are located within the top and bottom of the
shaft extension. These washers are necessary for good lance flow.
Examine the washers before reassembling, and replace if
deformed.
6. To reassemble the brush assembly, place a new filter brush on
the auto cleaner assembly, and hand tighten the lock nut against
the brush.
7. Hand tighten the shaft extension onto the lance inlet until it
makes a dead stop. Stop threading once the Teflon washer has
been engaged. Over tightening can cause restrictions in flow.
8. Using wrenches, unthread the lock nut next to the filter brush
until it jams against the shaft extension. Turn wrench no more
than 1/8-turn to jam the nut against the shaft extension.

6–30 844 Series Maintenance

 9. Install a new combustion tube brush on the spiral retainer, and
hand tighten the lock nut against the brush.
10. Hand tighten the spiral retainer onto the shaft extension brush
until it makes a dead stop. Stop threading once the Teflon washer
has been engaged. Over tightening can cause restrictions in flow.
11. Using wrenches, unthread the lock nut next to the combustion
tube brush until it jams against the shaft extension. Turn the
wrench no more than 1/8-turn to jam the nut against the shaft
extension.
12. Once complete, the two cleaning brushes will have a loose fit
within the assembly.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–31

Maintaining the Manual Cleaner

Before Each Use

1. Lower the pedestal and remove the manual cleaner by twisting
the cleaning head counterclockwise and pulling up.
2. Remove the dust filter from the dust filter assembly.
3. Wipe clean the top and interior of the dust filter assembly.
4. Scrape and remove the dust and soot from the cleaning head.
Inspect the tip of the lance to verify that it is open. If it is
clogged, open it using the lance cleaning brush.
5. Inspect and lightly grease the o-ring on the manual cleaning
head. Replace as necessary. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the
O-Rings, page 6–8.
6. Remove the o-rings from the dust filter, clean, lightly grease,
place o-rings on a clean filter, and place the filter in the dust filter
assembly. Refer to Maintaining the Dust Filter, page 6–35, and
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
7. Reinstall the manual cleaner.
8. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Cleaning the Furnace Between Analyses

1. Lower the pedestal and remove the manual cleaner by twisting
the cleaning head counterclockwise and pulling up.
2. Scrape and remove the dust and soot from the cleaning head.
3. Inspect the tip of the lance to verify that it is open. If it is
clogged, open it using the lance cleaning brush.

PINCH HAZARD
The upward pedestal motion causes a pinch point.

4. Select the Clean button to raise the pedestal without pressurizing

the combustion area.
5. Turn On the vacuum and insert the cleaning brush into the
combustion area, and then brush the inside of the tube and dust
filter several times.
6. Lower the pedestal, and then turn Off the vacuum.
7. Reinstall the manual cleaner.

6–32 844 Series Maintenance

Maintaining the Combustion Tube

HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING

To prevent personal injury, allow the combustion tube to cool
to room temperature before performing this procedure.

Manual Removal
1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Verify that the pedestal is in the lower position. If it is not, select
the Pedestal button to lower it.
3. Remove the pedestal.
4. Hold the bottom of the combustion tube with one hand as you
actuate the combustion tube removal levers with the other.
5. Once the combustion tube assembly is unlocked, safely lower the
combustion tube and remove it.

Automated Removal
1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. In the software, select Instrument and then select Maintenance.
3. Select General Maintenance.
4. Select Execute next to Step 1 under Combustion Tube, and
remove the silicon nitride pedestal when the pedestal has
lowered.
5. Select Execute next to Step 2 under Combustion Tube to
automatically lower the combustion tube.
6. Remove the combustion tube from the cup assembly.

Replacement
1. Disassemble the combustion tube assembly. Refer to Figure
10-24, page 10–28.
2. Loosen the plastic lock nut and remove it from the combustion
tube.
3. Pull the combustion tube out of the assembly.
4. Inspect, clean, and lightly grease the combustion tube o-rings,
applying a thin coating of vacuum grease. Replace the o-rings if
they are cracked or worn. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the
O-Rings, page 6–8.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–33

 5. Insert a new combustion tube into the combustion tube base.
Install the lock nut to lock the combustion tube in place. Make
sure the inner combustion tube o-ring is between the two
assembly pieces. Reinstall the bottom combustion tube o-ring.
6. Remove the RF screen cover from the combustion housing by
removing the screw/latch at the top and pulling out and up on the
screen. Removal of the screen will automatically disable the RF
furnace.
7. Remove the Upper combustion tube o-ring using an o-ring
removal tool or small flat-blade screw driver. Refer to Figure
10-64, page 10–70.
8. Vacuum and/or wipe the o-ring groove so it is free of dust and
debris.
9. Clean the o-ring, grease lightly, and reinstall it. Replace the
o-ring if it is damaged. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the
O-Rings, page 6–8.
10. Replace the RF screen. Reinstall the screw/latch at the top of the
combustion housing.
11. Vacuum and wipe the cup assembly so that it is free of dust and
debris.

Manual Installation
1. Verify that the combustion tube release levers are in the actuated
(angled) position.
2. Reinstall the combustion tube assembly into the unit by raising it
into place. Make sure that the combustion tube release levers
return to the locked upright position and that the tube is securely
locked into the unit.
3. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Automated Installation
1. Place the combustion tube assembly on the lower cup assembly
making sure that the combustion tube assembly is seated firmly
against the work surface.
2. Select Execute next to Step 3 under Combustion Tube to raise
and lock the combustion tube into place.
3. Reinstall the silicon nitride pedestal when the cup assembly
lowers.
4. Select Execute next to Step 4 under Combustion Tube to perform
and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

6–34 844 Series Maintenance

Maintaining the Dust Filter

HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING

To prevent personal injury, allow the dust filter to cool to
room temperature before performing this procedure.

1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

2. In the software, select Instrument, then select Maintenance, and
then select General Maintenance. Select Off next to Dust Filter
Heater to turn Off the heated dust filter, and then allow it to cool.
3. Remove the dust filter from the unit by completing the following
steps.
· If using a CS844 or S844, follow steps 2 through 8 in
CS844/S844 Models, page 6–29.
· If using a C844, follow steps 2 through 8 in C844 Models,
page 6–28.
4. Remove the o-rings from the dust filter using the o-ring removal
tool.

HARMFUL/PROTECTIVE GLOVES/
PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
Citranox® is an acid and can cause skin and eye irritation.
Protective gloves and eyewear should be worn at all times
when handling this product. The cleaner fluid will foam.

Refer to the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional

information.

5. Clean the dust filter in an ultrasonic cleaner by completing the

following steps.
A. Mix a 1 to 2% solution of Citranox (or a similar acid cleaner
and detergent) in hot water.
B. Submerge the dust filter in solution.
C. Sonicate the dust filter for at least 30 minutes.
6. Rinse the dust filter thoroughly by completing the following steps.
A. Remove the dust filter from the ultrasonic cleaner.
B. Rinse the dust filter with clean running water.
C. Sonicate the dust filter in clean water for at least
30 minutes.
7. Dry the dust filter with warm air.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–35

 8. Check, clean, and lightly grease the o-rings with vacuum grease.
Reinstall the o-rings. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings,
page 6–8.
9. Reinstall the dust filter in the heated dust filter assembly.
10. Install the auto cleaner on the instrument by completing the
following steps.
A. Insert the auto cleaner into the dust filter assembly.
B. Twist the auto cleaner assembly to the left until it locks into
place and the alignment indicator is in the locked position.
C. Lower the auto cleaner lock ring to secure the auto cleaner
in place.
11. Reconnect the pneumatic tubing.
12. In the software, select Instrument, then select Maintenance, and
then select General Maintenance. Select On next to Dust Filter
Heater to turn On the heated dust filter.
13. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

6–36 844 Series Maintenance

Cleaning the Dust Filter Assembly

C844 Models
On occasion it may be necessary to clean the filter assembly to
remove any dust that has accumulated. Dust may accumulate if a filter
is not installed or if the filter has not been replaced as recommended
in the Periodic Maintenance Schedule, page 6–5.

Removing the Dust Filter Assembly from the Instrument

1. Follow steps 1 through 8 in C844 Models, page 6–28.
2. Remove the furnace out tube by following the steps in Removing
the Furnace Out Tube, page 6–41.
3. Remove the lance inlet tube from the dust filter housing
assembly.
4. Remove the three hex screws that attach the filter assembly to
the combustion housing.
5. Remove the dust filter housing from the instrument.

Cleaning the Dust Filter Assembly

Wipe clean the inside of the dust filter assembly. Use a tube
cleaner to clean out both fittings.

Installing the Filter Assembly on the Instrument

1. Inspect, clean/replace, and lightly grease the o-ring located in the
combustion tube upper seal on the top of the combustion
housing. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
2. Place the dust filter assembly back onto the combustion housing
and line up the screw holes in the collar mounting ring and the
combustion housing. Start the hex screws but leave them loose
so that the dust filter assembly can still rotate.
3. Rotate the dust filter assembly until the furnace out fitting lines
up with the furnace out tube. Connect the tube and tighten.
4. Firmly secure the dust filter assembly to the combustion housing
by tightening the three hex screws in the collar mounting ring.
5. Reattach the lance inlet tube to the filter housing.
6. Remove the upper o-ring from the dust filter assembly. Inspect,
clean/replace, and lightly grease the o-ring. Refer to Cleaning and
Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
7. Reinstall the upper o-ring in the dust filter assembly.
8. Reinstall a clean dust filter into the dust filter assembly.
9. Reinstall the auto cleaner on the filter assembly.
10. Perform and pass a Leak Check to ensure that the Furnace is
properly sealed. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–37

 CS844/S844 Models
The Heated Filter Assembly contains a heating element that is used to
maintain the dust filter at an elevated temperature. The elevated
temperature of the dust filter keeps moisture from accumulating,
which in turn, improves sulfur recoveries.
On occasion it may be necessary to clean the Heated Filter Assembly
to remove any dust that has accumulated. Dust may accumulate if a
filter is not installed or if the filter has not been replaced as
recommended in the Periodic Maintenance Schedule, page 6–5.

HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING

Before performing the following procedure be sure to turn Off
the heated dust filter (Select Instrument, Maintenance,
General Maintenance, Dust Filter Heater: Off) and allow the
components to cool to a safe handling temperature.

Removing the Heated Filter Assembly from the Instrument

Refer to Figure 10-51, page 10–56, for the following procedure.
1. Follow steps 1 through 8 in CS844/S844 Models, page 6–29.
2. Remove the furnace out tube by following Removing the Furnace
Out Tube, page 6–41.
3. Remove the lance inlet tube from dust filter housing assembly.
4. Remove the upper right alcove casting from behind auto cleaner
assembly by loosening the hex screw on the retaining clip at the
top of the alcove. Slide the alcove up and off of the unit.
5. Disconnect the dust filter heater power (two pin, white wires) and
thermocouple (two pin, yellow connector) cables from the service
card at the upper right corner of the unit.
6. Remove the three hex screws that attach the heated filter
assembly to the combustion housing.
7. Remove the heated dust filter housing from the instrument.

Cleaning the Heated Filter Assembly

1. Remove the Heater & Filter Intermedia by pushing it out through
the bottom of the assembly.
2. Remove the o-ring from the Heater & Filter Intermedia. Wipe the
part clean. Inspect, clean/replace, and lightly grease the o-ring.
Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
3. Remove the block seal lead heater by removing the 4 screws.
Slide the block seal lead heater and block inner seal lead heater
and both o-rings away from the heated filter assembly. Inspect
and clean the o-rings. If the small o-ring is damaged, the cable
connectors will need to be removed to replace the o-ring.

6–38 844 Series Maintenance

 4. Remove the heater coil by working it up and out of the top of the
dust filter assembly. It may be necessary to compress the coils to
remove it.
5. Wipe clean the heater coil and the inside of the heated filter
assembly. Use a tube cleaner to clean out both fittings. Clean the
heater coil feed through slot on back of heated filter assembly.
6. Reinstall the heater coil in the heated filter assembly by slowly
working it into place. It may be necessary to compress the coils
of the heater.
7. Reinstall the Heater & Filter Intermedia by working it through the
coil with a twisting action. Be sure that the Heater & Filter
Intermedia is fully seated in the Heated Filter Assembly.
8. Work the heater coil into place by using a blunt ended tool to
push each coil turn into position. Space the coils evenly.
9. Apply a light coat of grease to the two o-rings that seal the block
seal lead heater and block inner seal lead heater to the heater coil
and the heated filter assembly. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing
the O-Rings, page 6–8.
10. Reinstall the block inner seal lead heater and the block seal lead
heater to the heated filter assembly.

Installing the Heated Filter Assembly on the Instrument

1. Inspect, clean/replace, and lightly grease the o-ring located in the
combustion tube upper seal on the top of combustion housing.
Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
2. Place the dust filter assembly back onto the combustion housing
and line up the screw holes in the collar mounting ring and the
combustion housing. Start the hex screws but leave them loose
so that the heated filter assembly can still rotate.
3. Plug in the heater coil power and thermocouple connectors.
4. Reinstall the upper right alcove. Make sure that all tubes and
wires are properly routed through the slot in the alcove and that
the bottom of the alcove is properly held into place. Reattach the
clip to hold the top of the alcove in place.
5. Rotate the dust filter assembly until the furnace out fitting lines
up with the furnace out tube. Connect the tube and tighten.
6. Firmly secure the dust filter assembly to the combustion housing
by tightening the three hex screws in the collar mounting ring.
7. Reattach the lance inlet tube to the dust filter housing.
8. Remove the upper o-ring from the dust filter assembly. Inspect,
clean/replace, and lightly grease the o-ring. Refer to Cleaning and
Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
9. Reinstall the upper o-ring in the dust filter assembly.
10. Reinstall a clean dust filter into the dust filter assembly.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–39

 11. Reinstall the auto cleaner on the filter assembly.
12. Perform and pass a Leak Check to ensure that the furnace is
properly sealed. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

6–40 844 Series Maintenance

Maintaining the Furnace Out Tube
The furnace out tube is the stainless steel tube that connects the dust
filter assembly to the flow scrubber tube. Periodically, dust will
accumulate within the tube and elbow fitting and it will need to be
cleaned. The schedule for cleaning will vary depending on the type of
samples that are analyzed. The tube and elbow should be visually
inspected once per month. The tube should be cleaned according to
the following procedure when it is dirty or when dust has noticeably
collected within the flow scrubber tube.

Removing the Furnace Out Tube

1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Loosen the compression fitting that connects the furnace out tube
to the elbow fitting above the flow scrubber. Refer to Figure 6-11,
page 6–43.
3. Disconnect the face seal fitting that attaches the furnace out tube
to the dust filter assembly.
4. Swing the furnace out tube away from the instrument and
disconnect the compression fitting. It may be necessary to loosen
the three hex screws that hold the dust filter assembly to the RF
coil enclosure. This will allow the dust filter assembly to rotate to
allow for easier removal.
5. Remove the furnace out tube.
The elbow fitting screws into the threaded reagent tube fitting. There
is an o-ring seal between the elbow fitting and the threaded reagent
tube fitting. Improper installation of the elbow fitting will cause the
system to leak. The elbow fitting does not need to be removed. In
case of removal, loosen the elbow fitting nut by turning it fully
counter-clockwise. Inspect the elbow fitting o-ring. Completely thread
the elbow fitting into the threaded reagent tube fitting and tighten the
elbow fitting nut.

Cleaning the Furnace Out Tube

1. Remove loose dust from the inside of the tube by feeding a tube
cleaner through the furnace out tube.
2. Wipe clean both ends of the furnace out tube.
3. Remove the flow scrubber tube. Refer to Removing the Flow
Scrubber Tube, page 6–21. Cover the lower flow scrubber tube
fitting to ensure that no dust falls into it.
4. Remove loose dust from the elbow fitting by feeding a pipe
cleaner into both ends of the fitting. The elbow fitting does not
need to be removed from the front panel.
5. Reinstall the flow scrubber tube. Refer to Installing the Flow
Scrubber Tube, page 6–23.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–41

 Installing the Furnace Out Tube
1. Set the height of the threaded reagent tube fitting by threading
the fitting up/down within the front panel bracket until the elbow
fitting is level with the furnace out port on the dust filter
assembly.
2. If a new furnace out tube is being installed, place the fitting nut,
back ferrule, and front ferrule on the furnace out tube.
3. Place the furnace out tube into the elbow fitting as far as it will
go. Do not tighten the nut.
4. Swing the tube into place to ensure the proper fit. It may be
necessary to loosen the three hex screws that hold the dust filter
assembly to the RF coil enclosure. This will allow the dust filter
assembly to rotate to allow for easier installation.
5. Tighten the face seal fitting nut to attach the furnace out tube to
the dust filter assembly.
6. Tighten the compression fitting nut to swage the ferrules onto the
tube and attach the furnace out tube to the elbow fitting above
the flow scrubber.
7. If necessary, retighten the three hex-head screws that hold the
dust filter assembly to the RF coil enclosure.
8. Perform and pass a leak check to ensure that the furnace is
properly sealed. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

6–42 844 Series Maintenance

 Figure 6-11
Furnace Out Tube Maintenance

Maintenance 844 Series 6–43

Replacing the Dust Eject (Pinch Valve) Tubing

The pinch valve tubing should be inspected or replaced monthly.

Replacement depends on the condition of the tube.
1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Turn Off the pneumatic gas supply. This should be achieved by
shutting Off the pneumatic gas at the source to ensure that the
gas supply remains off for the duration of the maintenance.
3. Remove the bottom right casting by removing the work surface
and removing the three outermost screws (two on the right and
one on the left). Refer to Figure 6-12, following.

Figure 6-12
Right Casting Removal

If using a shuttle loader, refer to Maintenance, page 5–12.

6–44 844 Series Maintenance

 4. Locate pinch valve and remove cap. Push it in toward the housing
and rotate it counter-clockwise as viewed from fitting end of the
housing. Refer to Figure 6-13, following.

Figure 6-13
Pinch Valve Tubing

The color of the flexible silicone tubing may vary.

5. Slide the tubing out of the housing assembly. Remove the hose
clamps on both ends of the tubing.
6. When inspecting the tube, check for any buildup of dust and clean
it out. Check to verify there are no cracks in the tubing; replace it
if necessary.
7. Inspect the pinch tube union located on the front of the lower
pneumatic cylinder. Remove any dust that has accumulated
within the union.
8. Install the hose clamps on the tubing and attach both ends.
9. Slide the tubing back into the pinch valve, and then reinstall
the cap.
10. Install the bottom casting and work surface.
11. Turn On the pneumatic gas.
12. Perform and pass a segmented leak check. Refer to Leak Check,
page 8–15.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–45

Maintaining the Coolant System

The coolant in the heat exchanger cools the induction coil and should
be changed every ninety days to maintain furnace efficiency.
Before replacing the coolant, locate the furnace coolant drain line
assembly, supplied in the Components and Accessories, page
1–48, and a container to accept the spent coolant.

1. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Maintenance Ø

General Maintenance.
2. Select Off next to Coolant Pump.
3. Remove the cap from the coolant reservoir located on the rear of
the instrument. Refer to Figure 6-14, page 6–47.
4. Remove the flow controller access door located behind the left
door of the instrument. Refer to Figure 6-15, page 6–47.
5. Locate the coolant drain fitting, hanging just behind the access
door.
6. Position the end of the furnace coolant drain line assembly
(located in the component pack) that does not have a fitting into
a container appropriate for collecting spent coolant.
7. Connect the fitting from the furnace coolant drain line assembly
to the coolant drain fitting hanging from the instrument.
8. Let the spent coolant flow into the container until it has stopped.
9. After the flow has stopped, remove the furnace coolant drain line
Assembly and reinstall the flow controller access door.
10. Fill the coolant reservoir with the specified coolant until the
coolant level is approximately 1/2-inch from the top of the
reservoir and below the threads.
11. Reinstall the coolant reservoir cap.

12. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Maintenance Ø

General Maintenance.
13. Select On next to Coolant Pump.

6–46 844 Series Maintenance

 Figure 6-14
Coolant Reservoir Cap

Figure 6-15
Drain Fitting Access Door

Maintenance 844 Series 6–47

Maintaining the Vacuum Cleaner

The vacuum cleaner requires regular maintenance in order to maintain

the cleaning efficiency of the auto cleaner unit. Check the vacuum
manifold and vacuum filter once per week.

Vacuum Cleaner Manifold

The vacuum manifold is used to connect the vacuum cleaner to the
cleanup hose and the pinch tubing. Over time it can become filled with
dust if the proper maintenance is not performed.

Weekly

PINCH HAZARD
The upward pedestal motion causes a pinch point.

1. If the pedestal is not in the up position, raise it by pressing the

Pedestal button.
2. Turn On the vacuum cleaner and remove the cleanup hose from
its docked position on the front of the instrument.
3. Allow the vacuum cleaner to run for 20 seconds to remove any
loose dust in the vacuum manifold.
4. Turn Off the vacuum cleaner and return the cleanup hose to its
docked position on the front of the instrument.

Monthly
1. Perform the weekly maintenance prior to performing the following
steps.
2. Remove the vacuum cleaner manifold from its location on the
back lower right position of the unit and disconnect the hoses
being careful not to spill any dust remaining in the manifold.
3. Use a brush to remove as much dust from the manifold as
possible.
4. Wipe out the inside of the manifold.
5. Make sure that the pinch tube port is clear of dust.
6. Remove all o-rings from the vacuum manifold ports. Clean, lightly
grease and reinstall the o-rings. Replace any o-rings that are
damaged. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.
7. Wipe off the hose connection ends.
8. Reinstall the hoses and the vacuum manifold on the back of the
unit.

6–48 844 Series Maintenance

Performing Gas Dose Maintenance

Gas dose is not applicable to all instrument configurations.

Gas dose maintenance should be performed only when there is a

problem with the dose system. For example, perform this procedure if
no signal appears while performing a gas dose or if a leak is found in
the gas dose assembly.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING

Turn Off the instrument and disconnect it from AC Facility
Power before removing the instrument side panel. Contact
with voltages can cause severe injury.

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES

The circuit board has components that are sensitive to
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Do not come into contact with
the circuit board unless properly grounded.
1. Perform a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.
2. Turn Off the pneumatic supply at the source.
3. Turn Off the carrier gas at the source.
4. Turn Off the gas dose at the source.

PINCH HAZARD
Raising the electrode/pedestal causes a pinch point.

5. Relieve the pneumatic pressure by raising and lowering the

electrode/pedestal several times.
6. Turn Off the instrument, and then disconnect it from AC facility
power.
7. Remove the instrument side panel (left side when facing the front
of the instrument).

Maintenance 844 Series 6–49

 8. Locate the gas dose assembly. Refer to Figure 6-16, following.

Figure 6-16
Gas Dose Assembly

9. On the gas dose assembly, there are two endcaps. Grasp one
endcap and then rotate and pull out to remove the assembly.
Repeat for second endcap. Refer to Figure 6-17, following.

Figure 6-17
Endcap for Gas Dose Assembly

6–50 844 Series Maintenance

 10. Inspect, clean, and lightly grease the o-rings on the endcaps.
Replace the o-rings if they are cracked or worn. Apply a thin
coating of vacuum grease. Refer to Figure 6-18, following, and
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.

Figure 6-18
Endcap O-Ring

11. Obtain the screen/stem doser removal tool from the accessory
pack. A #6 screw may be used instead, if desired.
12. Thread the tool into the gas doser valve stem, and then gently
pull out valve stem. Repeat for other valve stem. Refer to
Figure 6-19, following.

Figure 6-19
Valve Stem in Gas Dose Manifold

13. Inspect, clean, and lightly grease the o-rings on the valve stems.
Replace the o-rings if they are cracked or worn. Apply a thin
coating of vacuum grease. Refer to Figure 6-20, following, and
Cleaning and Greasing the O-Rings, page 6–8.

Figure 6-20
Valve Stem

14. Insert one valve stem into the gas doser manifold, and then push
until seated. Repeat for the other valve stem.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–51

 CAUTION
The end cap must be secured or it will blow off the gas dose
manifold when pressure is applied.

15. Reinstall the endcap onto the valve stem by aligning the flat parts
of the endcap to the top and bottom of valve stem, and then
turning the endcap to secure in place. Repeat for the second
endcap.
CAUTION
The end cap must be secured or it will blow off the gas dose
manifold when pressure is applied.

16. Reinstall the instrument side panel.

17. Reconnect the instrument to facility power, and then turn On the
instrument power.
18. Turn On the gas dose at the source.
19. Turn On pneumatic gas at source.
20. Turn On the carrier gas.
21. Perform and pass a leak check. Refer to Leak Check, page 8–15.

6–52 844 Series Maintenance

Cleaning the Touch Screen

CAUTION
DO NOT use alcohol (methyl, ethyl or isopropyl) or any strong
solvent. Do not use thinner or benzene, abrasive cleaners or
compressed air to clean the touch monitor.

Avoid getting liquids inside the touch screen. Never apply

liquid directly on the screen. If liquid does get inside, have a
qualified service technician check it before applying power.

Do not wipe the screen with a cloth or sponge that could

scratch the surface.

There is no schedule for cleaning the touch screen. It can be

performed as often as the user sees fit, depending on the cleanliness
of the operation.
1. Turn Off the touch screen by pressing the Power button on the
power strip attached to the back of the touch screen.
2. Disconnect the AC power cable.
3. To clean the touch-screen cabinet, use a cloth lightly dampened
with a mild detergent.
4. To clean the touch-screen glass, use window or glass cleaner.
Apply the cleaner to a clean cloth or sponge and wipe the screen.
Never apply the cleaner directly to the screen.
5. Connect the monitor to AC power.
6. Turn On the touch screen by pressing the Power button on the
power strip attached to the back of the touch screen.

Maintenance 844 Series 6–53

Calibrating the Touch Screen

The following procedure is not required and does not appear on all
touch screen models.
The LECO-supplied touch screen has been calibrated before shipment.
The following procedure applies only if the calibration has to be
repeated.

Always select the screen resolution that is recommended by

Microsoft® Windows® for the installed monitor.

1. In the Cornerstone® brand software, select Instrument, then

select Maintenance, and then select General Maintenance.
2. In the Touchscreen section, select Calibrate.

3. Follow the instructions by touching the targets and verifying the

cursor follows your finger.
4. Accept the calibration, or redo it if appropriate.
5. Close the Elo Touch Screen Configuration software.

The Elo software will automatically start whenever the desktop screen
orientation is changed. Close the window because the calibration is
complete.
6. Verify the touch screen works for computer programs.

6–54 844 Series Maintenance

Performing Air Filter Maintenance

There are two air filters on the rear of the instrument. The top filter is
attached to the heat exchanger, and the lower filter is attached to the
rear panel. Air filters should be visually inspected daily and cleaned
weekly. Cleaning schedule varies according to instrument usage and
environment. Failure to regularly clean the air filters will reduce air
flow and reduce the capacity of the instrument to manage generated
heat.
1. Remove the air filters. The top filter is removed by sliding it up,
and the lower filter is removed by sliding it to the right, toward
the doser fittings.
2. Vacuum the air filters daily and wash them monthly. Wash the air
filters in a mild solution of detergent, and then allow them to air
dry.
3. Reinstall the air filters when dry.

Figure 6-21
Air Filter Location

Maintenance 844 Series 6–55

Automation Maintenance

The following section applies only to instruments with the available

automation option installed.

Shuttle Loader
1. Before performing maintenance on the shuttle loader hardware,
place the motors into the maintenance position by navigating to
Instrument Ø Automation Ø Shuttle Loader Ø Maintenance.

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES

POSSIBLE SHUTTLE LOADER MOTOR DAMAGE
The shuttle loader motors have components that are
sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). All handling
should be completed using proper ESD protection.

CAUTION
POSSIBLE SHUTTLE LOADER MOTOR DAMAGE
Never remove or reinstall any of the shuttle loader motors
without performing the maintenance step in the following
software location:

Instrument Ø Automation Ø Shuttle Loader Ø Maintenance

The motors can be damaged if removed while power is

applied.

2. Select the Execute button for Step 1 to place the motor into a
maintenance position and to turn Off power to the motor.
3. Perform the desired shuttle loader maintenance.
4. Once maintenance has been completed, select the Execute button
for Step 2 to return power to the motor for normal use.

Rotary Motor Maintenance

Refer to Figure 6-22, page 6–57, when performing the following
maintenance procedures.
· Using a foam wipe from the Accessory Pack, clean inside the bore
of the gripper motor cover monthly.
· Remove, clean, and lubricate the three o-rings on the crucible
gripper and the shuttle loader with a liberal amount of silicone-
based lubricant such as LECO 774-614 Molykote, or equivalent,
once a month or if pneumatic leaks are heard, grippers stick, or
the rotary motor repeatedly stalls. Refer to Cleaning and Greasing
the O-Rings, page 6–8.

6–56 844 Series Maintenance

 Follow these guidelines when reassembling the assembly:
o Align the setscrew against the flat of the motor shaft. Refer to
Figure 6-23, page 6–58, for an exploded view showing the flat
of the motor shaft.
o Make sure the spacer is installed between the motor top and
the crucible gripper bottom.

Figure 6-22
Rotary Motor and Gripper Assembly

Maintenance 844 Series 6–57

 Figure 6-23
Flat of Motor Shaft – Exploded View

6–58 844 Series Maintenance

 Crucible Gripper Maintenance
Refer to Figure 6-24, following, when performing the following
maintenance procedures.
· Inspect the gripper finger actuator cones once a month, and
replace them when they show signs of uneven wear.
· Remove, clean, and lubricate the two gripper finger actuator cone
o-rings with a liberal amount of silicone-based lubricant such as
LECO 774-614 Molykote, or equivalent, once a month or if the
grippers open/close unevenly.

Figure 6-24
Crucible Gripper Assembly

Maintenance 844 Series 6–59

 Shuttle Loader Horizontal Housing Maintenance
Remove the gripper assembly, and then remove the front cover before
completing maintenance on the shuttle loader horizontal housing.
Refer to Figure 6-25, page 6–60, when performing the following
maintenance procedures. These procedures should be performed once
a month, though certain environments may require more frequent
maintenance.
· Clean debris from the bottom of the horizontal housing with a foam
wipe from the Accessory Pack or with compressed air.
· Use compressed air to clear debris from the linear worm gear.
Do not lubricate the linear worm gear.
· Clean the support roller bearing with a foam wipe from the
Accessory Pack.

Figure 6-25
Shuttle Loader Horizontal Housing

6–60 844 Series Maintenance

7 Theory of Operation
The Theory of Operation chapter provides a technical description of the
internal components and analysis phases for the CS844, C844, and
S844 Carbon/Sulfur Analyzers.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 7–3
844 Series Carbon/Sulfur Analyzers................................................. 7–5
Calculation of Analysis Results ........................................................ 7–6
Calculate Area ......................................................................... 7–7
Adjusted Area .......................................................................... 7–7
Blank................................................................................. 7–7
Sensitivity Factor ................................................................ 7–8
Adjusted Area ..................................................................... 7–8
Determine Analyte Mass............................................................ 7–8
Determine Range ................................................................ 7–8
Apply Calibration................................................................. 7–9
Drift Correction ................................................................... 7–9
Determine Final Analyte Mass with the Blended Approach ........ 7–9
Determine Composition............................................................. 7–9
Calculate Final Compositions................................................. 7–9
Calculation of the Calibration Equation........................................... 7–10
Determine the Calibration Equation .......................................... 7–10
Calibration Equation .......................................................... 7–10
Apply Calibration............................................................... 7–11
Calculate Final Compositions............................................... 7–11
Weighting Factors ............................................................. 7–11
Calibration Statistics—RMS Error ......................................... 7–12
Calibration Statistics—Coefficient of Determination................ 7–12
Override Conditions ................................................................ 7–12
Minimum Number of Replicates ........................................... 7–13
Single Cluster ................................................................... 7–13
Cornerstone Brand Software Rounding........................................... 7–14
Rounding Style: Fixed Decimal or Variable (n=1) .................. 7–14

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–1

 Rounding Style: Significant Digits........................................ 7–14
Rounding Style: Variable (n>1) .......................................... 7–15
Flow Diagrams ............................................................................ 7–16

7–2 844 Series Theory of Operation

Illustrations

Figure 7-1 Flow Diagram (CS844) ...................................................... 7–16

Figure 7-2 Flow Diagram (CS844ES)................................................... 7–17
Figure 7-3 Flow Diagram (C844) ........................................................ 7–18
Figure 7-4 Flow Diagram (S844) ........................................................ 7–19
Figure 7-5 Flow Diagram (S844ES)..................................................... 7–20

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–3

This page intentionally left blank.

7–4 844 Series Theory of Operation

844 Series Carbon/Sulfur Analyzers

Not all components are found in all configurations.

The 844 Series carbon/sulfur analyzer is designed for wide-range

measurement of carbon and sulfur content of metals, ores, ceramics,
and other inorganic materials. The instrument features custom
software designed specifically for touch operation.
A pre-weighed sample of approximately 1 gram is combusted in a
stream of purified oxygen, using RF induction to heat the sample.
Carbon and sulfur present in the sample are oxidized to carbon dioxide
(CO2) and sulfur dioxide (SO2), and swept by the oxygen carrier
through a heated dust filter, a drying reagent, and then through two
non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) cells, where sulfur is detected as SO2.
The gas flow continues past a heated catalyst, where carbon monoxide
(CO) is converted to CO2, and where SO2 is converted to sulfur trioxide
(SO3), which is subsequently removed by a filter. Carbon is then
detected as CO2 by a second pair of NDIR cells. A pressure controller is
used to maintain constant pressure in the NDIR cells so as to reduce
interference from natural variations in atmospheric pressure. The final
component in the flow stream is an electronic flow sensor, which is
used for diagnostic purposes to monitor the carrier flow.
Non-dispersive infrared cells are based on the principle that CO2 and
SO2 absorb infrared (IR) energy at unique wavelengths within the IR
spectrum. Incident IR energy at these wavelengths is absorbed as the
gases pass through IR absorption cells. Because absorption is
dependent upon the path length, short and long path-length IR cells
are provided for measurement of high- and low-range signals. The
software automatically selects which cell to use for optimum
measurement. The composition of unknown samples is determined
relative to calibration standards. To reduce interferences from
instrument drift, reference measurements of pure carrier gas are made
prior to each analysis.

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–5

Calculation of Analysis Results

An asterisk (*) indicates variables and definitions that are applicable

only to dual-range instruments.
Table of Symbols, Constants, and Variables
Symbol Purpose (Units) Type Entry

Adjusted Area (cts) Calculated for each

Aadj, range Area after corrections have been applied for Calculated analyte for each
blank, moisture, etc. analysis

Blank Area (cts)

Calculated based on
Ab,range An area representing a baseline analyte value in Calculated user-selected
consumables or introduced to the system via samples
trapped atmospheric gases. Default value is 0.

Raw Area (cts)

Calculated for each
Arange The area calculated from the integration period. Calculated analyte for each
No blank or drift corrections have been made to sample
this value.

Composition (%, ppm)

Calculated for Each
C The composition of analyte in the sample given in Calculated
Sample
units of % or ppm.

Drift Factor Method Calculated as

Fdrift Parameter Determined by User
A scalar value used to adjust for instrument drift.

Sensitivity Factor R&D

Service
Fsensitivity A scalar value used to convert area into mass
Constant
Varies by IR Cell
units, adjusted to make calibration slope ~ 1 and by model

Analyte Mass (g)

Calculated for Each
G The determined mass of analyte for a particular Calculated
Sample
cell or range.

Blended Analyte Mass (g)*

Calculated for Each
Gblended The resultant analyte mass after blending results Calculated
Sample
from the high and low range results.

Drifted Analyte Mass (g)

The mass of analyte for a particular cell or range Calculated for Each
Gdrift Calculated
Sample
that has been corrected for day-to-day changes in
detector signal.

Calculated Analyte Mass, High Range (g)*

Calculated for Each
Ghigh The analyte mass as calculated using the high Calculated
Sample
range cell

7–6 844 Series Theory of Operation

 Table of Symbols, Constants, and Variables
Symbol Purpose (Units) Type Entry

Calculated Analyte Mass, Low Range (g)*

Calculated for Each
Glow The analyte mass as calculated using the low Calculated
Sample
range cell

Maximum Peak Height (cts)

Determine for Each
Hp The maximum height of an analyte peak for a Measurement
Sample
given sample.

Sample Mass (g)

Sample Entered for each
m A scalar value used to record the Parameter sample
mass of the analyzed sample.

High Range Threshold (cts)*

The peak height (maximum) at which the results Method User entered for
ThH Constant each method
change from the blended region to the high cell
results.

Low Range Threshold (cts)*

The peak height (maximum) at which the results Method User entered for
ThL Constant each method
change from the low cell results to the blended
region results.

Calculate Area
The final output signals, whether baseline corrected, wedge rule
corrected, or uncorrected, are used to determine a raw peak area,
Arange, for each analyte range. This raw area is reported in the
expanded replicate information in the Cornerstone® brand software.
Further corrections, as follows, are applied to the raw total area before
they can be used with a calibration.

Adjusted Area
The adjusted area, Aadj, range, corrects the raw area for sensitivity
factors and blank values.

Blank
The blank value, Ab,range, is the average raw area from a set of samples
(empty crucibles, boats, etc.) determined by the user. The blank value
is used to account for analyte gases that are repeatedly introduced
through consumables or atmosphere. The default blank value is 0
1 n
Ab, range = å Arange
n 1
where n is the number of blank samples as selected by the user.

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–7

 Sensitivity Factor
The sensitivity factor, Fsensitivity, is a factor that maintains a calibration
slope near 1. It is used to ensure consistent slopes across all products,
so it is easy to determine when cell sensitivity (the slope) is incorrect.
It enables better instrument troubleshooting, though the use of the
sensitivity factor means the instrument sensitivity cannot be
determined from the calibration slope.
A sensitivity factor is determined for each detector in an instrument
and may vary with software version.

Adjusted Area
The adjusted area can be calculated as follows:
Aadj,range = (Arange - Ab ,range ) × Fsensitivity

Determine Analyte Mass

The mass of each analyte must be determined before the composition
can be reported. The calibration is used for this calculation.

Determine Range
This section is applicable only to dual-range instruments.

If an instrument utilizes both a high and low range for a given analyte,
the correct mass result must be used. The result may come from the
high range, low range, or a blend of both depending on the method
settings.
If a blended result is desired, the value is determined based on the
high and low range thresholds set by the user (ThH and ThL) and the
maximum peak height of the low range result for each analysis (Hp).
If:
Hp > ThH, Use high range
Hp < ThL, Use low range
ThL < Hp < ThL, Use blended results, detailed as follows:
The peak height is reported in the expanded replicate information in
the Cornerstone brand software.

7–8 844 Series Theory of Operation

 Apply Calibration
If a calibration exists for the method in use, the areas calculated for
each range are used to determine the mass of analyte in the sample.
If no calibration exists, a default of y=1x is used. The basic calibration
equation is of the form
Aadj = k 0 + k1 × G
where G (grams) is the analyte mass for a given cell and the k values
are constants determined in the calibration. The adjusted area is used
and the mass result is calculated. For instruments with multiple
ranges, the analyte mass is usually calculated for each range.

Drift Correction
The drift factor, Fdrift, corrects for day-to-day changes in signal due to
changing environmental, matrix, or sample conditions. It is a simple
multiplicative factor applied to the final analyte mass and reduces the
frequency with which new calibrations need to be set. The drift factor
value is determined against a calibration and has a default value of 1.
Gdrift = G × Fdrift

Determine Final Analyte Mass with the Blended Approach

This section is applicable only to dual-range instruments.

If the analyte mass is to be calculated from a peak height that falls

between the low and high threshold values, the final value will be a
weighted average of the results from the high and low range. The final
result is

æ ö
÷÷ × (G high (H p - Th L ) + Glow (Th H - H p ))
1
Gblended = çç
è Th H - Th L ø
Thorough calibrations are required at both the low and high ranges to
optimize signal blending.

Determine Composition
The determined analyte mass, G or Gblended, is used in conjunction with
the sample mass to determine the analyte composition.

Calculate Final Compositions

The total determined composition in weight percent is defined as
æGö
C (%) = 100 × ç ÷
èmø
The composition will also be determined in parts per million (ppm)

æGö
C ( ppm) = 10 6 × ç ÷
èmø

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–9

Calculation of the Calibration Equation

Table of Symbols, Constants, and Variables

Symbol Purpose (Units) Type Entry

Adjusted Area (cts) Calculated for each

Aadj, range Area after corrections have been applied for Calculated analyte for each
blank, moisture, etc. analysis

Composition (%, ppm)

Calculated for Each
C The composition of analyte in the sample given in Calculated
Sample
units of % or ppm.

Analyte Mass (g)

Calculated for Each
G The determined mass of analyte for a particular Calculated
Sample
cell or range.

Calibration Coefficient
Calculated for Each
k The best-fit coefficients determined weighted least Calculated
Method
squares

The number of replicate samples included in the Calculated for Each

n calibration.
Calculated
Calibration

Calibration Weighting Factor

The weighting factors can be used to increase or Sample User entered for
w decrease the relative importance of individual Parameter each method
replicates included in the calibration set.
The default value is 1.0.

Determine the Calibration Equation

The calibration equation is an empirical model describing how the
response of the analyzer changes with the analyte. A series of known
calibration standards, spanning the range of interest, are measured so
the response of the analyzer can be modeled as a polynomial
equation.
Contact the LECO Service Department to enable the Higher Order
Calibration Option.

Calibration Equation
A weighted least squares algorithm is used to determine the
polynomial coefficients, k.
W × Aadj = k0 + k1 × G
By selecting the Regression Type option to Force Through Origin, the
operator can force the calibration equation through the origin:
k0 = 0

7–10 844 Series Theory of Operation

 If the high order calibration option is enabled, the operator can select
quadratic and cubic regression orders:

W × Aadj = k0 + k1 × G + k2 × G 2 + k3 × G3

Apply Calibration
Given the coefficients, K, the determined analyte mass, G, can be
determined for each replicate by solving the following equation:
Aadj = k 0 + k1 × G
For higher order calibrations, Cornerstone brand software finds a valid
solution for the following polynomial equation:

Aadj = k0 + k1 × G + k2 × G 2 + k3 × G 3

Calculate Final Compositions

The total determined composition in weight percent is defined as:

æGö
C (%) = 100 × ç ÷
èmø
The composition will also be determined in parts per million (ppm):

æGö
C ( ppm) = 106 × ç ÷
è mø

Weighting Factors
Weighting factors, W, are calculated as:

g × wi
Wi =
0.0001 + g i2
where

1 n
g= å gi
n 1
g is the certified analyte mass for each replicate, i, included in the
calibration and w is a user entered weighting factor. By default, the
user defined weighting factors, w, are set to 1.0. If the higher order
calibration option is enabled, the operator can view and edit the
weighting factors.

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–11

 Calibration Statistics—RMS Error
The Root Mean Square (RMS) Error is a measure of the accuracy of the
calibration. The accuracy of the calibration improves as the RMS Error
approaches zero.
The RMS Error is determined as:
2

å (g - gi ,certified )
n

i ,measured
RMS Error (g) = 1
n -n
Where n is the degree of freedom as determined by the combination of
Regression Order and Regression Type as follows:
Regression Force Full
Order Through Origin Regression
Linear 1 2
*Quadratic 2 3
*Cubic 3 4
*Available only with the Higher Order Calibration Option

Calibration Statistics—Coefficient of Determination

The Coefficient of Determination, R2, is a measure of how well the
measured results fit the calibration model. The fit improves as R2
approaches 1. R2 is determined as:
2

å (g )
n

i , measured - gi , certified
R2 = 1- 1
2

å (g )
n

i , measured -g
1

Override Conditions
When possible, Cornerstone brand software chooses a Regression
Order of “Linear” and a Regression Type of “Full Regression” whenever
a new calibration equation is created.
To prevent invalid calibration equations, the software will automatically
override user settings and defaults to ensure that a valid calibration
equation is determined. The following criteria are used:

7–12 844 Series Theory of Operation

 Minimum Number of Replicates
The number of replicate measurements included must exceed the
degrees of freedom of the calibration. Cornerstone will automatically
reduce the regression order until the criteria in the following table are
satisfied.
Regression Force Full
Order Through Origin Regression
Linear 1 3
*Quadratic 3 4
*Cubic 4 5
*Available only with the Higher Order Calibration Option

Single Cluster
No matter how many replicates are included, calibrations that are
recognized as a single cluster of measurements will automatically be
set to a Regression Order of “Linear” and a Regression Type of “Force
Through Origin.”
The calibration data will be interpreted as a single cluster if any of the
following criteria are true:
· The range of analyte present in the calibration data is less than
three times the range of the absolute error (g) of the calibration.
max (analyte( g ) cert ) - min (analyte( g ) cert ) < 3 · [max (Error(g )) - min (Error(g ))]

· The minimum amount of analyte is greater than 80% of the

maximum amount of analyte included in the calibration data.
max (analyte( g ) cert ) > 80% · max (analyte( g ) cert )

· The slope is negative.

Slope < 0

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–13

Cornerstone Brand Software Rounding

The following section provides examples of the different methods of

rounding within the Cornerstone brand software. Refer to Analyte Units
Tab, page 4–6, and Editing Styles, page 4–11.
Meaningful digits in the following tables are underlined.

Rounding Style: Fixed Decimal or Variable (n=1)

Actual Result
Decimal
12.3456789 1.23456789 0.123456789 0.0123456789
Places*
1 12.3 1.2 0.1 0.0
2 12.35 1.23 0.12 0.01
3** 12.346 1.235 0.123 0.012
4** 12.3457 1.2346 0.1235 0.0123
5 12.34568 1.23457 0.12346 0.01235
6 12.345679 1.234568 0.123457 0.012346
*Decimal Places indicates the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal.
**The default value is 4 when the units are % and 3 when the units are ppm, µg/g,
or mg/kg.

Rounding Style: Significant Digits

Actual Result
Significant
12.3456789 1.23456789 0.123456789 0.0123456789
Digits*
1 10. 1. 0.1 0.01
2 12. 1.2 0.12 0.012
3** 12.3 1.23 0.123 0.0123
4 12.35 1.235 0.1235 0.01235
5 12.346 1.2346 0.12346 0.012346
6 12.3457 1.23457 0.123457 0.0123457
*Significant Digits indicates the number of meaningful digits, including zero digits
except when leading (0.001) and trailing (1000). Trailing zeros will be displayed
when significant (for example: 0.0100)
**The default value is 3 for all units (%, ppm, µg/g, or mg/kg).
The software displays “0” when the rounding style is set to Significant
Digits and the value observed is between -0.0000000001 and
+0.0000000001.

7–14 844 Series Theory of Operation

 Rounding Style: Variable (n>1)
Actual Results
Significant 12.3456789 ± 0.0123456789 ±
Digits (n>1)* 0.123456789 0.000123456789
1 12.3 ± 0.1 0.0123 ± 0.0001
2 12.35 ± 0.12 0.01235 ± 0.00012
3 12.346 ± 0.123 0.012346 ± 0.000123
4 12.3457 ± 0.1235 0.0123457 ± 0.0001235
5 12.34568 ± 0.12346 0.01234568 ± 0.00012346
6 12.345679 ± 0.123457 0.012345679 ± 0.000123457
*Significant Digits (n>1) indicates the number of significant digits displayed in the
standard deviation when more than one replicate is included in the set. The number
of decimal places in the standard deviation will determine the number of decimal
places displayed for the average value.
Significant Digits (n=1) indicates the number of digits displayed to the right of the
decimal when only one replicate is included in the set.
Variable Rounding is applicable only to set results (analytes) for
which the standard deviation is determined.

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–15

 Flow Diagrams

CS844 – Flow Diagram

rev. 2013-11-20
55 psig Furnace &
SV101 Filter PT1 Autocleaner
C

Bypass
P 12 psi 0.35" PV1

Block
NC
FLTR1 R1 SV102 High J
O
SO2 P
Incoming Purifier

com NO
1 LPM

3 LPM
FS
Flow Scrubber
K

P
Heated
A Dust Filter

Catalyst
PT3
F 12 psi
E
Furnace

Bypass
Cooling 0.35"

Block
N
Network High
O2
CO2

Bypass
Block
Cooling

I
Loop

35 psi

SV107
B

Particle

Cooling
Dose B

NC
Filter

Loop
55 psig Pinch CV1
Incoming Scrubber

G
Valve
Gas PS1

Bypass
Block
Dosing M
com
4 psi / NO

Cellulose Trap
SV104 PT2
Exhaust
Dose A

P
12 psi
NC

13" 6"
1 LPM
R31
1 LPM
R32

CO2 Low Low

R2 SV105
com NO SO2 CO2
PV2
SV311
SV312

20 psi D 2 LPM NC com H

SV106 L
NC

NC

5 LPM NC com

To To
R3 SV103
Dose Dose MeFC1
B A
3 LPM

Legend
Incoming O2/Doser Leak Check
Connection to Analytical Manifold
Segment
Connection to Detector Manifold Furnace Leak Check Segment
Indicates a Path Within a Manifold Detector Leak Check Segment
(Dashed Line)

Indicates a Heated Portion of the Path

Description Purpose
A Incoming Purifier CxHy removal; CO oxidation
B Incoming Scrubber CO2 conversion; Moisture removal
C Lance Restrictor Control lance flow rate
D Proportional Valve Maintains furnace pressure
E Furnace Convert solid samples to gaseous phase
F Flow Scrubber Moisture removal
G Particle Filter Particle removal
H Mechanical Flow Controller Control system flow rate
I Low SO2 IR Cell Low SO2 composition measurement
J High SO2 IR Cell High SO2 composition measurement
K Catalyst CO and SO2 oxidation
L Cellulose Trap SO3 removal
M Low CO2 IR Cell Low CO2 composition measurement
N High CO2 IR Cell High CO2 composition measurement
O Proportional Valve Maintains IR cell pressure
P Flow Sensor Measures the gas flow rate

Figure 7-1
Flow Diagram (CS844)

7–16 844 Series Theory of Operation

 CS844ES - Linear Analytical Functional Diagram
rev. 2015-08-11

Furnace & Low Flow

PT1
12/17 psi Autocleaner O MeFC
C P J 0.8 LPM

SV102
FLTR1

R1
Filter

0.35"
High K

Incoming Purifier
com NO

NC
1 LPM
SO2

SV401
Flow Scrubber

NO
Heated
A Dust Filter
SV101

Catalyst
55 psig
PT3
NC

com
F

P
E 790 mmHg
Furnace N
Cooling
PV1
Network 0.35"
O2 High P
CO2
Cooling
Loop

35 psi
B PT401

Particle

Cooling
Dose B I

Filter

Loop
55 psig

P
Pinch CV1
Incoming Scrubber

3 LPM

FS
Valve
Gas PS1
Dosing

com
4 psi / NO

Cellulose Trap
SV104
Dose A PT2 M

NC
12/17 psi
1 LPM
R31

P
1 LPM
R32

CO2

SV107
SV105 H 13"

com
R2 6"

NC
NO
PV2 MeFC1 Low Low
SV311
SV312

20 psi D 5 LPM NC com 3 LPM

SO2
SV106 L CO2
NC

NC

5 LPM NC com

To To
Dose Dose R3 SV103
B A Exhaust

Legend

Connection to Analytical Manifold Indicates a Heated Portion of the Path

Connection to Detector Manifold Incoming O2/Doser Leak Check Segment

Furnace Leak Check Segment

Indicates a Path Within a Manifold (Dashed Line) Detector Leak Check Segment

Description Purpose
A Incoming Purifier CxHy removal; CO oxidation
B Incoming Scrubber CO2 conversion; Moisture removal
C Lance Restrictor Control lance flow rate
D Proportional Valve Regulate furnace pressure
E Furnace Convert solid samples to gaseous phase
F Flow Scrubber Moisture removal
G Particle Filter Particle removal
H Mechanical Flow Cont. Control system flow rate
I Low SO2 IR Cell Low SO2 composition measurement
J High SO2 IR Cell High SO2 composition measurement
K Catalyst CO and SO2 oxidation
L Cellulose Trap SO3 removal
M Low CO2 IR Cell Low CO2 composition measurement
N High CO2 IR Cell High CO2 composition measurement
O Mechanical Flow Cont. Control system flow rate for enhanced sensitivity mode
P Proportional Valve Maintains IR cell pressure above barometric

Figure 7-2
Flow Diagram (CS844ES)

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–17

 C844 – Flow Diagram
rev. 2013-11-20
55 psig Furnace &
SV101 Filter PT1 Autocleaner
C M

Bypass
P 12 psi PV1

Block
NC
FLTR1 R1 SV102
N
I

Incoming Purifier
com NO
1 LPM

3 LPM
FS
Flow Scrubber

P
A

Catalyst
PT3
F 12 psi
E
Furnace

Bypass
Cooling 0.35"

Block
Network High L
O2
CO2

Bypass
Block
Cooling
Loop

35 psi

SV107
B

Particle

Cooling
Dose B

NC
Filter

Loop
55 psig Pinch CV1
Incoming Scrubber

G
Valve
Gas PS1

Bypass
Block
Dosing K

com
4 psi / NO

Cellulose Trap
PT2

SV104
Exhaust
Dose A

P
12 psi

NC
6"
1 LPM
R31
1 LPM
R32

CO2 Low
R2 SV105
com NO CO2
PV2
SV311

H
SV312

20 psi D 2 LPM NC com

SV106 J
NC

NC

5 LPM NC com

To To
R3 SV103
Dose Dose MeFC1
B A
3 LPM

Legend
Incoming O2/Doser Leak Check
Connection to Analytical Manifold
Segment
Connection to Detector Manifold Furnace Leak Check Segment
Indicates a Path Within a Manifold Detector Leak Check Segment
(Dashed Line)

Indicates a Heated Portion of the Path

Description Purpose
A Incoming Purifier CxHy removal; CO oxidation
B Incoming Scrubber CO2 conversion; Moisture removal
C Lance Restrictor Control lance flow rate
D Proportional Valve Maintains furnace pressure
E Furnace Convert solid samples to gaseous phase
F Flow Scrubber Moisture removal
G Particle Filter Particle removal
H Mechanical Flow Controller Control system flow rate
I Catalyst CO and SO2 oxidation
J Cellulose Trap SO3 removal
K Low CO2 IR Cell Low CO2 composition measurement
L High CO2 IR Cell High CO2 composition measurement
M Proportional Valve Maintains IR cell pressure
N Flow Sensor Measures the gas flow rate

Figure 7-3
Flow Diagram (C844)

7–18 844 Series Theory of Operation

 S844 – Flow Diagram
rev. 2013-11-20
55 psig Furnace &
SV101 Filter PT1 Autocleaner
A

Bypass
P 12 psi 0.35" PV1

Block
NC
SV102 High H I
FLTR1 R1
SO2 J
com NO
1 LPM

3 LPM
FS
Flow Scrubber

P
Heated
Dust Filter
PT3
D 12 psi
C
Furnace

Bypass
Cooling

Block
Network
O2

Bypass
Block
G
35 psi

SV107
Particle

NC
Filter
Pinch CV1 E
Valve
PS1

Bypass
Block
com
4 psi / NO
PT2

SV104
Exhaust

P
12 psi

NC
13"
Low
R2 SV105
com NO SO2
PV2
B 2 LPM NC com F
5 LPM
SV106
NC com

R3 SV103 MeFC1
3 LPM

Legend
Incoming O2/Doser Leak Check
Connection to Analytical Manifold
Segment
Connection to Detector Manifold Furnace Leak Check Segment
Indicates a Path Within a Manifold Detector Leak Check Segment
(Dashed Line)

Indicates a Heated Portion of the Path

Description Purpose
A Lance Restrictor Control lance flow rate
B Proportional Valve Maintains furnace pressure
C Furnace Convert solid samples to gaseous phase
D Flow Scrubber Moisture removal
E Particle Filter Particle removal
F Mechanical Flow Controller Control system flow rate
G Low SO2 IR Cell Low SO2 composition measurement
H High SO2 IR Cell High SO2 composition measurement
I Proportional Valve Maintains IR cell pressure
J Flow Sensor Measures the gas flow rate

Figure 7-4
Flow Diagram (S844)

Theory of Operation 844 Series 7–19

 S844ES - Linear Analytical Functional Diagram
rev. 2015-08-11

PT1 Furnace & Low Flow

12/17 psi Autocleaner J MeFC
A P H 0.8 LPM

SV102
FLTR1

R1
Filter

0.35"
com NO
High

NC
1 LPM
SO2

SV401
Flow Scrubber

NO
Heated
Dust Filter
SV101

55 psig
PT3
NC

com
D

P
C 790 mmHg
Furnace
Cooling
PV1
Network
O2 K

35 psi
PT401

Particle
G

P
Filter
Pinch CV1 E

3 LPM

FS
Valve
PS1

com
4 psi / NO

SV104
PT2

NC
12/17 psi

SV107
SV105 F 13"

com
R2

NC
NO
PV2 MeFC1 Low
B 5 LPM NC com 3 LPM
SV106 SO2
5 LPM NC com

R3 SV103 Exhaust

Legend

Connection to Analytical Manifold Indicates a Heated Portion of the Path

Connection to Detector Manifold Incoming O2/Doser Leak Check Segment

Furnace Leak Check Segment

Indicates a Path Within a Manifold (Dashed Line) Detector Leak Check Segment

Description Purpose
A Lance Restrictor Control lance flow rate
B Proportional Valve Regulate furnace pressure
C Furnace Convert solid samples to gaseous phase
D Flow Scrubber Moisture removal
E Particle Filter Particle removal
F Mechanical Flow Cont. Control system flow rate
F Low SO2 IR Cell Low SO2 composition measurement
H High SO2 IR Cell High SO2 composition measurement
J Mechanical Flow Cont. Control system flow rate for enhanced sensitivity mode
K Proportional Valve Maintains IR cell pressure above barometric

Figure 7-5
Flow Diagram (S844ES)

7–20 844 Series Theory of Operation

8 Diagnostics
The Diagnostics chapter explains how to monitor and check the
operation of the instrument hardware, which can help determine if the
instrument is operating properly. Use Diagnostics to check digital
inputs and outputs and to monitor various system hardware
parameters.
Flow ............................................................................................ 8–3
Ambient ....................................................................................... 8–4
Parameters.............................................................................. 8–4
Diagnostic Chart ...................................................................... 8–4
Ambient Parameter Definitions................................................... 8–6
Ambient Monitor Ranges ........................................................... 8–8
Digital I/O .................................................................................. 8–10
Digital Output Definitions ........................................................ 8–11
Digital Input Definitions .......................................................... 8–14
Leak Check................................................................................. 8–15
System Leak Check ................................................................ 8–15
Segmented Leak Check........................................................... 8–15
Pneumatic Leak Check ............................................................ 8–15
Leak Check Procedures ........................................................... 8–15
Leak Check Troubleshooting .................................................... 8–16
Pressurization Failure......................................................... 8–16
Pressure Increase.............................................................. 8–16
Pressure Decrease............................................................. 8–16
Flow Sensor Maintenance ........................................................ 8–16
System Check............................................................................. 8–17

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–1

This page intentionally left blank.

8–2 844 Series Diagnostics

Flow

The Diagnostics Flow Tab is divided into two parts: an analytical flow
diagram at the bottom and a diagnostic chart at the top. For
instructions on using the diagnostic chart to plot instrument
parameters, refer to Diagnostic Chart, page 8–4. The flow diagram is
interactive, enabling the user to actuate valves and plot ambient
parameter values by selecting the indicators within the diagram.
Additionally, by examining the motion of the dashed lines in the flow
diagram, the user can visualize the flow path for the current
valve state.
There are two states in which the user can operate the Flow Tab:
locked and unlocked. The user can change the operation state by
toggling between the Lock and Unlock buttons on the action bar at the
top of the screen.
When the Lock button is selected, the user may plot ambient values,
valve states, and interlock states on the chart. The user cannot change
valve states by selecting valves within the flow diagram.
When the Unlock button is selected, the user may plot ambient values
and interlock states and may actuate individual valves.

CAUTION
Actuating valves in the unlocked state will cause the valves
to change and the instrument to react accordingly. Changing
the state of some valves could cause the instrument to react
in an unintended manner, causing personal injury or damage
to the instrument. It is recommended that this diagnostic be
used under the supervision of trained service engineers.

In either mode, the flow diagram shows the theoretical gas flow path
for the current valve state as well as the current parameter values. A
warning triangle will flash beside a readout if a parameter is outside its
desired range.

The interactive flow diagram also contains camera icons . These

icons can be selected to show a photograph of that specific instrument
area.

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–3

Ambient

The Ambient screen allows the user to monitor instrument parameters

and view their current values. The ambient screen is divided into two
parts, the instrument parameters at the bottom and a diagnostic chart
at the top. Select a parameter box to view its readout on the chart in
relation to time.

Refer to Parameters (following) for information concerning the

parameters and values displayed on the Ambient screen.

Parameters
Within each parameter box, the current value, as well as its minimum
and maximum values, are displayed. Select the reset button on the
action bar to reset the minimum and maximum values within the
parameter box. The minimum/maximum values automatically reset
when opening the software.
A warning triangle will flash within a parameter box if a parameter is
outside its desired range. The warning symbol will flash in the
Diagnostics button, on the Ambient tab, and in the upper left corner of
a parameter box in the Ambient screen.

Diagnostic Chart
Select the desired parameter to plot the value on the diagnostics
chart. The parameter value is displayed on a vertical axis and the time
is displayed on the horizontal axis. More than one parameter can be
plotted on the graph at a time. Each parameter has its own unique
color that is displayed when selected.
The x- and y-axes of the diagnostic chart are adjustable. The plus and
minus signs on the axes indicate which direction to slide in order to
zoom the desired direction. To zoom out, select the axis bar and slide
to the left/up. To zoom in, select the axis bar and slide to the
right/down.
To view previous data, drag or flick in the chart area. The software
automatically saves the last 30 days of ambient data. The chart's scroll
speed is proportional to the speed of the flick. To stop the chart from
scrolling, select and hold anywhere on the chart area.
The diagnostic chart can be paused by selecting the play button in the
lower right corner of the chart. When adjusting the x-axis, or scrolling
back in time, the chart automatically goes into pause mode. Selecting
the play button will return to live plotting mode.

8–4 844 Series Diagnostics

 When selecting multiple parameters, the first parameter selected is
automatically placed on the right side y-axis. The second parameter is
automatically placed on the left side y-axis. Any subsequent
parameters selected will be on their own floating axis. No values for
these floating parameters will be shown; only a relative change can be
viewed.
To change what parameters are viewed on each axis, select the plot
tab on the upper left of the chart. The color of each parameter
selected will be displayed. For each parameter, there are three plotting
options: left axis, right axis, and floating axis. Each axis can display as
many parameters as desired.
All parameters on the floating axis are always in zoom in/out.
However, the zooming options for the right and left y-axes are
adjustable within the plot tab.

Button Name Action

Plot Tab Allows the user to view plot options.

Pause Pauses the x-axis of the diagnostic chart.

Play Displays real-time data on the diagnostic

chart.

Zoom in/zoom Automatically zooms the y-axis in or out

out based on the displayed data.

Zoom out Zooms out only the y-axis on the displayed

data.

Lock zoom Locks the y-axis to its current minimum and

maximum values whether or not any
parameters are displayed within that range.
Pan zoom Locks the y-axis in the range between current
minimum and maximum but follows the
parameter values with time.
Left Axis Plots the selected data on the left axis.

Right Axis Plots the selected data on the right axis.

Floating Axis Plots selected data without the context of the

y-axis.

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–5

 Ambient Parameter Definitions
The following ambients may not be applicable to all instrument
configurations.

Parameter Definition
Low CO2 The IR cell output voltage in volts. The emitter is turned Off
in Gas Conserve and Gas Off states. The output voltage is set
by the software. To determine if the cell is working properly,
refer to Detectors, page 5–27.
High CO2 The IR cell output voltage in volts. The emitter is turned Off
in Gas Conserve and Gas Off states. The output voltage is set
by software. To determine if the cell is working properly, refer
to Detectors, page 5–27.
Low SO2 The IR cell output voltage in volts. The emitter is turned Off
in Gas Conserve and Gas Off states. The output voltage is set
by software. To determine if the cell is working properly, refer
to Detectors, page 5–27.
High SO2 The IR cell output voltage in volts. The emitter is turned Off
in Gas Conserve and Gas Off states. The output voltage is set
by software. To determine if the cell is working properly, refer
to Detectors, page 5–27.
Low CO2 The temperature of the Low CO 2 IR cell. The value should be
Temperature approximately 45 °C.
High CO2 The temperature of the High CO2 IR cell. The value should be
Temperature approximately 50 °C.
Low SO2 The temperature of the Low SO2 IR cell. The value should be
Temperature approximately 45 °C.
High SO2 The temperature of the High SO2 IR cell. The value should be
Temperature approximately 50 °C.
Upstream The oxygen pressure before oxygen enters the furnace. This
Pressure (PT1) value should be 12 psi. The sensor also reads the incoming
pressure in certain valve states. The incoming pressure
should be 35 psi. This is the oxygen pressure from the
oxygen source (tank). For CS844ES and S844ES models
only: when analyzing in Enhanced Sensitivity mode, the
upstream pressure will read 17 psi.
Downstream The combustion gas pressure as it leaves the furnace and
Pressure (PT2) flows through the furnace filter. The downstream pressure
should be approximately 12 psi. For CS844ES and S844ES
models only: when analyzing in Enhanced Sensitivity mode,
the downstream pressure will read 17 psi.
Back Pressure The pressure of the exhaust gas before leaving the
(PT3) instrument.
Carrier Flow (FS) The flow rate from the oxygen supply (tank). The carrier flow
rate should be 3 LPM.

8–6 844 Series Diagnostics

 Parameter Definition
Pneumatic The pressure of the pneumatic gas, which should be
Pressure (PT) approximately 40 psi from the compressed air source (tank).
The pneumatic pressure regulator drops this to a safety
pressure of 8 psi when raising and lowering the pedestal.
MeFC The temperature of the mechanical flow controller, which is
Temperature set at 45 °C.
Catalyst The temperature of the catalyst, which is set at 350 °C.
Temperature
Incoming Purifier The temperature of the incoming purifier, which is set at
Temperature 600 °C.
Dust Filter The temperature of the dust filter. The temperature set point
Temperature can be adjusted from the System page of the Instrument
area of the software. Refer to Dust Filter Temperature, page
5–41, for more information.
Plate The IGBT temperature on the plate supply assembly. This
Temperature value should always be less than 90 °C.

Grid Current The electrical DC current flowing from the cathode to the grid
of the oscillator vacuum tube V2. As RF power increases
during analysis the grid current rises.
Plate Current The electrical DC current flowing from the cathode to the
plate of the oscillator vacuum tube V2. As RF power increases
during analysis the plate current rises.
Cabinet The internal cabinet temperature inside the instrument.
Temperature Before analysis, the ambient temperature should be close to
room temperature.
Plate Voltage The voltage sourced by the plate supply, which feeds the
plate of the oscillator tube.
Gas Dose A The temperature of gas dose loop A, which is set at 45 °C.
Temperature
Gas Dose B The temperature of gas dose loop B, which is set at 45 °C.
Temperature
Atmospheric The atmospheric pressure around the instrument. PT4 is used
Pressure for gas dose calculations.
IR Cell Pressure For CS844ES and S844ES models only. The gas pressure
(PT401) in the IR Cells. The IR cell pressure should be between
0.5-17.5 psi.
Low Flow MeFC For CS844ES and S844ES models only. The temperature
Temperature of the low flow mechanical flow controller, which is set at
45 °C.

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–7

 Parameter Definition
Back Pressure The duty cycle of the proportional valve control loop. This is
Control what controls the back pressure of the exhaust gas before
leaving the instrument.
Downstream The duty cycle of the proportional valve control loop. This is
Pressure Control what controls the furnace pressure by keeping the
downstream pressure (PT2) at the correct setpoint.
Low CO2 Average The average power delivered to the Low CO2 IR cell emitter.
Emitter Power The emitter is turned On in the Gas On state.
High CO2 The average power delivered to the High CO2 IR cell emitter.
Average Emitter The emitter is turned On in the Gas On state.
Power
Low SO2 Average The average power delivered to the Low SO2 IR cell emitter.
Emitter Power The emitter is turned On in the Gas On state.
High SO2 Average The average power delivered to the High SO2 IR cell emitter.
Emitter Power The emitter is turned On in the Gas On state.

Ambient Monitor Ranges

The following table describes the values that should be observed for
many of the ambients under normal operating conditions. Other
conditions, such as the Gas Off or Gas Conserve states will alter the
values.

· If a parameter value is out of range this symbol will flash

within the parameter box to the right of its name.

· The following ambients may not be applicable to all instrument

configurations.

Parameter Minimum Maximum Typical

Low CO2 0.0 V 4.8 V —
High CO2 0.0 V 4.8 V —
Low CO2 Temperature 44 °C 46 °C 45 °C
High CO2 Temperature 49 °C 51 °C 50 °C
Upstream Pressure 11.5 psi 12.5 psi 12.0 psi
(Pedestal Up)
Upstream Pressure 33.0 psi 37.0 psi 35.0 psi
(Pedestal Down)
Downstream Pressure 11.5 psi (16.5 psi 12.5 psi (17.5 psi 12.0 psi (17.0 psi
for ES mode) for ES mode) for ES mode)
Back Pressure 700 mmHg 900 mmHg 790 mmHg

8–8 844 Series Diagnostics

 Parameter Minimum Maximum Typical
Carrier Flow 2.9 LPM (0.7 LPM 3.1 LPM (0.9 LPM 3.0 LPM (0.8 LPM
for ES mode) for ES mode) for ES mode)
Pneumatic Pressure 35 psi 45 psi 40 psi
MeFC Temperature 44 °C 46 °C 45 °C
Catalyst Temperature 340 °C 360 °C 350 °C
Incoming Purifier 590 °C 610 °C 600 °C
Temperature
Plate Supply 15 °C 90 °C 35 - 75 °C
Temperature
Grid Current* 0 mA 175 mA 100 mA
Plate Current* 0 mA 550 mA 500 mA
Plate Voltage 0kV 4.13kV 4kV
Cabinet Temperature 5 °C 60 °C 25 °C
Gas Dose A 44.5 °C 45.5 °C 45 °C
Temperature
Gas Dose B 44.5 °C 45.5 °C 45 °C
Temperature
Atmospheric Pressure 700 mmHg 900 mmHg —
IR Cell Pressure 0.25 psi (Normal 3 psi 1.5 psi (Normal
(for CS844ES and mode) (Normal mode) mode)
S844ES models 14.5 psi 17.5 psi 16 psi
only) (ES mode) (ES mode) (ES mode)
Low Flow MeFC 44 °C 46 °C 45 °C
Temperature
(for CS844ES and
S844ES models
only)
Back Pressure Control 0% 100% —
Downstream Pressure 0% 100% —
Control
Low CO2 Average
Emitter Power 0.313 0.329 0.325
High CO2 Average
Emitter Power 0.313 0.329 0.325
Low SO2 Average
Emitter Power 0.313 0.329 0.325
High SO2 Average
Emitter Power 0.313 0.329 0.325
* The values shown for these parameters are typical values during an analysis.

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–9

Digital I/O

The Digital I/O screen allows the user to view all the digital inputs and
outputs and to actuate all the digital outputs within the instrument.
Similar to the ambient screen, it is divided into two parts, a diagnostic
chart at the top and the digital inputs and outputs at the bottom. The
current valve states are also displayed above the list of digital outputs.
For both digital inputs and outputs, a highlighted orb indicates that the
digital input or output is energized, and a gray orb indicates that it is
non-energized.
The Digital I/O tab can be operated in two states: locked (default) and
unlocked. The user can change the operation state by toggling
between the Lock and Unlock buttons at the top of the screen.
When the Lock button is selected, the state of the digital outputs
cannot be changed. The digital inputs and outputs can be selected as
they are in the ambient screen and can be plotted on the diagnostic
chart. A thin line represents a digital input or output in the non-
energized state, and a thick line represents it in the energized state. If
ambient parameters have been selected from either the Flow or
Ambient screens, they will also be displayed on the Diagnostic Chart in
the Digital I/O screen.
When the Unlock button is selected, selecting a digital output will
actuate that component.

CAUTION
Actuating valves in the unlocked state will cause the valves
to change and the instrument to react accordingly. Changing
the state of some valves could cause the instrument to react
in an unintended manner, causing personal injury or damage
to the instrument. It is recommended that this diagnostic be
used under the supervision of trained service engineers.

Digital inputs cannot be energized by selecting them in an unlock

state. They are used throughout the instrument as sensors to
determine the status of a condition. They are not only used to control
the instrument, they are also used for safety to prevent injury to the
operator or damage to the instrument. All interlocks must be enabled
in order to run an analysis. The interlocks operate in a chain fashion,
such that all interlocks below the first disabled interlock will also be
disabled.
During maintenance, additional safety features are in place when removing
the Induction Coil Cover. When the Induction Coil Cover interlock is
disabled, and the RF Panel Interlock is enabled, the instrument disables
power to the filament and plate supply. The filament and plate supply are
turned On again after the interlock is enabled at the start of the next
analysis.

8–10 844 Series Diagnostics

 Digital Output Definitions
Name Label Type Description Board Component
Location Location
Carrier Inlet SV101 NC Allows carrier gas into the Analytical Incoming/
analytical system. Flow Board Exhaust
Manifold
Lance SV102 NO Allows lance gas to flow Analytical Analytical
into the furnace. Flow Board Manifold
Furnace SV103 NC Allows carrier gas to Analytical Analytical
Bypass 2 bypass the furnace and Flow Board Manifold
flow to the detectors.
Furnace Gas SV104 NC Allows carrier gas into the Analytical Analytical
furnace during an analysis. Flow Board Manifold
Also used to purge the
furnace area of
atmosphere when raising
the pedestal.
Furnace SV105 NC Allows gas to back stream Analytical Analytical
Bypass 1 through the flow scrubber Flow Board Manifold
to purge the furnace area
of atmosphere when
raising the pedestal.
Furnace SV106 NO Allows gas to flow from Analytical Analytical
Bypass 3 the furnace to the Flow Board Manifold
detectors. Used for
segmented leak checks
and providing an
appropriate gas path when
purging the furnace area.
Exhaust SV107 NC Allows gas to leave the Analytical Incoming/
analytical system. Controls Flow Board Exhaust
the valve at the outlet of Manifold
the instrument’s gas flow
path. Used for leak check
purposes.
Light SV108 NC Illuminates the work Analytical N/A
surface of the instrument Flow Board
when the gas is On. Turns
Off in Gas Standby and
Gas Off modes.
Pneumatic SV201 NC Allows pneumatic gas into Pneumatic Pneumatic
Supply the pneumatic system. Flow Board Manifold

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–11

 Name Label Type Description Board Component
Location Location
Brush Up SV202 4-way Moves the brush into the Pneumatic Pneumatic
up position. Flow Board Manifold
Brush Down SV203 4-way Moves the brush into the Pneumatic Pneumatic
down position. Flow Board Manifold
Pinch Valve SV204 NO Pinches the silicone tubing Pneumatic Pneumatic
to prevent gas from Flow Board Manifold
leaving the furnace area
when the valve is non-
energized.
Combustion SV205 4-way Releases the combustion Pneumatic Pneumatic
Tube tube from its locked Flow Board Manifold
position within the furnace
assembly. Two levers are
actuated with this single
valve.
Pedestal SV207 3-way Routes the pneumatic gas Pneumatic Pneumatic
Safety through a pneumatic Flow Board Manifold
pressure regulator when
the valve is non-
energized. This allows the
pedestal to be raised and
lowered at low pressure.
High pressure is applied to
the pedestal once in a safe
state. High pedestal
pressure is required during
an analysis to prevent
analyte from leaking out of
the furnace.
Pedestal 1 SV208 4-way Drives the pedestal up and Pneumatic Pneumatic
and and down. The valves operate Flow Board Manifold
Pedestal 2 SV209 as a pair; both should be
non-energized to raise the
pedestal and energized to
lower the pedestal. The
pressure applied to these
valves is dependent on the
state of the Pedestal
Safety valve. Operating
them in separate states
(only 1 active) places
opposing pressures on the
internal piston and results
in slow or no movement.

8–12 844 Series Diagnostics

 Name Label Type Description Board Component
Location Location
Vacuum Vac Turns On the vacuum RF Furnace N/A
cleaner. Control
Board
RF Cabinet Fan1 Turns On the RF Cabinet Distribution N/A
Fan Fan when the gas is On. Board
Plate Supply Fan4 Turns On the Plate Supply RF Furnace N/A
Fan Fan only while the furnace Control
is On. Board
Coolant Pump Turns On the Coolant
Pump Pump, which is located in
the Coolant assembly,
when the gas is On.
Coolant Fan Fan3 Turns On the Coolant Fan, RF Furnace N/A
which is located in the Control
Coolant assembly, when Board
the gas is On.
Plate Enable Plate Turns On the furnace. RF Furnace N/A
Can only be energized if Control
all interlocks are satisfied. Board
*Dose A SV311 NC Allows dose gas to flow Gas Dose Gas Dose
Gas and and through the dose loops. Board Manifold
Dose B Gas SV312
*Dose A SV321 4-way Allows either the carrier Gas Dose Gas Dose
Pneumatic and gas or dose gas to flow Board Manifold
and Dose B SV322 through the dose loop.
Pneumatic When energized, the dose
gas flows through the loop
and the carrier gas is
bypassed.
Enhanced SV401 3-way Selects between normal Enhanced IR Cell
Sensitivity and low system flow. Sensitivity Enhanced
(For Board Sensitivity
CS844ES Manifold
and
S844ES
models
only)

Gas Dose is available only on the following models: CS844 and C844.

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–13

 Digital Input Definitions
Switch Description
Pedestal Up (SW5) When enabled, it indicates the pedestal is in the up position.
The pedestal up switch is located at the top of the pedestal
assembly, below the furnace.
Pedestal Down (SW6) When enabled, it indicates the pedestal is in the down
position. The pedestal down switch is located at the bottom of
the pedestal assembly.
Pressure Trigger When enabled while raising the pedestal, the pressure to the
(SW7) pedestal piston changes from low to high. The pressure
trigger switch is located just below the pedestal up switch
and its position is set so that the switch is enabled when the
cup assembly just enters the combustion tube assembly.
Brush Is Up (SW11) When enabled, it indicates the brush is in the up position. The
brush up sensor is located behind the upper alcove.
Brush Is Down When enabled, it indicates the brush is in the down position.
(SW12) The brush down sensor is located behind the upper alcove.
RF Panel Interlock If disabled, either the Oscillator Cover or Plate Supply Cover
(SW9) has been removed from the right side of the instrument and
no analysis can be performed for safety reasons. When
enabled, both RF panels are secured in their proper locations.
Induction Coil Cover If disabled, the induction coil cover has been removed from
Interlock (SW21) the front of the furnace and no analysis can be performed for
safety reasons. When enabled, the induction coil cover is
secured in its proper location.
Coolant Temperature If disabled, the coolant temperature is greater than 70 °C
Interlock (SW4) and no analysis can be performed. If enabled, the coolant
temperature is within the proper range.
Furnace Pressure If disabled, the furnace pressure is below 4 psi and no
Interlock (PS1) analysis can be performed. If enabled, the furnace pressure
is above 4 psi.

8–14 844 Series Diagnostics

Leak Check

The software incorporates the following automated leak check

procedures: System Leak Check, Segmented Leak Check, and
Pneumatic Leak Check. These are described in the following sections.
By performing these leak checks the user can determine if gas is
leaking out of the system. Leak Checks should be performed after any
maintenance that involves the analytical or pneumatic flow paths. In
addition, regularly performed leak checks and records are helpful when
solving problems that occur within the system.

During a leak check, the flow is turned Off and the system is sealed
by the incoming and exhaust solenoids. Following a leak check, the
flow remains Off until it is turned On by enabling the Gas On state or
by leaving Diagnostics.

System Leak Check

The System Leak Check checks for leaks within the entire analytical
flow path and determines a pass/fail/aborted result. A System Leak
Check is useful on a daily basis and after routine maintenance. Refer
to Flow Diagrams, page 7–16, to view the analytical flow path that is
tested by the System Leak Check.

Segmented Leak Check

The Segmented Leak Check checks for leaks by breaking the analytical
flow path into three segments (Incoming/Doser, Furnace, and
Detectors) by utilizing valves and determines three pass/fail/aborted
results. A Segmented Leak Check is useful to isolate the leaking area if
the System Leak Check determined a leak. Refer to Flow Diagrams,
page 7–16, to view the segments of the analytical flow path that are
tested by the Segmented Leak Check.

Pneumatic Leak Check

The Pneumatic Leak Check checks for leaks in the Pneumatic system
and determines two pass/fail/aborted results. The two Pneumatic
results correspond to two different instrument states and are
necessary in order to completely check the Pneumatic system for
leaks. A Pneumatic Leak Check is useful after performing maintenance
on the pneumatic system.

Leak Check Procedures

1. Select Diagnostics, and then select Leak Check.
2. Select the desired type of leak check to perform.

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–15

 3. Select Start at the bottom of the screen. The system will
pressurize and display the Initial Pressure, the Current Pressure,
and the Change in Pressure.
4. Upon completion of the leak check, a pass/fail/aborted result will
be displayed. This result will remain until the next leak check of
that type is performed.

Leak Check Troubleshooting

Pressurization Failure
It is possible that the system will fail to pressurize when performing a
leak check or during operation. If this occurs, there is a gross leak in
the analytical or pneumatic gas systems. Although this is uncommon,
first check the auto cleaner o-rings, the combustion tube o-rings, and
the pinch tubing. If the leak occurred after maintenance, check the
assembly or area that was serviced.

Pressure Increase
If the system pressurizes and the pressure increases during a leak
check, either a valve has failed to close and is allowing gas to enter
the system or the temperature of a heater has not stabilized. In the
latter case, allow the temperatures to stabilize, and then perform
another leak check.

Pressure Decrease
If the system pressurizes and the pressure decreases during the leak
check, there is a leak in the system. In this case, check the last action
or maintenance item that was performed. Something may have been
disturbed or incorrectly installed during another procedure. If reagent
materials were changed, make sure no glass wool is interfering with
the sealing surface of the o-rings. Check to make sure fittings are
correctly tightened. Refer to Fitting Assembly and Reassembly, page
9–10 for the correct tightening procedures for the various fittings used
throughout the system. Refer to Manifold Flow Diagrams, page 9–14,
to determine which areas are affected by the leak.

Flow Sensor Maintenance

A temporary leak may develop between the end adaptors and the flow
tube of the Flow Sensor, if the ends are rotated during installation or
maintenance. If a leak develops, it should diminish by 85% within 24
hours and recover completely within 48 hours. If the detector segment
has a leak, and maintenance has been performed on the Flow Sensor
within the past 48 hours, allow sufficient time for the seal to recover
before service is performed.

8–16 844 Series Diagnostics

System Check

The System Check is used to check all basic functions necessary for
the unit to perform an analysis. Depending on the instrument
configuration, this may include checks of the communication,
electrical, pressure, flow, temperature, motor(s), and interlock
systems. If any of the items fail, it will be necessary for the user or
service engineer to correct the problems before the unit can be used
for analysis.

Prior to performing a system check, ensure that the system has been
on for at least 30 min to allow all temperatures to stabilize.
Perform a System Check by completing the following steps.
1. In the software, select Diagnostics, and then select the System Check
tab.
2. Select Start, and then wait for the System Check sequence to finish.
3. Address any items that do not pass.

Diagnostics 844 Series 8–17

This page intentionally left blank.

8–18 844 Series Diagnostics

9 Service
The Service chapter contains common service procedures that may
correct operational problems with the instrument. The procedures
included in this chapter may require disabling power to the instrument
and should be performed only by trained personnel. If you are still
experiencing difficulties after referencing the service information,
contact the LECO Service Department at 269-982-5497 for assistance.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 9–2
Gas Flow States ............................................................................ 9–3
Verifying that the Gas Off State is Operational ............................. 9–3
Frequently Asked Questions............................................................ 9–4
Calibrating the Hardware................................................................ 9–5
Adjusting the Safety Pressure Regulator........................................... 9–6
Flexible Replacement Tubing .......................................................... 9–9
Fitting Assembly and Reassembly.................................................. 9–10
Compression Fittings .............................................................. 9–10
Assembly ......................................................................... 9–10
Reassembly ...................................................................... 9–11
O-Ring Straight Thread Manifold Fittings ................................... 9–12
Installing Tubing into One-Touch Fittings .................................. 9–12
Removing Tubing from One-Touch Fittings ................................ 9–12
Zero-Clearance O-Ring Face Seal Fittings .................................. 9–13
Manifold Flow Diagrams ............................................................... 9–14
Viewing Valve States ................................................................... 9–19

Service 844 Series 9–1

Illustrations

Figure 9-1 Casting Removal................................................................. 9–6

Figure 9-2 Safety Pressure Valve and Adjustment .................................. 9–7
Figure 9-3 Ferrule Installation............................................................ 9–10
Figure 9-4 Manifold Flow Diagram (CS844).......................................... 9–14
Figure 9-5 Manifold Flow Diagram (CS844ES) ...................................... 9–15
Figure 9-6 Manifold Flow Diagram (C844)............................................ 9–16
Figure 9-7 Manifold Flow Diagram (S844)............................................ 9–17
Figure 9-8 Manifold Flow Diagram (S844ES) ........................................ 9–18

9–2 844 Series Service

Gas Flow States

The following section explains the flow rates that can be expected from
the various gas flow states.
Gas On—The Gas On flow is 3 lpm.
For CS844ES and S844ES models only: The Gas On flow is
determined by the current method, which is defined by the
method of the next logged-in sample, or the last analyzed
method when no samples are logged in. For methods with the
Analysis Mode set to Normal, the Gas On flow is 3 lpm. For
methods with the Analysis Mode Set to Enhanced Sensitivity, the
Gas On flow is 0.8 lpm.
Conserve—With the pedestal up, the Gas Conserve flow is
approximately 1 lpm. Gas Conserve is not an option with the pedestal
down.
Gas Off— When going from Gas On or Gas Conserve to Gas Off the
instrument will depressurize and wait until the upstream pressure is
below 2 psi before stating that the gas flow is off.

Verifying that the Gas Off State is Operational

To check that the Gas Off state is functioning properly, check
diagnostics as follows.
1. Select Diagnostics, and then select the Digital I/O tab.
2. On the Digital I/O tab, verify the incoming gas solenoid is off (the
checkbox for SV101 should appear as nonenergized). When the
gas is off, the flow rate out of the instrument exhaust should be
0 ccm.

Service 844 Series 9–3

Frequently Asked Questions

Question Answer
Why are the cell To prolong the life of the emitter, the IR cells in the
voltages so low (close instrument are designed to turn Off when the carrier
to 0.00 volts)? flow is Off or in Conservation Mode.
Why am I prevented Calibration data is clustered around a single data point.
from selecting “Full In these cases, the Calibration Type will automatically be
Regression” in the changed to “Force Through Origin.”
Calibration Screen? The Cornerstone® software prevents users from selecting "Full Regressio

Why do some of the To reduce instrument noise when not in use, the RF Fan,
fans and pumps Coolant Fan, and Coolant Pump are turned Off when the
change when changing carrier flow is Off or in Conservation Mode. The Cabinet Fan
gas states? also lowers the speed but does not turn Off. These fans and
pump fully turn On again when the carrier flow is On.
Why does the The flow path has changed compared to the previous
Upstream and generation of instruments. This behavior is considered
Downstream Pressure normal and has not been observed to decrease precision
vary during analysis or affect results.
and when raising and
lowering the pedestal?

9–4 844 Series Service

Calibrating the Hardware
Hardware Calibration allows the operator and service person to
calibrate the pressure sensors, front panel heaters, and flow sensors
within the unit. These hardware calibrations need to be performed only
if the instrument was serviced and an assembly was reinstalled that
would affect calibration. When saving a hardware calibration, the
software checks the calibration to see if it falls within an appropriate
range and will give a warning if the calibration is outside that range.
Special equipment may be necessary to perform some of the
calibration procedures. Contact the LECO Service Department if you
have questions.
· If hardware calibrations have not been performed or saved, the
software will display warnings. In this case, it is possible to
continue analysis with the default calibration.
· Hardware calibrations cannot be performed when the Service
Key is inactive. Refer to Using the Service Key, page 5–32. An
active Service Key is not required to export or import the
current hardware calibrations. Refer to Importing and
Exporting, page 3–22.

Service 844 Series 9–5

Adjusting the Safety Pressure Regulator

1. Allow the regulator to warm up by enabling the pneumatic gas for

at least 30 minutes.
2. Remove the bottom right casting by removing the work surface
and removing the three outermost screws (two on the right and
one on the left). Refer to Figure 9-1, following.

Figure 9-1
Casting Removal

If using a shuttle loader, refer to Maintenance, page 5–12.

3. In the software, turn On the gas flow by selecting Gas, and then
selecting On.

PINCH HAZARD
The upward pedestal motion causes a pinch point.

4. Raise the pedestal by selecting Pedestal.

5. Select Diagnostics, and then select Ambient.
6. Select Pneumatic Pressure to display the pneumatic pressure on
the Ambient Chart.

9–6 844 Series Service

 7. Confirm that the Pneumatic Pressure is 40 ± 5 psi. If necessary,
adjust the incoming pneumatic pressure until the specified
pressure is observed.
8. In the software, lower the Pedestal by selecting Pedestal.
9. Confirm that the Safety Pressure Solenoid Valve is Off (closed) by
observing that the LED indicator is not illuminated. Refer to
Figure 9-2, following.

Figure 9-2
Safety Pressure Valve and Adjustment

The color of the flexible silicone tubing may vary.

10. Wait for the pressure display to stabilize.
A. Confirm that the Pneumatic Pressure reading is 8.0 ± 0.2
psi. If necessary, adjust the Safety Pressure Regulator until
the specified pressure is observed.

B. Locate the safety pressure regulator. Refer to Figure 9-2,

page 9–7.
C. Pull out the knob on the safety pressure regulator to unlock.
D. Adjust the Safety Pressure Regulator to 8.0 ± 0.2 psi.

Service 844 Series 9–7

 E. Raise and lower the cup assembly to relieve any built-up
pressure by actuating the Pedestal 1 (sv208) and Pedestal 2
(sv209) solenoids in the Diagnostics\Digital I/O screen. It
should take approximately 2 seconds for the piston to raise
and lower.
F. Push in the knob on the safety pressure regulator to lock.
G. Recheck the safety pressure and repeat the adjustment.
Verify that the pressure is consistently 8.0 ± 0.2 psi when
the piston is raised and lowered.

9–8 844 Series Service

Flexible Replacement Tubing

The following is a list of flexible tubing used throughout the

instrument. If replacement is necessary, order tubing by the part
number and length. Cut to length when installing. Additional fittings
may be required.

LECO Part
Description Where Used
Number
5/16", Blue
619-591-553 Oscillator Cooling outside RF Enclosure
Polyurethane Tubing
619-591-794 8 mm PTFE Tubing Oscillator Cooling inside RF Enclosure
619-591-795 8 mm PTFE Tubing Oscillator Cooling inside RF Enclosure
1/8" White
619-590-823 Pinch Valve
Polyurethane Tubing
1/8" Black
625-710-795 Automation (if installed)
Polyurethane Tubing
1/4" Orange
625-710-695 Pneumatics
Polyurethane Tubing
1/4" Yellow
619-591-384 Pedestal (Top)
Polyurethane Tubing
1/4" Red
619-591-383 Pedestal (Bottom)
Polyurethane Tubing
1/4" White
619-590-820 Brush (Up)
Polyurethane Tubing
1/4" Black
619-590-821 Brush (Down)
Polyurethane Tubing
Flow Sensor to Exhaust Manifold, Catalyst to
783-771 1/4" PFA Tubing
Back Pressure Manifold (if installed)
615-830 1/8" PFA Tubing Analytical Manifold to Lance
1/4" Urethane
807-196 Analytical Manifold to Lower Pedestal
Tubing
3/8" White Silicone
625-516 Lower Pedestal to Pedestal Bracket Union
Tubing
3/8" Orange Silicone
501-110 Pedestal Bracket Union to Vacuum Manifold
Tubing

Service 844 Series 9–9

Fitting Assembly and Reassembly
The following section provides fitting assembly instructions for
compression tube fittings and o-ring face seal fittings.

Compression Fittings
Refer to Figure 9-3, following, for the correct installation and
orientation of the nut and ferrules.

Figure 9-3
Ferrule Installation

Assembly
1. Rotate the nut finger-tight.

2. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock position.

9–10 844 Series Service

 3. For 1/4-inch fittings and larger: While holding the fitting body
steady with a wrench, tighten the nut 11/4 turns to the 9 o’clock
position.
Or
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16-inch fittings or 2, 3, and 4 mm tube
fittings: Tighten the nut 3/4 turn to the 3 o’clock position.

Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble compression tube fittings many
times.

CAUTION
Always depressurize the system before disassembling a
swage tube fitting.

1. Prior to disassembly, mark the tube at the back of the nut; mark
a line along the nut and fitting body flats. Use these marks to
ensure that the nut is returned to the previously pulled-up
position.

2. Insert the tube into the fitting until the front ferrule seats against
the fitting body.

Service 844 Series 9–11

 3. While holding the fitting body steady, rotate the nut with a
wrench to the previously pulled-up position, as indicated by the
marks on the tubes and flats created in step 1, previous. A
significant increase in resistance will be felt at this point. Tighten
the nut slightly.

CAUTION
Do not use the compression fitting gap inspection gauge with
reassembled fittings.

O-Ring Straight Thread Manifold Fittings

1. Turn the straight thread o-ring fitting to the manifold until it is
finger-tight.
2. Tighten the straight thread o-ring fitting with a wrench until it
makes metal-to-metal contact with the face of the manifold.
3. Tighten the fitting slightly with the wrench.

Installing Tubing into One-Touch Fittings

1. Cut the tube perpendicularly, being careful not to damage the
outside surface. Use tube cutters to avoid deforming the tubing.
2. Grasp the tube and slowly push it into the one-touch fitting until
the tube comes to a stop.
3. Pull the tubing back gently to make sure it has a positive seal.

Removing Tubing from One-Touch Fittings

1. Push in evenly on the release button.
2. Pull out the tube while keeping the release button depressed. If
the release button is not held down, the tube cannot be
withdrawn.
3. To reuse the tubing, cut off the previously lodged portion of the
tube.

9–12 844 Series Service

 Zero-Clearance O-Ring Face Seal Fittings
1. Position the face seal against the fitting body.
2. Turn the nut onto the female end until it is finger-tight.
3. While holding the fitting body steady with a wrench, tighten the
nut slightly (approximately 1/8 turn or 45°) with a second wrench.

Service 844 Series 9–13

 CS844 – Manifold Flow Diagram
Manifold Flow Diagrams rev. 2013-11-20
Furnace &
Autocleaner

Brush Brush Pinch Combustion

Pedestal 1 Pedestal 2
Up Down Valve Tube Spare
X X X X XX X X Heated
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
Safety Pressure Filter
Incoming/Exhaust SV202 SV203 SV204 SV205 SV206 PR PT SV208 SV209
Manifold
40/8 psi
8 psi P
55 psig NC NO
Flow
NC COM
SV201 Pneumatic Manifold SV207 Scrubber
Air
Pneumatic Pedestal
FLTR Safety Exhaust Furnace
40 psi Supply PT4 ES Pinch
P Silencer Cooling
Dose A Dose B ATM Network Valve
PRESS
NO NC NO NC
CV1 Particle
SV321 SV322
Filter
P 4 PSI / NO
R1 SV102 PT2
COM PS1
P
PT1 NO 2 LPM SV105 12 psi
Dose B 1 LPM COM
12 psi
55 psig R32 SV312
COM R2 NC
COM
1 LPM NC
Analytical Manifold
SV104 NC NO SV106
CO2 Dose A PV2
R31 SV311 5 LPM SV103
COM
20 psi
1 LPM NC R3 NC Incoming
55 psig
Gas Dose Manifold Purifier

SV101 FLTR1

NC
O2
Incoming/Exhaust
35 psi Manifold Incoming
55 psig
Detector Manifold Scrubber
SV107
MeFC1
Exhaust NC 3 LPM

13" Low
Bypass
SO2 IR Cell

0.35" High Catalyst

Bypass
SO2 IR Cell

6.0" Low
CO2 IR Cell Bypass

Leak Check Segments

Cellulose
Trap
Incoming O2 & Doser 0.35" High Bypass
CO2 IR Cell
Furnace
P
Detector
PT3
Back Pressure 790 mmHg
Pneumatics Controller PV1
FS
Connection Types

Tool required 3 LPM

Back One-touch Electronic Front
O-ring
Panel Flow Sensor Panel

Figure 9-4
Manifold Flow Diagram (CS844)

9–14 844 Series Service

 CS844ES - Analytical Functional Diagram
rev. 2015-08-11
Furnace &
Autocleaner

Brush Brush Pinch Combustion

Pedestal 1 Pedestal 2
Up Down Valve Tube Spare
X X X X XX X X Heated
Incoming/Exhaust
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
Safety Pressure NO NC NO NC Filter
Manifold SV202 SV203 SV204 SV205 SV206 PR PT SV208 SV209
55 psig
40/8 psi
8 psi P
NC NO
Flow
NC COM
SV201 Pneumatic Manifold SV207 Scrubber
Air
Pneumatic Pedestal
FLTR Safety Exhaust Furnace
40 psi Supply PT4 ES Pinch
P Silencer Cooling
Dose A Dose B ATM Network Valve
PRESS
NO NC NO NC CV1 Particle
SV321 SV322 Filter

PT1 P
SV102
4 PSI / NO
R1 12/17 psi COM PS1
PT2 P
NO 2 LPM SV105 12/17 psi
55 psig
Dose B 1 LPM COM
R32 SV312
Analytical Manifold COM R2 NC
COM
1 LPM NC
SV104 NC NO SV106
CO2 Dose A PV2
R31 SV311 5 LPM NC
COM

Incoming
Purifier
20 psi NC
1 LPM R3 SV103
Gas Dose Manifold
55 psig

SV101 FLTR1
NC

O2 Incoming/Exhaust
Manifold Detector Manifold
35 psi

Incoming
Scrubber
55 psig MeFC1
3 LPM
SV107

NC
Exhaust

13" Low
SO2 IR Cell 0.35" High
SO2 IR Cell

6.0" Low
CO2 IR Cell Catalyst

Leak Check Segments

Incoming O2 & Doser

0.35" High Low
0.8 LPM

NC
0.35" High P
CO2 IR Cell PT401 SV401 Flow
Furnace CO2 IR Cell COM
NO MeFC
Detector P

Sulfur Trap Back Pressure PT3

790 mmHg
Controller
Pneumatics PV1 Cellulose
Connection Types Trap
FS
Tool required Electronic Flow Sensor
Back One-touch 3.0/0.8 LPM Front
O-ring
Panel Panel

Figure 9-5
Manifold Flow Diagram (CS844ES)

Service 844 Series 9–15

 C844 - Manifold Flow Diagram
rev. 2013-11-20
Furnace &
Autocleaner

Brush Brush Pinch Combustion

Pedestal 1 Pedestal 2
Up Down Valve Tube Spare
X X X X XX X X
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
Safety Pressure
Incoming/Exhaust SV202 SV203 SV204 SV205 SV206 PR PT SV208 SV209
Manifold
40/8 psi
8 psi P
55 psig NC NO
Flow
NC COM
SV201 Pneumatic Manifold SV207 Scrubber
Air
Pneumatic Pedestal
FLTR Safety Exhaust Furnace
40 psi Supply PT4 ES Pinch
P Silencer Cooling
Dose A Dose B ATM Network Valve
PRESS
NO NC NO NC
CV1 Particle
SV321 SV322
Filter
P 4 PSI / NO
R1 SV102 PT2
COM PS1
P
PT1 NO 2 LPM SV105 12 psi
Dose B 1 LPM COM
12 psi
55 psig R32 SV312
COM R2 NC
COM
1 LPM NC
Analytical Manifold
SV104 NC NO SV106
CO2 Dose A PV2
R31 SV311 5 LPM SV103
COM
20 psi
1 LPM NC R3 NC Incoming
Gas Dose Manifold Purifier
55 psig

SV101 FLTR1

NC
O2
Incoming/Exhaust
35 psi Manifold
Incoming
Detector Manifold
55 psig
SV107 Scrubber
MeFC1
Exhaust NC 3 LPM

Bypass

Bypass Catalyst

6.0" Low
Bypass
CO2 IR Cell

Leak Check Segments Cellulose

0.35" High Trap
Incoming O2 & Doser Bypass
CO2 IR Cell
Furnace
P
Detector
PT3
Back Pressure 790 mmHg
Pneumatics Controller PV1
FS
Connection Types

Tool required 3 LPM

Back One-touch Electronic Front
O-ring
Panel Flow Sensor Panel

Figure 9-6
Manifold Flow Diagram (C844)

9–16 844 Series Service

 S844 - Manifold Flow Diagram
rev. 2013-11-20
Furnace &
Autocleaner

Brush Brush Pinch Combustion

Pedestal 1 Pedestal 2
Up Down Valve Tube Spare
X X X X XX X X Heated
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
Safety Pressure Filter
Incoming/Exhaust SV202 SV203 SV204 SV205 SV206 PR PT SV208 SV209
Manifold
40/8 psi
8 psi P
55 psig NC NO
Flow
NC COM
SV201 Pneumatic Manifold SV207 Scrubber
Air
Pneumatic Pedestal
FLTR Safety Exhaust Furnace
40 psi Supply ES Pinch
Silencer Cooling
Network Valve

CV1 Particle
Filter
P 4 PSI / NO
R1 SV102 PT2
COM PS1
P
PT1 NO 2 LPM SV105 12 psi
1 LPM COM
12 psi
COM R2 NC
COM
Analytical Manifold
SV104 NC NO SV106
PV2
5 LPM SV103
COM

R3 NC

SV101 FLTR1

NC
O2
Incoming/Exhaust
35 psi Manifold
55 psig
Detector Manifold
SV107
MeFC1
Exhaust NC 3 LPM

13" Low
Bypass
SO2 IR Cell

0.35" High Bypass

SO2 IR Cell

Bypass

Leak Check Segments

Incoming O2 & Doser Bypass

Furnace
P
Detector
PT3
Back Pressure 790 mmHg
Pneumatics Controller PV1
FS
Connection Types

Tool required 3 LPM

Back One-touch Electronic Front
O-ring
Panel Flow Sensor Panel

Figure 9-7
Manifold Flow Diagram (S844)

Service 844 Series 9–17

 S844ES - Analytical Functional Diagram
rev. 2015-08-11
Furnace &
Autocleaner

Brush Brush Pinch Combustion

Pedestal 1 Pedestal 2
Up Down Valve Tube Spare
X X X X XX X X Heated
Incoming/Exhaust
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
Safety Pressure NO NC NO NC Filter
Manifold SV202 SV203 SV204 SV205 SV206 PR PT SV208 SV209
55 psig
40/8 psi
8 psi P
NC NO
Flow
NC COM
SV201 Pneumatic Manifold SV207 Scrubber
Air
Pneumatic Pedestal
FLTR Safety Exhaust Furnace
40 psi Supply ES Pinch
Silencer Cooling
Network Valve

CV1 Particle
Filter

PT1 P
SV102
4 PSI / NO
R1 12/17 psi COM PS1
PT2 P
NO 2 LPM SV105 12/17 psi
1 LPM COM

Analytical Manifold COM R2 NC

COM

SV104 NC NO SV106
PV2 5 LPM NC
COM

R3 SV103

SV101 FLTR1
NC

O2 Incoming/Exhaust
Manifold Detector Manifold
35 psi
55 psig MeFC1
3 LPM
SV107

NC
Exhaust

13" Low
SO2 IR Cell 0.35" High
SO2 IR Cell

Leak Check Segments

Low
0.8 LPM

NC
Incoming O2 & Doser
P
SV401 Flow
PT401 COM
Furnace NO MeFC
P
Detector Back Pressure PT3
790 mmHg
Pneumatics
Controller
PV1
Connection Types
FS
Tool required Electronic Flow Sensor
Back One-touch Front
O-ring 3.0/0.8 LPM
Panel Panel

Figure 9-8
Manifold Flow Diagram (S844ES)

9–18 844 Series Service

Viewing Valve States

The valve states are viewable in the software, but they cannot be
changed. In the software, navigate to Instrument Ø Diagnostics Ø
Valve States.

Service 844 Series 9–19

This page intentionally left blank.

9–20 844 Series Service

10 Illustrations
The Illustrations chapter can assist in procedures, verify information
during setup, and help to locate parts within the instrument and part
numbers.
· Some illustrations in this section apply only to certain models and
are labeled accordingly.
· The following items listed are subject to revision. Confirm the
current parts and part numbers before ordering.
Figure 10-1 Reference Card 1 of 2 ...................................................... 10–5
Figure 10-2 Reference Card 2 of 2 ...................................................... 10–6
Figure 10-3 Incoming Purifier & Incoming Scrubber Assembly................ 10–7
Figure 10-4 Catalyst and Cellulose Trap Assembly ................................ 10–8
Figure 10-5 Incoming/Exhaust Manifold Assembly ................................ 10–9
Figure 10-6 External Auto Cleaner Brush Assembly .............................10–10
Figure 10-7 Flow Scrubber and Particle Filter Panel Assembly ...............10–11
Figure 10-8 Incoming Purifier Assembly .............................................10–12
Figure 10-9 Catalyst Heater Assembly ...............................................10–13
Figure 10-10 Induction Coil Cover Assembly .......................................10–14
Figure 10-11 Pneumatic Manifold, Card, and Bracket Assembly.............10–15
Figure 10-12 RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 1 of 2 .....................................10–16
Figure 10-13 RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 2 of 2 .....................................10–17
Figure 10-14 Carrier Flow Sensor Assembly ........................................10–18
Figure 10-15 RF Enclosure Assembly 1 of 5 ........................................10–19
Figure 10-16 RF Enclosure Assembly 2 of 5 ........................................10–20
Figure 10-17 RF Enclosure Assembly 3 of 5 ........................................10–21
Figure 10-18 RF Enclosure Assembly 4 of 5 ........................................10–22
Figure 10-19 RF Enclosure Assembly 5 of 5 ........................................10–23
Figure 10-20 Pneumatic Manifold Assembly ........................................10–24
Figure 10-21 Heated Flow Controller Assembly ...................................10–25
Figure 10-22 MeFC Temperature Controller Card/Bracket Assembly.......10–26
Figure 10-23 Combustion Tube Kit ....................................................10–27
Figure 10-24 Combustion Tube Base Assembly ...................................10–28
Figure 10-25 Front Alcove Casting and Light Assembly.........................10–29

Illustrations 844 Series 10–1

 Figure 10-26 Combustion Tube Housing Assembly 1 of 2......................10–30
Figure 10-27 Combustion Tube Housing Assembly 2 of 2......................10–31
Figure 10-28 Catalyst Heater Cooling Loop Manifold ............................10–32
Figure 10-29 Pedestal Assembly........................................................10–33
Figure 10-30 DC Distribution Card and Bracket Assembly.....................10–34
Figure 10-31 IR Cell Clamping Block ..................................................10–35
Figure 10-32 IR Cell Mounting Plate Assembly ....................................10–36
Figure 10-33 IR Manifold with Catalyst Bypass Block ...........................10–37
Figure 10-34 IR Manifold Low Flow Hi Pressure Assembly .....................10–38
Figure 10-35 Bypass Block Assembly .................................................10–40
Figure 10-36 Plate Power Supply Assembly ........................................10–41
Figure 10-37 0.39cc Gas Dose Assembly ............................................10–42
Figure 10-38 0.31cc Gas Dose Assembly ............................................10–43
Figure 10-39 Gas Dose Valve Assembly 1 of 3 ....................................10–44
Figure 10-40 Gas Dose Valve Assembly 2 of 3 ....................................10–45
Figure 10-41 Gas Dose Valve Assembly 3 of 3 ....................................10–46
Figure 10-42 Vacuum Cleaner Manifold ..............................................10–47
Figure 10-43 Crucible Bucket Assembly..............................................10–48
Figure 10-44 Micron Filter Assembly ..................................................10–49
Figure 10-45 Furnace Upper Door Assembly .......................................10–50
Figure 10-46 CO2 IR Cell (6.0 in).......................................................10–51
Figure 10-47 SO2 IR Cell (13.0 in) .....................................................10–52
Figure 10-48 SO2 IR Cell (0.35 in) .....................................................10–53
Figure 10-49 CO2 IR Cell (0.35 in).....................................................10–54
Figure 10-50 Dust Filter Assembly.....................................................10–55
Figure 10-51 Dust Filter Assembly (Heated) .......................................10–56
Figure 10-52 D-26 Component Pack ..................................................10–57
Figure 10-53 D-26 Component Pack ..................................................10–58
Figure 10-54 D-26 Component Pack ..................................................10–59
Figure 10-55 Flow Control Bracket/Card .............................................10–60
Figure 10-56 Flow Control and Heated Dust Filter Bracket/Cards ...........10–61
Figure 10-57 Power Protect Panel ......................................................10–62
Figure 10-58 Power Protect Panel ......................................................10–63
Figure 10-59 Variable Speed Cabinet Cooling Fan Assembly .................10–64
Figure 10-60 Furnace Control Bracket/Card Assembly..........................10–65
Figure 10-61 AC Distribution Panel Assembly......................................10–67

10–2 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-62 Analytical Manifold Assembly .........................................10–68
Figure 10-63 Linear Heated Pneumatic Auto Cleaner Assembly .............10–69
Figure 10-64 Common Sub View 1 of 2 ..............................................10–70
Figure 10-65 Common Sub View 2 of 2 ..............................................10–71
Figure 10-66 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–72
Figure 10-67 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–73
Figure 10-68 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–74
Figure 10-69 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–75
Figure 10-70 Analytical Manifold without Flow Scrubber .......................10–76
Figure 10-71 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–77
Figure 10-72 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–78
Figure 10-73 CS844 Component Pack Assembly..................................10–79
Figure 10-74 CS844 Component Pack Assembly with Monitor ...............10–80
Figure 10-75 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–81
Figure 10-76 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–82
Figure 10-77 Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen..........................10–83
Figure 10-78 Unique Subassembly ....................................................10–84
Figure 10-79 Valve Pinch Vacuum Dust Assembly................................10–85
Figure 10-80 Manual Heated Dust Filter Cap/Lance Assembly ...............10–86
Figure 10-81 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 1 of 9........................10–87
Figure 10-82 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 2 of 9........................10–88
Figure 10-83 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 3 of 9........................10–89
Figure 10-84 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 4 of 9........................10–90
Figure 10-85 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 5 of 9........................10–91
Figure 10-86 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 6 of 9........................10–92
Figure 10-87 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 7 of 9........................10–93
Figure 10-88 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 8 of 9........................10–94
Figure 10-89 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 9 of 9........................10–95
Figure 10-90 Oxygen/EXH/Pneumatic Manifold Assembly with Plate.......10–96
Figure 10-91 Upper Block Moveable Scrubber Assembly .......................10–97
Figure 10-92 Cooling Reservoir/Heat Exchanger Assembly 1 of 2 ..........10–98
Figure 10-93 Cooling Reservoir/Heat Exchanger Assembly 2 of 2 ..........10–99
Figure 10-94 Auto Cleaner Assembly ...............................................10–100
Figure 10-95 22 Mntd Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 1 of 2 ....................10–101
Figure 10-96 22 Mntd Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 2 of 2 ....................10–102
Figure 10-97 22 Desktop Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 1 of 2 ................10–103

Illustrations 844 Series 10–3

 Figure 10-98 22 Desktop Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 2 of 2 ................10–104
Figure 10-99 Incoming Purifier and Incoming Scrubber Assembly........10–105
Figure 10-100 Crucible Gripper Assembly 1 of 2................................10–106
Figure 10-101 Crucible Gripper Assembly 2 of 2................................10–107
Figure 10-102 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 1 of 7 ...........10–108
Figure 10-103 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 2 of 7 ...........10–109
Figure 10-104 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 3 of 7 ...........10–110
Figure 10-105 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 4 of 7 ...........10–111
Figure 10-106 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 5 of 7 ...........10–112
Figure 10-107 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 6 of 7 ...........10–113
Figure 10-108 SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 7 of 7 ...........10–114
Figure 10-109 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 1 of 7 ......................10–115
Figure 10-110 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 2 of 7 ......................10–116
Figure 10-111 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 3 of 7 ......................10–117
Figure 10-112 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 4 of 7 ......................10–118
Figure 10-113 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 5 of 7 ......................10–119
Figure 10-114 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 6 of 7 ......................10–120
Figure 10-115 SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 7 of 7 ......................10–121
Figure 10-116 SL60 Shuttle Loader Back Plate Assembly....................10–122
Figure 10-117 SL60 Shuttle Loader Base Plate Assembly....................10–123
Figure 10-118 SL60 Shuttle Loader Card Assembly............................10–124
Figure 10-119 SL60 Shuttle Loader Carousel Tray Driver Assembly .....10–125
Figure 10-120 SL60 Shuttle Loader Carousel Centering Pin Assembly ..10–126
Figure 10-121 SL60 Shuttle Loader Mechanical Cover Assembly..........10–127
Figure 10-122 SL60 Shuttle Loader Wire Harness Routing Assy 1 of 2..10–128
Figure 10-123 SL60 Shuttle Loader Wire Harness Routing Assy 2 of 2..10–129
Figure 10-124 SL60 Shuttle Loader Cover Assembly ..........................10–130
Figure 10-125 SL60 Shuttle Loader Motor Cover Assembly .................10–131
Figure 10-126 SL60 Shuttle Loader Wiring Connection Assembly.........10–132
Figure 10-127 SL60 Shuttle Loader Card Cover Assembly ..................10–133
Figure 10-128 SL10 Shuttle Loader Carousel Tray Driver Assembly .....10–134
Figure 10-129 SL10 Shuttle Loader Card Assembly............................10–135
Figure 10-130 SL10 Shuttle Loader Chute Cast Assembly...................10–136
Figure 10-131 SL10 Shuttle Loader Alignment Bracket Assembly ........10–137
Figure 10-132 SL10 Shuttle Loader Wiring Assembly .........................10–138
Figure 10-133 SL10 Shuttle Loader Card Cover Assembly ..................10–139

10–4 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-1
Reference Card 1 of 2

Illustrations 844 Series 10–5

 Figure 10-2
Reference Card 2 of 2

10–6 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-3
Incoming Purifier & Incoming Scrubber Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–7

 Figure 10-4
Catalyst and Cellulose Trap Assembly

10–8 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-5
Incoming/Exhaust Manifold Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–9

 Figure 10-6
External Auto Cleaner Brush Assembly

10–10 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-7
Flow Scrubber and Particle Filter Panel Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–11

 Figure 10-8
Incoming Purifier Assembly

10–12 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-9
Catalyst Heater Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–13

 Figure 10-10
Induction Coil Cover Assembly

10–14 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-11
Pneumatic Manifold, Card, and Bracket Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–15

 Figure 10-12
RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 1 of 2

10–16 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-13
RF Cabinet Fan Assembly 2 of 2

Illustrations 844 Series 10–17

 Figure 10-14
Carrier Flow Sensor Assembly

10–18 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-15
RF Enclosure Assembly 1 of 5

Illustrations 844 Series 10–19

 Figure 10-16
RF Enclosure Assembly 2 of 5

10–20 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-17
RF Enclosure Assembly 3 of 5

Illustrations 844 Series 10–21

 Figure 10-18
RF Enclosure Assembly 4 of 5

10–22 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-19
RF Enclosure Assembly 5 of 5

Illustrations 844 Series 10–23

 Figure 10-20
Pneumatic Manifold Assembly

10–24 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-21
Heated Flow Controller Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–25

 Figure 10-22
MeFC Temperature Controller Card/Bracket Assembly

10–26 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-23
Combustion Tube Kit

Illustrations 844 Series 10–27

 Figure 10-24
Combustion Tube Base Assembly

10–28 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-25
Front Alcove Casting and Light Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–29

 Figure 10-26
Combustion Tube Housing Assembly 1 of 2

10–30 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-27
Combustion Tube Housing Assembly 2 of 2

Illustrations 844 Series 10–31

 Figure 10-28
Catalyst Heater Cooling Loop Manifold
(CS/C844)

10–32 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-29
Pedestal Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–33

 Figure 10-30
DC Distribution Card and Bracket Assembly

10–34 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-31
IR Cell Clamping Block

Illustrations 844 Series 10–35

 Figure 10-32
IR Cell Mounting Plate Assembly

10–36 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-33
IR Manifold with Catalyst Bypass Block

Illustrations 844 Series 10–37

 Figure 10-34
IR Manifold Low Flow Hi Pressure Assembly
(CS844ES)

10–38 844 Series Illustrations

Illustrations 844 Series 10–39
 Figure 10-35
Bypass Block Assembly
(C/S844)

10–40 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-36
Plate Power Supply Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–41

 Figure 10-37
0.39cc Gas Dose Assembly

10–42 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-38
0.31cc Gas Dose Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–43

 Figure 10-39
Gas Dose Valve Assembly 1 of 3

10–44 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-40
Gas Dose Valve Assembly 2 of 3

Illustrations 844 Series 10–45

 Figure 10-41
Gas Dose Valve Assembly 3 of 3

10–46 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-42
Vacuum Cleaner Manifold

Illustrations 844 Series 10–47

 Figure 10-43
Crucible Bucket Assembly

10–48 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-44
Micron Filter Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–49

 Figure 10-45
Furnace Upper Door Assembly

10–50 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-46
CO2 IR Cell (6.0 in)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–51

 Figure 10-47
SO2 IR Cell (13.0 in)

10–52 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-48
SO2 IR Cell (0.35 in)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–53

 Figure 10-49
CO2 IR Cell (0.35 in)

10–54 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-50
Dust Filter Assembly
(C844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–55

 Figure 10-51
Dust Filter Assembly (Heated)
(CS/S844)

10–56 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-52
D-26 Component Pack
(C844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–57

 Figure 10-53
D-26 Component Pack
(S844)

10–58 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-54
D-26 Component Pack
(CS844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–59

 Figure 10-55
Flow Control Bracket/Card
(C844)

10–60 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-56
Flow Control and Heated Dust Filter Bracket/Cards
(CS/S844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–61

 Figure 10-57
Power Protect Panel
(CS/S844)

10–62 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-58
Power Protect Panel
(C844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–63

 Figure 10-59
Variable Speed Cabinet Cooling Fan Assembly

10–64 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-60
Furnace Control Bracket/Card Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–65

This page intentionally left blank.

10–66 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-61
AC Distribution Panel Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–67

 Figure 10-62
Analytical Manifold Assembly
(CS/C844)

10–68 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-63
Linear Heated Pneumatic Auto Cleaner Assembly
(CS/S844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–69

 Figure 10-64
Common Sub View 1 of 2

10–70 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-65
Common Sub View 2 of 2
Illustrations 844 Series 10–71
 Figure 10-66
Unique Subassembly
(C844)

10–72 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-67
Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen
(C844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–73

 Figure 10-68
Unique Subassembly
(S844)

10–74 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-69
Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen
(S844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–75

 Figure 10-70
Analytical Manifold without Flow Scrubber
(S844)

10–76 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-71
Unique Subassembly
(CS844)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–77

 Figure 10-72
Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen
(CS844)

10–78 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-73
CS844 Component Pack Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–79

 Figure 10-74
CS844 Component Pack Assembly with Monitor

10–80 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-75
Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen
(CS844ES)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–81

 Figure 10-76
Unique Subassembly
(CS844ES)

10–82 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-77
Unique Subassembly with Touch Screen
(S844ES)

Illustrations 844 Series 10–83

 Figure 10-78
Unique Subassembly
(S844ES)

10–84 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-79
Valve Pinch Vacuum Dust Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–85

 Figure 10-80
Manual Heated Dust Filter Cap/Lance Assembly

10–86 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-81
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 1 of 9

Illustrations 844 Series 10–87

 Figure 10-82
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 2 of 9

10–88 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-83
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 3 of 9

Illustrations 844 Series 10–89

 Figure 10-84
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 4 of 9

10–90 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-85
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 5 of 9

Illustrations 844 Series 10–91

 Figure 10-86
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 6 of 9

10–92 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-87
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 7 of 9

Illustrations 844 Series 10–93

 Figure 10-88
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 8 of 9

10–94 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-89
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly 9 of 9

Illustrations 844 Series 10–95

 Figure 10-90
Oxygen/EXH/Pneumatic Manifold Assembly with Plate

10–96 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-91
Upper Block Moveable Scrubber Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–97

 Figure 10-92
Cooling Reservoir/Heat Exchanger Assembly 1 of 2

10–98 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-93
Cooling Reservoir/Heat Exchanger Assembly 2 of 2

Illustrations 844 Series 10–99

 Figure 10-94
Auto Cleaner Assembly
(C844)

10–100 844 Series Illustrations

Optional Equipment Illustrations

Figure 10-95
22 Mntd Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 1 of 2

Illustrations 844 Series 10–101

 Figure 10-96
22 Mntd Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 2 of 2

10–102 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-97
22 Desktop Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 1 of 2

Illustrations 844 Series 10–103

 Figure 10-98
22 Desktop Disp Port T/Screen Monitor 2 of 2

10–104 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-99
Incoming Purifier and Incoming Scrubber Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–105

 Figure 10-100
Crucible Gripper Assembly 1 of 2

10–106 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-101
Crucible Gripper Assembly 2 of 2

Illustrations 844 Series 10–107

 Figure 10-102
SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 1 of 7

10–108 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-103
SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 2 of 7

Illustrations 844 Series 10–109

 Figure 10-104
SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 3 of 7

10–110 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-105
SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 4 of 7

Illustrations 844 Series 10–111

 Figure 10-106
SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 5 of 7

10–112 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-107
SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 6 of 7

Illustrations 844 Series 10–113

 Figure 10-108
SL10 Horizontal Shuttle Loader Assembly 7 of 7

10–114 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-109
SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 1 of 7

Illustrations 844 Series 10–115

 Figure 10-110
SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 2 of 7

10–116 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-111
SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 3 of 7

Illustrations 844 Series 10–117

 Figure 10-112
SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 4 of 7

10–118 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-113
SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 5 of 7

Illustrations 844 Series 10–119

 Figure 10-114
SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 6 of 7

10–120 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-115
SL60 Horizontal Loader Assembly 7 of 7

Illustrations 844 Series 10–121

 Figure 10-116
SL60 Shuttle Loader Back Plate Assembly

10–122 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-117
SL60 Shuttle Loader Base Plate Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–123

 Figure 10-118
SL60 Shuttle Loader Card Assembly

10–124 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-119
SL60 Shuttle Loader Carousel Tray Driver Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–125

 Figure 10-120
SL60 Shuttle Loader Carousel Centering Pin Assembly

10–126 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-121
SL60 Shuttle Loader Mechanical Cover Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–127

 Figure 10-122
SL60 Shuttle Loader Wire Harness Routing Assy 1 of 2

10–128 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-123
SL60 Shuttle Loader Wire Harness Routing Assy 2 of 2

Illustrations 844 Series 10–129

 Figure 10-124
SL60 Shuttle Loader Cover Assembly

10–130 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-125
SL60 Shuttle Loader Motor Cover Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–131

 Figure 10-126
SL60 Shuttle Loader Wiring Connection Assembly

10–132 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-127
SL60 Shuttle Loader Card Cover Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–133

 Figure 10-128
SL10 Shuttle Loader Carousel Tray Driver Assembly

10–134 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-129
SL10 Shuttle Loader Card Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–135

 Figure 10-130
SL10 Shuttle Loader Chute Cast Assembly

10–136 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-131
SL10 Shuttle Loader Alignment Bracket Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–137

 Figure 10-132
SL10 Shuttle Loader Wiring Assembly

10–138 844 Series Illustrations

 Figure 10-133
SL10 Shuttle Loader Card Cover Assembly

Illustrations 844 Series 10–139

This page intentionally left blank.

10–140 844 Series Illustrations

11 Schematics
The Schematics chapter provides electronic information for service of
the instrument. For part numbers of circuit boards, assemblies, and
components, refer to the schematic diagrams.

This section includes only the pages of the schematic drawing that
are applicable for service of the instrument.

Figure 11-1 AC Power Entry Module.................................................... 11–3

Figure 11-2 Power Distribution........................................................... 11–4
Figure 11-3 AC and DC Heaters.......................................................... 11–5
Figure 11-4 IR Cells.......................................................................... 11–6
Figure 11-5 Analytical Flow Control .................................................... 11–7
Figure 11-6 Pneumatic Flow Control ................................................... 11–8
Figure 11-7 RF Furnace Control.......................................................... 11–9
Figure 11-8 Doser Controller ............................................................11–10
Figure 11-9 60-Position Shuttle Loader (Optional) ...............................11–11
Figure 11-10 10-Position Shuttle Loader (Optional) .............................11–12
Figure 11-11 Enhanced Sensitivity Control .........................................11–13
Figure 11-12 RF Furnace Assembly....................................................11–14
Figure 11-13 Plate Supply Assembly ..................................................11–15
Figure 11-14 High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly.................................11–16

Schematics 844 Series 11–1

This page intentionally left blank.

11–2 844 Series Schematics

 Figure 11-1
AC Power Entry Module

Schematics 844 Series 11–3

 Figure 11-2
Power Distribution

11–4 844 Series Schematics

 Figure 11-3
AC and DC Heaters

Schematics 844 Series 11–5

 Figure 11-4
IR Cells

11–6 844 Series Schematics

 Figure 11-5
Analytical Flow Control

Schematics 844 Series 11–7

 Figure 11-6
Pneumatic Flow Control

11–8 844 Series Schematics

 Figure 11-7
RF Furnace Control

Schematics 844 Series 11–9

 Figure 11-8
Doser Controller

11–10 844 Series Schematics

 Figure 11-9
60-Position Shuttle Loader (Optional)

Schematics 844 Series 11–11

 Figure 11-10
10-Position Shuttle Loader (Optional)

11–12 844 Series Schematics

 Figure 11-11
Enhanced Sensitivity Control

Schematics 844 Series 11–13

 Figure 11-12
RF Furnace Assembly

11–14 844 Series Schematics

 Figure 11-13
Plate Supply Assembly

Schematics 844 Series 11–15

 Figure 11-14
High Efficiency Oscillator Assembly

11–16 844 Series Schematics

12 Glossary
A Calibration Plot: Displays the
certified composition versus the
Accuracy: Closeness of a measured measured composition of the sample.
value to the true value.
Cell: Refer to Detector.
Analysis Date: The date and time
the analysis completed. Check Standard: A standard whose
purpose is to assess the accuracy of a
Analysis Time: The length of time the measurement.
instrument is in the analysis state
after the analytes are introduced and D
until the final result is displayed.
Detector: A device that produces a
Analyte: The specific component voltage change in response to a
measured in a chemical analysis. change in the composition of the
material in its flow cell.
B
F
Baseline: Electronic line determined
as the zero or reference line that is Forced Through Origin: A calibration
used to differentiate the actual analyte curve in which the y-intercept is forced
composition. to equal zero, and the polynomial
coefficients are determined
Bias: Deviation of a measurement
numerically to minimize the total error
process from the true or accepted
between the “best-fit” polynomial and
value.
the measured values.
C Full Regression: A calibration curve
Calibration Curve: A series of in which the polynomial coefficients
standard samples containing known and the y-intercept are determined
compositions of the analyte are numerically to minimize the total error
analyzed. These standards should between the “best-fit” polynomial and
cover the range of interest and have a the measured values.
matrix composition as similar to the
M
samples as possible. A blank sample
must be analyzed and subtracted from Mass: The quantity of matter in an
each of the standard samples. The object. In the software, mass is the
adjusted area (Aadj) is plotted along equivalent of weight in the keypad
the y-axis, while the certified mass, in software.
grams, is plotted along the x-axis for
Mass Ratio: A measure of
each of the analyzed standard
composition in which the analyte mass
samples. The curve that best fits the
is computed as a ratio of the sample
plotted points is the calibration curve.
mass.
Calibration Factor: The slope of the
obtained calibration curve.
analyte( g )
MassRatio =
sample( g )

Glossary 844 Series 12–1

O Rounding: Rounding a numerical
value means replacing it with another
Origin: The intersection of the X and value that is approximately equal to
Y axes. On the calibration curve this is but easier to report and communicate
zero composition and zero signal. than the original value, which would
Orphan: The database keeps track of otherwise be misleadingly precise.
data objects such as samples, Numerical values in Cornerstone® are
calibrations, standards, methods, etc. rounded to the nearest digit; midpoint
that are associated with each other. values are rounded to the next
Orphan database objects are created number away from zero. For example,
when the connection between data 3.75 rounds to 3.8, 3.85 rounds to
objects is broken due to a rare 3.9; -3.75 rounds to -3.8, and -3.85
occasion such as when a sample is rounds to -3.9.
deleted and the software does not
S
perform the save correctly.
Sample: A determined mass of a
P substance of unknown analyte
Peak: When the analyte passes composition. The analyte composition
through the detector, there is a will be determined by performing the
change in the voltage that is analysis.
proportional to the amount of analyte
T
in the detector. After the analyte is
passed, the voltage returns to normal. Tare: Set the balance display to zero.
The region of this voltage change is
the peak. W
ppm: parts per million Weighting Factor: A factor used to
alter the significance of the measured
Precision: Variability of the individual values in a calibration curve.
results of replicate measurements.

R
Relative Error: The percent relative
error versus the certified composition
of the sample. Relative
Error=100*[(xi-xt)/xt] when xi is
Calculated Value and xt is Certified
Value.
Residual Error: Plots the residual
error versus the certified composition
of the sample. Residual
Error=Calculated-Certified.

12–2 844 Series Glossary

13 Index

A
Accessories List .............................................................................. 1–48
Adjusting Safety Pressure Regulator.................................................... 9–6
Air Filter, Maintaining ...................................................................... 6–55
Ambient Gauges ............................................................................. 3–13
Ambient Monitor Ranges .................................................................... 8–8
Ambient Parameters .......................................................................... 8–4
Ambient Parameter Definitions ........................................................... 8–6
Analyte Analysis, Disabling............................................................... 5–40
Analyzer, Installing ......................................................................... 2–12
Assembling and Reassembling Fittings............................................... 9–10
Assign Notify .................................................................................. 4–65
Auto Increment Sample Name .......................................................... 5–43
Automation
Auto Cleaner ......................................................................... 5–5
Auto Cleaner, Maintaining ..................................................... 6–28
Shuttle Loader ....................................................................... 5–6

B
Back Pressure Control...................................................................... 5–41
Balance
Configuring ......................................................................... 5–19
Installing ............................................................................ 5–13
Resetting ............................................................................ 5–21
Setting up Communication .................................................... 5–14
Testing ............................................................................... 5–21
Barometric Pressure, Calibrating ....................................................... 5–42

Index 844 Series 13–1

C
Calculation
Analysis Results..................................................................... 7–6
Calibration Equation ............................................................. 7–10
Calibrating
Hardware .............................................................................. 9–5
Shuttle Loader ....................................................................... 5–8
Calibration Definitions...................................................................... 3–42
Calibrations, Performing................................................................... 3–38
Carbon Analysis, Disabling ............................................................... 5–40
Carrier Gas Specifications ................................................................ 1–54
Catalyst Heater Tube, Replacing ....................................................... 6–16
Cellulose Trap Tube, Replacing ......................................................... 6–19
Cleaning
Filter Assembly .................................................................... 6–37
O-Rings, and Greasing............................................................ 6–8
Screen Filters ...................................................................... 6–24
Touch Screen ...................................................................... 6–53
Combustion Tube, Maintaining .......................................................... 6–33
Components List ............................................................................. 1–48
Compression Fittings, Assembling and Reassembling........................... 9–10
Computer, Installing........................................................................ 2–22
Coolant System, Maintaining ............................................................ 6–46
Cornerstone® Health Management .................................................... 5–36

D
Daily Startup Procedure ................................................................... 3–28
Database
Backup ............................................................................... 5–22
Restoring ............................................................................ 5–23
Validating ........................................................................... 5–22
Declaration of Conformity Statement ................................................. 1–31
Detectors ....................................................................................... 5–27
Infrared (IR) Cells ................................................................ 5–28
Diagnostic Chart ............................................................................... 8–4
Diagnostics ...................................................................................... 8–1
Digital I/O...................................................................................... 8–10
Digital Input Definitions ........................................................ 8–14
Digital Output Definitions ...................................................... 8–11

13–2 844 Series Index

 Disabling Analyte Analysis................................................................ 5–40
Drifts
Performing .......................................................................... 3–49
Logging in ........................................................................... 3–32
Dust Eject Tubing, Replacing ............................................................ 6–44
Dust Filter
Maintaining ......................................................................... 6–35
Temperature Setting ............................................................ 5–41

E
Electric Installation.......................................................................... 2–18
Equipment Packages ....................................................................... 1–38
Error Reports.................................................................................. 5–31
Ethernet Adapter, Instrument ........................................................... 2–33

F
Facility Requirements (in Specifications) ............................................ 1–54
Filter Assembly, Cleaning ................................................................. 6–37
Firewall Settings, Configuring ........................................................... 2–35
Fitting Assembling and Reassembling ................................................ 9–10
Flexible Replacement Tubing .............................................................. 9–9
Flow ................................................................................................ 8–3
Flow Scrubber Tube Replacing .......................................................... 6–21
Front Panel Overview, Instrument ................................................2–6, 2–8
Furnace Out Tube, Maintaining ......................................................... 6–41

G
Gas Flow States ................................................................................ 9–3
Gas Dose Maintenance, Performing ................................................... 6–49
Gas Doser ...................................................................................... 5–43
Gas
Pedestal Down State ............................................................ 5–39
Standby Mode ..................................................................... 5–39
Standby Time ...................................................................... 5–39
Wake Up, Scheduling............................................................ 5–40
Gas Wake Up, Scheduling ................................................................ 5–40
Greasing O-Rings, and Cleaning.......................................................... 6–8

Index 844 Series 13–3

H
Hardware, Calibrating........................................................................ 9–5
History .......................................................................................... 5–25
Homing Shuttle Loader ...................................................................... 5–6

I
Illustrations.................................................................................... 10–1
Incoming Purifier Tube, Replacing ..................................................... 6–12
Incoming Scrubber Tube, Replacing .................................................... 6–9
Infrared (IR) Cells ........................................................................... 5–28
Installing
Analyzer ............................................................................. 2–12
Balance .............................................................................. 5–13
Computer............................................................................ 2–22
Electrical............................................................................. 2–18
Oscillator Tube .................................................................... 2–16
Pedestal.............................................................................. 2–17
Software ............................................................................. 2–34
Touch Screen Monitor ........................................................... 2–23
Vacuum Cleaner .................................................................. 2–20
Instrument Ethernet Adapter............................................................ 2–33
Instrument Front Panel Overview .................................................2–6, 2–8
Instrument Rear Panel Overview ....................................................... 2–10

L
Language Selection ......................................................................... 3–18
Leak Check .................................................................................... 8–15
Leak Check Troubleshooting ............................................................. 8–16
Lifting and Moving the Instrument....................................................... 2–5
Logging in
Blank.................................................................................. 3–31
Drift ................................................................................... 3–32
Gas Dose ............................................................................ 3–32
Sample ............................................................................... 3–32
Standard............................................................................. 3–31
Template ............................................................................ 3–33

13–4 844 Series Index

M
Maintaining
Auto Cleaner ....................................................................... 6–28
Combustion Tube ................................................................. 6–33
Coolant System ................................................................... 6–46
Dust Filter........................................................................... 6–35
Furnace Out Tube ................................................................ 6–41
Gas Dose ............................................................................ 6–49
Manual Cleaner.................................................................... 6–32
Shuttle Loader ..................................................................... 6–56
Vacuum Cleaner .................................................................. 6–48
Maintenance Counters History .......................................................... 5–25
Maintenance, Periodic Schedule .......................................................... 6–5
Manual Cleaner, Maintaining............................................................. 6–32
Message History, Viewing................................................................. 5–24
Methods, Creating and Editing .......................................................... 4–13
Method Parameters ......................................................................... 4–15
Mobile Devices................................................................................ 4–60

N
Notice, Warranty............................................................................. 1–23

O
Optional Equipment......................................................................... 1–43
Optional Equipment Illustrations ....................................................10–101
O-Rings, Cleaning and Greasing.......................................................... 6–8
Oscillator Tube, Installing................................................................. 2–16
Override Conditions......................................................................... 7–12

P
Packing
Catalyst Heater Tube ............................................................ 6–17
Cellulose Trap Tube.............................................................. 6–19
Flow Scrubber Tube.............................................................. 6–22
Incoming Purifier Tube.......................................................... 6–13
Incoming Scrubber Tube ....................................................... 6–10
Part Numbers, Replacement Tubing..................................................... 9–9
Particle Filter, Replacing................................................................... 6–27

Index 844 Series 13–5

 Pedestal, Installing.......................................................................... 2–17
Periodic Schedule Maintenance ........................................................... 6–5
Pinch Valve Tubing, Replacing .......................................................... 6–44
Plot Stack View............................................................................... 3–14
Power Requirements, Electrical Wiring Diagrams................................. 2–18
Pneumatic Gas Filter, Replacing ........................................................ 6–25
Printer ........................................................................................... 5–43

Q
Quality Control (QC), Configuring...................................................... 4–17
R
Rear Panel Overview, Instrument ...................................................... 2–10
Recalculating .................................................................................. 3–52
Registration Key
Error Messages .................................................................... 2–36
Troubleshooting ................................................................... 2–35
Updating............................................................................. 5–37
Replacement Tubing Part Numbers...................................................... 9–9
Replacing
Dust Eject Tubing................................................................. 6–44
Particle Filter ....................................................................... 6–27
Pneumatic Gas Filter ............................................................ 6–25
Rounding, Cornerstone® Brand Software............................................ 7–14
S
Safety Pressure Regulator Adjustment ................................................. 9–6
Sample
Analyzing ............................................................................ 3–53
Deleting.............................................................................. 3–54
Logging in ........................................................................... 3–32
Sample Filters ................................................................................ 3–56
Applying Saved.................................................................... 3–60
Comments .......................................................................... 3–59
Date................................................................................... 3–58
Deleting.............................................................................. 3–60
Description.......................................................................... 3–58
Excluded............................................................................. 3–58
Methods.............................................................................. 3–57

13–6 844 Series Index

 Operator ............................................................................. 3–59
Sample Type ....................................................................... 3–56
Saving................................................................................ 3–60
Scheduling Gas Wake Up ................................................................. 5–40
Screen Filters, Cleaning ................................................................... 6–24
Service Key .................................................................................... 5–32
Shuttle Loader .................................................................................. 5–6
Calibrating ............................................................................ 5–8
Homing................................................................................. 5–6
Maintaining ......................................................................... 6–56
Software
Antivirus ............................................................................. 2–33
Confidentiality ..................................................................... 1–21
Copyright and Proprietary Information.................................... 1–20
Definitions .......................................................................... 1–19
Enhancements and Support................................................... 1–20
Installing ............................................................................ 2–34
License Grant ...................................................................... 1–19
Overview .............................................................................. 3–5
Software License.................................................................. 1–19
Termination of Software License ............................................ 1–20
Updating............................................................................. 5–37
Windows® Settings............................................................... 2–33
Software Settings (Required)............................................................ 2–32
Spare Parts Reference Card .............................................................. 10–5
Specifications ................................................................................. 1–54
Stack Plots View, Changing .............................................................. 3–14
Standards
Creating and Editing............................................................. 4–39
Logging in ........................................................................... 3–31
Startup Procedure, Daily .................................................................. 3–28
Sulfur Analysis, Disabling................................................................. 5–40
System Check ................................................................................ 8–17

Index 844 Series 13–7

T
Task Center...................................................................................... 3–8
Template
Creating and Editing............................................................. 4–41
Logging in ........................................................................... 3–33
Sample ............................................................................... 4–42
Single-Sample ..................................................................... 4–43
Theory of Operation .......................................................................... 7–1
Touch Screen Monitor, Installing ....................................................... 2–23

U
Updating
Registration Key .................................................................. 5–37
Software ............................................................................. 5–37
User Permissions ............................................................................ 4–51

V
Vacuum Cleaner
Installing ............................................................................ 2–20
Maintaining ......................................................................... 6–48
Manifold.............................................................................. 6–48
Valve States, Viewing ...................................................................... 9–19

W
Warranty ....................................................................................... 1–23
WEEE Statements ........................................................................... 1–24
Windows® Settings.......................................................................... 2–33
Wiring Diagrams, Electrical............................................................... 2–18

13–8 844 Series Index